manualshive.com logo in svg

Rohde & Schwarz 1311.6010.22, User Manual

Share
Download
Rohde & Schwarz 1311.6010.22 User Manual Download Page 1440

Index

R&S

®

 ZNB/ZNBT

1440

User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 53

During measurement .............................................. 1374
FPGA update .......................................................... 1375

ESB ................................................................................. 738
ESD ................................................................................... 20
ESE ......................................................................... 734, 739
ESR ................................................................................. 739
Evaluation of data ............................................................. 76
Evaluation Range Dialog .................................................331
EVENt register ................................................................ 735
Execution (command)

overlapping  .............................................................. 730
sequential  ................................................................ 730

Export

Sweep segments ...................................................... 404

Export Data - <File Type> dialog .....................................338

Ask Before Overwriting ............................................. 340
Comment Added to File ............................................ 341
Contents ................................................................... 340
Output Format ...........................................................340

Export Data - ASCII Files dialog

Add Ref Impedances ................................................ 340
Decimal Separator .................................................... 341
Field Separator ......................................................... 341
Formatted Values ...................................................... 340

Export Data - MatLab Files dialog

Add Ref Impedances ................................................ 340
Field Separator ......................................................... 341
Formatted Values ...................................................... 340

Export Data - Touchstone Files dialog

Normalize with Port-Specific Impedances ................ 340
Symmetric Params ................................................... 340

Export Markers ................................................................ 367
Export snp Files

Active Channel ..........................................................343
All Channels ..............................................................343
Assign port numbers ................................................. 343
Reset Port Assignments ........................................... 343
Select ports ............................................................... 343
Select Ports .............................................................. 342

EXT TRIG IN ................................................................. 1383
EXT TRIG OUT ............................................................. 1383
EXT TRIG OUT / IN .................................................... 42, 44
Extended Power Range .................................................. 231
Extended Time Domain Analysis (R&S

 

ZNB/ZNBT-K20) 211

External Devices ............................................................. 690
External Frequency ......................................................... 687
External generator ...........................................................239
External Generators dialog ............................................. 696
External Matrices dialog .................................................. 701
External Ports ..................................................................700
External power meter ...................................................... 237
External Power Meter Config dialog ................................695
External Power Meters dialog ......................................... 691
External reference ........................................................... 687
Eye Diag ..........................................................................618
Eye diagram

Basic settings ............................................................620
Display measurements ............................................. 618
DUT .......................................................................... 630
Emphasis .................................................................. 625
Enable/disable .......................................................... 618
Equalization .............................................................. 631
Export measurements ...............................................620
Generator bit pattern .................................................625
Generator bit stream ................................................. 621
Generator bit stream file ........................................... 622
Generator bit stream length ...................................... 621

Generator encoder ....................................................625
Generator levels ............................................... 622, 625
Generator low pass ...................................................623
Generator modulation ....................................... 622, 625
Generator rise time ........................................... 623, 625
Generator scrambler ................................................. 625
Generator settings .................................................... 624
Generator symbol rate .............................................. 622
Jitter .......................................................................... 627
Mask configuration ....................................................633
Mask test .................................................................. 632
Noise .........................................................................629
Select displayed measurements ............................... 619

Eye Diagram simulation

Advanced settings .................................................... 624

Eye Mask Test

Define Mask Configuration ....................................... 633

F

Factor (averaging) ........................................................... 392
Factory calibration ......................................................... 1380
Favorites ......................................................................... 608
File softtool ...................................................................... 603

Favorites tab ............................................................. 608
More tab .................................................................... 611
Print tab .................................................................... 609
Recall Sets tab ..........................................................604
Trace Data tab .......................................................... 611

Firewall .............................................................................. 32
Firmware

Setup file ................................................................. 1380

Firmware installation ..................................................... 1380
First Partial Meas'ment ....................................................396
Fixture Compensation

All Compensation Off ................................................ 576
All Compensation On ................................................ 576
Auto Length .............................................................. 575
Auto Length and Loss ............................................... 575
Direct Compensation ................................................ 575

Fixture Compensation dialog .......................................... 574
Flatness Cal

Convergence ............................................................ 492
Max Iterations ........................................................... 492
Tolerance .................................................................. 492

Flatness calibration ......................................................... 175
Font Size ......................................................................... 664
Format softtool ................................................................ 284
Formula (PAE) ................................................................. 283
FPGA update failure ......................................................1375
Freq for Loss ................................................................... 578
Freq Step Size ................................................................ 394
Freq Sweep Mode

Stepped .................................................................... 396
Swept ........................................................................ 396

Frequency ....................................................................... 549
Frequency (mixer) ........................................................... 556
Frequency conversion measurements

R&S

 

ZNB/ZNBT-K4 .................................................. 217

Frequency reference ....................................................... 687
Frequency Resolution 1 mHz (R&S

 

ZNB/ZNBT-K19) ..... 227

Front panel

LED controls ............................................................... 41
Mini display ................................................................. 40
R&S

 

ZNB .................................................................... 33

R&S

 

ZNBT .................................................................. 39

USB ............................................................................ 41

Summary of Contents for 1311.6010.22

Page 1: ...ZNB ZNBT Vector Network Analyzers User Manual User Manual Version 53 1173916302 éÍ2 Sie haben Fragen oder wünschen eine Beratung Angebotsanfrage unter 07121 51 50 50 oder über info datatec de Distributed by ...

Page 2: ... 100 kHz to 40 GHz 4 test ports order no 1311 6010 84 variant 84 R S ZNBT8 9 kHz to 8 5 GHz 4 test ports up to 24 ports optional order no 1318 7006 24 R S ZNBT20 100 kHz to 20 GHz 8 test ports up to 24 ports optional order no 1332 9002 24 R S ZNBT26 100 kHz to 26 5 GHz 8 test ports up to 24 ports optional order no 1332 9002 34 R S ZNBT40 100 kHz to 40 GHz 8 test ports up to 24 ports optional order...

Page 3: ...pographical Conventions 15 1 2 2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions 15 1 2 3 Notes on Screenshots 15 2 Safety Information 16 3 Firmware V3 12 17 3 1 Changes in Firmware Version 3 11 17 3 2 Changes in Firmware Version 3 10 17 4 Getting Started 19 4 1 Putting the Analyzer into Operation 19 4 1 1 Unpacking and Checking the Instrument 19 4 1 2 Positioning the Instrument 20 4 1 3 Bench Top Operatio...

Page 4: ...iagrams Traces and Markers 58 4 3 5 Entering Data 62 4 3 6 Scaling Diagrams 66 4 4 Performing Measurements 71 4 4 1 Transmission S Parameter Measurement 71 4 4 2 Reflection S Parameter Measurement 78 5 Concepts and Features 80 5 1 Basic Concepts 80 5 1 1 Global Persistent Settings 80 5 1 2 Recall Sets 81 5 1 3 Traces Channels and Diagrams 81 5 1 4 Sweep Control 83 5 1 5 Data Flow 90 5 2 Screen Ele...

Page 5: ...n 167 5 5 6 Scalar Power Calibration 174 5 5 7 SMARTerCal 180 5 5 8 Parallel Calibration of Multiple Channels 182 5 6 Offset Parameters and De Embedding 183 5 6 1 Offset Parameters 183 5 6 2 Embedding and Deembedding 189 5 7 Optional Extensions and Accessories 202 5 7 1 Additional Test Ports R S ZNBT only 203 5 7 2 Time Domain Analysis 203 5 7 3 Distance to Fault Measurements 215 5 7 4 Frequency C...

Page 6: ...nal Switch Matrices 241 6 GUI Reference 249 6 1 Function Keys and Softtools 249 6 2 Meas Softtool 251 6 2 1 S Params Tab 252 6 2 2 Ratios Tab 261 6 2 3 Wave Tab 264 6 2 4 Intermod Tab 267 6 2 5 Z Sij Tab 271 6 2 6 Y Sij Tab 273 6 2 7 Y Z Params Tab 274 6 2 8 Imbal CMRR Tab 276 6 2 9 Stability Tab 279 6 2 10 Power Sensor Tab 280 6 2 11 DC Tab 281 6 3 Format Softtool 284 6 4 Scale Softtool 290 6 4 1...

Page 7: ...ircle Test Tab 357 6 6 4 Display Circle Tab 360 6 6 5 Horiz Line Tab 361 6 7 Marker Softtool 362 6 7 1 Markers Tab 362 6 7 2 Marker Props Tab 365 6 7 3 Marker Search Tab 368 6 7 4 Multiple Peak Tab 373 6 7 5 Target Search Tab 375 6 7 6 Bandfilter Tab 376 6 7 7 Set by Marker Tab 381 6 7 8 Info Field Tab 382 6 7 9 Marker Coupling Tab 383 6 8 Stimulus Softtool 384 6 8 1 Stimulus Tab 384 6 8 2 Power T...

Page 8: ...7 6 12 3 Mode Tab 534 6 12 4 Intermod Tab 539 6 12 5 Pwr Cal Settings Tab 551 6 12 6 Mixer Mode Tab 551 6 13 Offset Embed Softtool 562 6 13 1 Offset Embed Dock Widget 563 6 13 2 Offset Tab 571 6 13 3 One Way Loss Tab 577 6 13 4 Single Ended Tab 579 6 13 5 Fixture Modeling Dialog 582 6 13 6 Port Sets Tab 593 6 13 7 Balanced Tab 595 6 13 8 Ground Loop Tab 598 6 13 9 Differential Match Tab 600 6 13 1...

Page 9: ...tings Tab 687 6 17 4 External Devices Tab 690 6 17 5 External Ports Tab 700 6 18 Help Softtool 710 6 19 Additional Function Keys 711 7 Remote Control 713 7 1 Introduction to Remote Control 713 7 1 1 Remote Control via USB 714 7 1 2 Starting a Remote Control Session 714 7 1 3 GPIB Explorer 715 7 1 4 Switchover to Remote Control 716 7 1 5 Combining Manual and Remote Control 719 7 2 Messages 720 7 2 ...

Page 10: ...f an SCPI Status Register 735 7 5 3 Contents of the Status Registers 737 7 5 4 Application of the Status Reporting System 744 7 5 5 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System 747 8 Command Reference 748 8 1 Special Terms and Notation 748 8 1 1 Upper Lower Case 749 8 1 2 Special Characters 749 8 1 3 Parameters 749 8 1 4 Numeric Suffixes 749 8 2 Common Commands 750 8 3 SCPI Command Reference 751 8 ...

Page 11: ...ace and Diagram Handling 1338 9 2 Condensed Programming Examples 1344 9 2 1 Path Independent RC Programs 1345 9 2 2 Trace and Diagram Handling 1345 9 2 3 Using Markers 1354 9 2 4 Data Handling 1356 9 2 5 Calibration 1360 9 2 6 Mixer Measurement 1366 9 2 7 RFFE GPIO Interface Programming 1369 9 2 8 Fixture Modeling 1371 10 Error Messages and Troubleshooting 1373 10 1 Errors during Firmware Operatio...

Page 12: ...ar Panel Connectors 1381 11 3 2 LAN Interface 1383 11 3 3 GPIB Interface 1384 11 3 4 Handler I O Universal Interface 1387 11 3 5 RFFE GPIO Interface 1395 11 4 Maintenance 1397 11 4 1 Cleaning 1397 11 4 2 Storing and Packing the Instrument 1398 11 4 3 Replacing Fuses 1398 11 5 Showroom Mode 1399 11 6 ENA Emulation Commands 1399 Glossary Frequently Used Terms 1407 List of Commands 1413 Index 1436 ...

Page 13: ...r Manual and Help The user manual contains the description of all instrument modes and functions It also provides an introduction to remote control a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples and information on maintenance instrument interfaces and error messages Includes the contents of the getting started manual The contents of the user manual are available as...

Page 14: ...rview of the instrument and deals with the specific char acteristics See https www rohde schwarz com brochure datasheet ZNB https www rohde schwarz com brochure datasheet ZNBT 1 1 7 Release Notes and Open Source Acknowledgment OSA The release notes list new features improvements and known issues of the current firmware version and describe the firmware installation The open source acknowledgment d...

Page 15: ...methods may be available to per form the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an addition ally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating pro cedures The term select may ref...

Page 16: ...d laboratory environ ments Use the R S ZNB ZNBT only for its designated purpose Observe the operat ing conditions and performance limits stated in the data sheet Where do I find safety information Safety information is part of the product documentation It warns you about the poten tial dangers and gives instructions how to prevent personal injuries or damage caused by dangerous situations Safety i...

Page 17: ...About from the main menu 3 1 Changes in Firmware Version 3 11 Solved issues Problems with fan control Impedance normalization failed for some special balanced port configurations User characterization of R S ZN Z154 did not work Firmware simulation trace noise could not be disabled in Simulation Config tool 3 2 Changes in Firmware Version 3 10 New functionality Ground loop de embedding per port gr...

Page 18: ...n SENSe CORRection COLLect CHANnels MCTYpes on page 1096 Solved issues Marker disappeared in zoom mode Calibrated imbalance and CMRR traces did not show Cal label Incorrect length offset calculation if a Short was connected when the Auto Length or Auto Length and Loss function was called Discrete markers did not always snap to sweep points Trace math on formatted data for source data traces an act...

Page 19: ...tem or user manual Risk of injury due to disregarding safety information Observe the information on appropriate operating conditions provided in the data sheet to prevent personal injury or damage to the instrument Read and observe the basic safety instructions provided with the instrument in addition to the safety instructions in the following sections In particular Do not open the instrument cas...

Page 20: ...A minimum distance of 10 cm to other objects is recommended The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation The instrument is positioned as described in the following sections The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges Signal outputs are connected correctly and are not overloaded In...

Page 21: ...instrument when the feet are folded out When the feet are folded out do not work under the instrument or place anything underneath The feet can break if they are overloaded The overall load on the folded out feet must not exceed 500 N 4 1 4 Operation in a 19 Rack The R S ZNB ZNBT can be mounted in 19 racks using the adapter R S ZZA KN5 order number 1175 3040 00 Proceed according to the mounting in...

Page 22: ...er no 1334 3424 02 only DisplayPort Monitor Standard cable DVI D Monitor 2 ferrite cores LAN At least CAT6 S FTP PCIe Standard cable USB Standard cables length 3m 4 1 6 Connecting the Analyzer to the AC Supply The network analyzer is automatically adapted to the AC supply voltage which must be in the range of 100 V to 240 V at 50 Hz to 60 Hz A line frequency of 400 Hz is also supported The mains c...

Page 23: ...itched off last time 2 If necessary press the standby toggle key on the front panel to switch the instru ment to ready state R S ZNB green LED goes on R S ZNBT PWR LED turns from amber to green The instrument automatically performs a system check boots the Windows oper ating system and then starts the vector network analyzer VNA application If it was terminated regularly the VNA application restor...

Page 24: ... switch the AC power off and disconnect the instrument from the power supply In ready state all modules are power supplied When switched to ready state the analyzer initiates its startup procedure Observe the instructions for startup and shutdown in Chapter 4 1 7 Starting the Ana lyzer and Shutting Down on page 23 4 1 9 Connecting External Accessories The analyzer s standard PC interfaces Monitor ...

Page 25: ...and reconnected even during measurements Keyboard configuration The default input language is English US Select Settings Time language Region language from the Windows Start menu to manage languages and key boards Windows 7 select Control Panel Clock Language and Region Region and Language Keyboards and Languages from the Windows Start menu to configure the keyboard properties To access Windows us...

Page 26: ...rinters from the Windows Start menu To access Windows use the button in the toolbar of the application window You can load updated and improved driver versions or new drivers from an installation disk USB memory stick or another external storage medium Alternatively if the ana lyzer is integrated in a network you can install driver data stored in a network directory In either case use the Add Prin...

Page 27: ...With direct con nection to a master device a connecting cable A B plug type A onto plug type B must be used For more information refer to Chapter 7 1 Introduction to Remote Control on page 713 4 1 10 Minimizing the VNA Application With a minimized VNA application you can access your analyzer s Windows desktop or run other applications To exit the default full screen mode of the VNA application des...

Page 28: ...s from the context menu Screen resolution in Windows 7 5 In the Windows display management a Change the Multiple displays setting to Show desktop only on 2 apply and confirm the modified settings Keep Changes b Select Display 2 in the panel at the top c Change the display Resolution to the desired value by dragging the slider click OK and confirm the modified settings Keep Changes 4 1 12 Remote Op...

Page 29: ...assigned automati cally If the network does not support DHCP or if the analyzer is set to use alternate TCP IP configuration the addresses must be set manually By default the analyzer is configured to use dynamic TCP IP configuration and obtain all address information automatically This means that it is safe to establish a physical connection to the LAN without any previous analyzer configuration ...

Page 30: ...n the Control Panel Network and Sharing Center Change adapter set tings dialog and right click the local connection Windows 7 open the Control Panel Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center Local Area Connection Status dialog 5 Select Properties and confirm the user account control message depending on your current user account If your current account is an administrator account select Yes ...

Page 31: ... as a new IP address may be assigned each time the instrument is restarted Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name but this name can be changed The default instrument name is a case insensitive string with the following syntax ZNB max freq GHz variant serial_number ZNB40 N serial_number ZNBT8 8 serial_number ZNBT 20 26 40 1 serial_number The serial number can be found on the re...

Page 32: ...ws PC and VNA to the LAN and make sure that an IP con nection can be established 2 At the remote Windows PC open a remote desktop connection type Remote Desktop Connection at the Windows Start Search menu and hit enter 3 In the Remote Desktop Connection dialog enter the VNA s computer name or IP address and select Connect If no external monitor is connected at the time you log in to the instrument...

Page 33: ... a user account control message to allow the desired changes see Figure 4 1 For detailed information about the firewall refer to the Windows Help Risks of changing the firewall settings Disabling the firewall or allowing exceptions may make your instrument more vulnera ble to viruses and intruders It is recommended to restore the default firewall configura tion after completing a task which requir...

Page 34: ...fer to Chapter 4 3 1 Manual Operation on page 46 The following sections contain further useful information about manual control of the instrument Refer to the other sections in chapter Chapter 4 3 Operating the Instrument on page 46 to learn how to handle traces and diagrams and how to use menus keys and softtools Refer to Chapter 5 2 1 Display Elements of a Diagram on page 92 to obtain informatio...

Page 35: ...s are presented The SCALE settings define how traces are scaled The TRACE CONFIG settings store traces to the memory and perform mathemat ical operations on traces The LINES settings define limits for the measurement results visualize them in the diagrams and activate deactivate the limit check The MARKER settings position markers on a trace configure their properties and select the format of the ...

Page 36: ...ys are only enabled while the cursor is placed on a data input field in a dialog or in the Help navigation pane The keys 0 to 9 enter the corresponding numbers The function of the and keys depends on the data type of the active input field In numeric input fields the keys enter the decimal point and a negative sign for the entered numeric value Multiple entries have not effect In character input f...

Page 37: ...eys in the NAVIGATION keypad are used to navigate within the touchscreen and the help system to access and control active elements The Cursor Up and Cursor Down keys are used to Scroll up and down in lists e g among menu items in a list of keywords in the Help table of contents or in the Help index Navigate between table rows in diagrams Press OK to toggle between navigation mode and data entries ...

Page 38: ...stimulus signal and measure the response signal in reflection For a measurement example refer to Chapter 4 4 2 Reflection S Parameter Measurement on page 78 With more than one test port it is possible to perform full two port 3 port or n port measurements see Chapter 5 3 1 S Parameters on page 116 In the standard R S ZNB configuration all test ports are supplied by a common source Four port instru...

Page 39: ...ved for the test ports with an admin istrative area to the right Brief explanations on the connectors and controls and the rear panel can be found on the next pages Figure 4 3 Front view of R S ZNBT40 fully equipped with the maximum 24 ports Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents Cleaning agents contain substances such as solvents thinners acetone etc acids bases or other substances Solvents ...

Page 40: ...an one test port it is possible to perform full two port 3 port or n port measurements see Chapter 5 3 1 S Parameters on page 116 Maximum input levels The maximum input levels at all test ports according to the front panel labeling or the data sheet must not be exceeded In addition the maximum input voltages of the other input connectors at the rear panel must not be exceeded It is recommended tha...

Page 41: ...meter signal generator or switch matrix LED controls Above the standby toggle switch some LEDs indicate various status information ERR operation state if an error occurs the LED lights up red for more informa tion on errors and troubleshooting see the R S ZNB ZNBT User Manual LAN LAN error occurred PWR power state ready standby see Chapter 4 1 8 Standby and Ready State on page 24 Standby key The s...

Page 42: ...front panel see USB Connectors on page 38 4 Monitor Display Port External monitor connector DisplayPort see Chapter 4 1 9 1 Connecting a Moni tor on page 25 5 USB Device Type B USB 3 0 device slave connector for remote control of the instrument see Chapter 4 1 9 6 Connecting a USB Cable for Remote Control on page 27 6 Monitor DVI D External monitor connector DVI D see Chapter 4 1 9 1 Connecting a ...

Page 43: ...r port analyzers The inputs can be used to apply an external DC voltage bias to the test ports For fuse replacement refer to Chapter 11 4 3 Replacing Fuses on page 1398 R S ZN B15 RFFE GPIO Interface 25 pin female connector providing 2 independent RF Front End RFFE interfaces according to the MIPI Alli ance System Power Management Interface Specification 10 General Purpose Input Output GPIO pins 1...

Page 44: ...rear view Table 4 4 Rear panel connectors available on all instruments Index Label Description 1 Power I O Power on off switch see Chapter 4 1 7 Starting the Analyzer and Shutting Down on page 23 2 Fuse holder Fuse holder see Chapter 11 4 3 Replacing Fuses on page 1398 3 LAN RJ 45 connector to integrate the instrument to a Local Area Network primarily for remote control purposes see Chapter 4 1 12...

Page 45: ...able system drive of the R S ZNBT containing all software including the operating system and the VNA application and data Do not remove the system drive during operation Option R S ZNBT B19 provides an additional removable system drive including operating system and firmware See Chapter 5 7 14 Additional Removable System Drive on page 231 13 Ground connector The ground connector provides the groun...

Page 46: ...nnecting External Accessories on page 24 or via Remote Desktop see also Chapter 4 1 12 Remote Operation in a LAN on page 28 Manual operation and remote control are described to their full extent in the GUI Refer ence and Command Reference chapters respectively GUI functions and their related remote commands are linked bidirectionally Background information is provided in the Concepts and Features ...

Page 47: ...drop traces info fields and even the softtool panel to your preferred position see Chapter 4 3 4 4 Using Drag and Drop on page 62 For example you can show hide the on screen hardkey panel by selecting deselecting Display View Bar Hard Key Panel On from the main menu Using Virtual Hardkeys To access an instrument function 1 Press a virtual key e g the MEAS key in the TRACE section The corresponding...

Page 48: ...ent e g Z S11 The diagram immediately reflects your selection The active trace shows the mea surement results for the selected measured quantity A control element with three dots e g SYSTEM SETUP Setup System Con fig opens a dialog containing a group of related settings a wizard or additional information Operating the Instrument ...

Page 49: ...CE MEAS Z Sij Z S11 The diagram immediately reflects your selection The active trace shows the mea surement results for the selected measured quantity At the same time the related softtool tab is opened Using context menus Context menus are another alternative for quick access to instrument settings 1 Touch and hold right click the measured quantity section in the trace info for a couple of second...

Page 50: ...Getting Started R S ZNB ZNBT 50 User Manual 1173 9163 02 53 2 Select S Parameter to open the Meas S Params softtool tab 3 Select Z Sij Z S11 Operating the Instrument ...

Page 51: ...l alternative ways for accessing an instrument function Using a function key on the virtual hardkey panel to open the related softtool rec ommended provides all settings Using the menus and submenus of the menu bar alternative to the previous method Using the context menus of certain display objects for important actions in the context of this object Using the icons in the toolbar above the diagra...

Page 52: ...2 1 Title Bar By default the analyzer GUI is shown in full screen mode covering the whole screen and hiding the Windows taskbar However you can toggle the full screen mode using SYSTEM DISPLAY View Bar Title and Task Bar On If full screen mode is switched off the main application window of the vector network analyzer application provides a standard Windows title bar 4 3 2 2 Toolbar The toolbar abo...

Page 53: ...ne drag drop the Mkr icon Delete the active trace single tap the trash icon or an arbitrary trace drag drop its trace info field to the trash icon Or delete all markers of a trace drag drop the marker info field to the trash icon These icons provide the following actions from left to right Print the current diagrams to a bitmap file same as SYSTEM FILE Print To File By default all diagrams are pri...

Page 54: ...ttom of the diagram As in any Windows application menus can be controlled with the touchscreen R S ZNB only or a mouse A short tap left mouse click expands a menu or sub menu If a menu command has no submenu assigned a short tap left mouse click opens a dialog or directly activates the menu command When a sub menu is selected the R S ZNB ZNBT displays the corresponding softtool Overview of menu fu...

Page 55: ...rovides assistance with the network analyzer and its operation You can toggle the visibility of the menu bar using SYSTEM DISPLAY View Bar Menu Bar 4 3 2 5 Menu Structure All menus show an analogous structure A menu command with a right arrow expands a submenu with further related set tings Example Marker expands a submenu with marker related properties A menu command with three dots appended call...

Page 56: ...esktop For the R S ZNB it is hidden by default for the R S ZNBT it is visible by default You can display the Hard Key panel using one of the following methods Select SYSTEM DISPLAY View Bar Hard Key Panel Select Display View Bar Hard Key Panel On from the menu bar Select Hard Key from the context menu of the softtool panel 4 3 2 7 Status Bar The status bar shows the active channel the current chan...

Page 57: ... status symbol if a switch matrix is configured See Chapter 5 7 22 External Switch Matrices on page 241 the current date and time Figure 4 8 R S ZNB ZNBT with redefined physical ports Figure 4 9 R S ZNB ZNBT with switch matrix The progress bar shows a moving color gradient if the current sweep is too fast to be monitored e g because the number of sweep points is low You can hide show the sta tus b...

Page 58: ... icon to create a screenshot of the dialog Drag and drop the lower right corner of the dialog to modify its size Some dialogs are subdivided into tabs containing groups of related settings Acti vate a tab to access those settings See also Chapter 5 2 2 1 Immediate vs Confirmed Settings on page 104 The Help system provides useful information about each dialog s specific settings Select Help to open...

Page 59: ...lay an additional quantity Typical scenario The transmission coefficient S21 is measured as described in Chap ter 4 4 1 Transmission S Parameter Measurement on page 71 A trace is added to display the reflection coefficient S11 for comparison To create a trace 1 Drag the Trc icon from the toolbar into a diagram The diagram changes its color scheme and contents as shown below 2 Select the adequate d...

Page 60: ... the measured quantity of the active trace Select TRACE TRACE CONFIG to access more trace handling functions Select SYSTEM DISPLAY to access more diagram handling functions 4 3 4 2 Adding New Markers A marker is needed for instance to read a particular numerical trace value To add a new marker Drag and drop the New Marker icon from the toolbar to the desired position in the target diagram The mark...

Page 61: ...arker info field onto the Delete icon Deleting a marker and its info field also disables the associated marker function To delete a trace drag and drop its trace line onto the Delete icon The active trace can also be deleted by tapping clicking the Delete icon Note however that the last remaining trace cannot be deleted To delete a diagram drag and drop its diagram number label onto the Delete ico...

Page 62: ...Deleting Display Elements on page 61 Reset suspend graphic zoom Zoom element in additional trace line Delete icon see Chapter 4 3 6 1 Using the Graphical Zoom on page 66 Marker Create See Chapter 4 3 4 2 Adding New Markers on page 60 Move horizontally Marker symbol Delete Marker or marker info field Delete icon see Chapter 4 3 4 3 Deleting Dis play Elements on page 61 Marker info field Add See Cha...

Page 63: ...te it 2 Press the DATA ENTRY keys as if you were writing a short message on your mobile phone Use 0 to 9 to enter the corresponding numbers Use and to enter a dot or hyphen Use Use G n M μ or k m to enter the letters G M or K case insensitive Use the key to correct wrong entries deleting the character to the left of the current cursor position Press to complete an entry Press ESC to discard the en...

Page 64: ...wn buttons to increment decrement the current value If a marker is active you can also set the numeric value to the current marker value Set to Marker 4 After completing the input string select ENTER to apply your selection and close the numeric editor STEP SIZE key If a numeric input field is active the STEP SIZE front panel key opens a dialog box containing the Step Size panel of the numeric edi...

Page 65: ... selection and close the keyboard 4 3 5 4 Using the Windows On Screen Keyboard The Windows on screen keyboard allows you to enter characters in particular letters even if an input field cannot call up the analyzer s own on screen keyboard Examples are input fields in standard Windows dialogs Figure 4 10 Windows 10 on screen keyboard To call up the on screen keyboard 1 Open the SYSTEM APPLIC softto...

Page 66: ...polar diagrams it is not available To activate the graphical zoom Select the Zoom Config icon in the toolbar above the diagram area and make sure that the graphical zoom mode is active Select the Zoom Select toggle button in the toolbar above the diagram area The icon changes its background color from black to blue In the active diagram area select an appropriate rectangular area The zoomed view s...

Page 67: ... On in the Zoom softtool tab toggles an overview The upper part of the diagram then shows a small version of the unzoomed diagram You can move the zoomed part of the trace by moving the rectangular area in the overview To zoom the stimulus range keeping the number of sweep points constant use the Zoom Config toolbar icon and select Mode Stimulus Zoom Then use the Zoom Select icon to narrow the swe...

Page 68: ... Div modifies the value of the vertical or radial diagram divi sions and thus the entire range of response values displayed The Scale Div and the Ref Value are indicated in the scale section of the trace info In the example below a Scale Div of 10 dB and a Ref Value of 0 dB is used To change such a scale parameter use one of the following methods Open the TRACE SCALE Scale Values softtool tab and ...

Page 69: ...and select the parameter from the context menu Select the parameter from the Trace Scale menu Use the Set by Marker functions see Chapter 4 3 6 6 Set by Marker on page 69 4 3 6 6 Set by Marker The Set by Marker functions are a convenient tool for scaling in particular magnify ing diagrams without entering explicit numeric values You simply place a marker to a trace point and use the marker values ...

Page 70: ...Max Marker to move the trace towards the upper diagram edge leaving the values of the vertical divisions Scale Div and the overall vertical scale unchanged Analogously select Min Marker to move the trace towards the lower diagram edge or select Ref Val Marker to move the trace towards the Ref Value You can also use marker values in the Numeric Editor see Chapter 4 3 5 2 Using the Numeric Editor on...

Page 71: ... Parameter Wizard correspond to the typical stages of any measurement 1 Select the test setup 2 Define port impedances 3 Select the measurement parameters and the diagrams 4 Define the sweep range 5 Adjust the receiver and source settings measurement bandwidth source power 6 Perform a calibration 4 4 1 Transmission S Parameter Measurement In a transmission measurement the analyzer transmits a stim...

Page 72: ...asurement you have to connect your DUT which for simplicity we assume to have appropriate connectors in between a pair of analyzer test ports It is recommended that you preset the R S ZNB ZNBT to start from a well defined instrument state DUT 1 2 VNA 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 17 DUT 1 2 VNA Performing Measurements ...

Page 73: ...ve at the DUT s output port port no 2 to the incident wave at the DUT s input port port no 1 The R S ZNB ZNBT automatically adjusts its internal source and receiver to the selected measured quantities For an S21 measurement a stimulus signal termed a1 is transmitted at the analyzer port no 1 the transmitted wave termed b2 is measured at port 2 The stimulus signal from the analyzer port no 2 is not...

Page 74: ...analyzer provides a wide range of sophisticated calibration methods for all types of measurements The calibration method to select depends on the expected system errors the accuracy requirements of the measurement on the test setup and on the types of calibration standards available The following example requires a calibration kit with a male Through standard with known transmission characteristic...

Page 75: ...ion is replaced by a generic port list The selection logic is unchanged 4 Select Next to proceed to the next page of the Calibration Setting wizard 5 Select the test port connector type and gender here N 50 Ω female correspond ing to a male Through standard and the calibration kit here R S ZV Z121 6 Tap Start Performing Measurements ...

Page 76: ...ZNBT has completed the calibration sweep and calculated the correction data the Apply button is enabled 8 Select Apply to close the wizard The system error correction is calculated and applied to the current channel A Cal label appears in the trace list To proceed with the measurement remove the Through standard and connect the DUT again 4 4 1 4 Evaluating Data The analyzer provides various tools ...

Page 77: ...choose the Delay of the transmission coefficient as displayed quantity The group delay represents the propagation time of the wave through the DUT it is displayed in a Cartesian diagram The marker info field shows the frequency and group delay at the marker position Refer to Chapter 5 2 3 Trace Formats on page 107 to learn more about the diagram properties 4 4 1 5 Saving and Printing Data The anal...

Page 78: ...ows clipboard 6 Select SYSTEM FILE Recall Sets Save to open the Save dialog for recall sets 7 In the Save dialog a Select a file location Look in b Enter a name for the recall set file File name c Select Save The analyzer saves the active recall set containing channel stimulus and trace settings to a znx file This recall set can be restored in a later session 4 4 2 Reflection S Parameter Measureme...

Page 79: ...ard and select an appropriate type A full n port calibration TOSM UOSM TNA corrects the system errors for all transmission and reflection S parameters Some of the trace formats are particularly suited for reflection measurements For instance you can display the measured reflection coefficient S11 in a Smith chart to obtain the complex input impedance at port 1 Proceed as described in Chapter 4 1 7...

Page 80: ...optimize the evaluation of results To ensure that the instrument resour ces are easily accessible and that user defined configurations can be conveniently implemented stored and reused the instrument uses a hierarchy of structures Global resources can be used for all measurements irrespective of the current measurement session A recall set comprises a set of diagrams together with the underlying s...

Page 81: ...recall sets A recall set only contains setup instructions i e information on how to measure how to process the measurement results and how to display the processed results It does not contain any trace or result data 5 1 3 Traces Channels and Diagrams The analyzer arranges displays or stores the measured data in traces which are assigned to channels and displayed in diagrams To understand the func...

Page 82: ... settings can be accessed via the keys in the TRACE section of the virtual hardkey panel They complement the Channel Settings accessible via the STIMULUS and CHANNEL sections Each trace is assigned to a channel The channel settings apply to all traces of the channel 5 1 3 2 Channel Settings A channel contains hardware related settings which specify how the network analyzer collects data The channe...

Page 83: ...lighted Channels with no traces are not indicated in the diagrams but can be accessed via the Channel Manager dialog In manual control there is always exactly one active trace irrespective of the number of channels and traces defined In remote control each channel contains an active trace See also Chapter 7 3 Basic Remote Control Concepts on page 726 5 1 4 Sweep Control A sweep is a series of cons...

Page 84: ...ort and receive port is used Each sweep point requires a single partial measurement See also Chapter 5 3 1 S Parameters on page 116 For a complete two port S parameter measurement e g S11 S21 S12 S22 the analyzer needs to interchange the roles of the source and receive ports Each sweep point requires two partial measurements To improve the accuracy it is possible to insert a delay time before each...

Page 85: ...ep points Trigger event starts m complete measurements at consecutive sweep points Sweep Segment Trigger event starts n partial sweeps over the next segment Trigger event starts complete mea surements at all consecutive sweep points in the segment Point All partial measurements of each sweep point are carried out one after another All partial measurements of each sweep point are carried out one af...

Page 86: ... used Arbitrary Drive Port Order R S ZNBT only When performing parallel measurements on multiple DUTs by default the R S ZNBT firmware automatically selects the ports that should be driven in parallel However due to possible crosstalk between DUT ports it can be beneficial to prevent some ports from being driven in parallel This could be achieved by changing the cabling of the DUT but this is not ...

Page 87: ...n a frequency step size of 1 MHz When two port groups are defined and a minimum frequency offset of 1 MHz is specified a parallel measurement with frequency offset is performed internally as follows In the first measurement step no measurements for port group 1 will be performed measurements for port group 2 will be performed at 100 MHz In the second measurement step measurements for port group 1 ...

Page 88: ...r Start Power dBm Stop Power dBm CW Frequency Hz CW Frequency Hz CW Mode CW Frequency Hz Number of Points CW Frequency Hz CW Frequency Hz Time CW Frequency Hz Stop Time s CW Frequency Hz CW Frequency Hz The ranges of numerical values must be compatible with the instrument model The conditions for the stimulus range depend on the sweep type Lin Freq Log Freq Segmented The supported frequency range ...

Page 89: ...2 2 2 Port Settings Dialog on page 519 5 1 4 4 Stepped vs Swept Mode The R S ZNB ZNBT provides two sweep modes stepped mode and swept mode In stepped mode default the frequency is changed stepwise and sampling is per formed at a tuned frequency for each measurement point In swept mode on the other hand sampling is performed with the frequency always swept for each measurement point Since in steppe...

Page 90: ... is essential to perform the Calibration with the same stepped swept mode set tings as for the actual measurement otherwise the calibration is turned off see Cal Off label on page 149 5 1 5 Data Flow The analyzer processes the raw measurement data in a sequence of stages to obtain the displayed trace The following diagram gives an overview The diagram consists of an upper and a lower part correspo...

Page 91: ...ta flow for individual traces 4 MEM 2 TRACE 1 TRACE 1 TRACE 2 MEM TRACE 2 AVERAGE Wave quantities ratios S parameters no conversion CMRR Impedance parameters Admittance parameters Stability factors RATIOS POWER CORRECTION DATA a POWER CORR or SMARTerCal OFFSET ALT 2 IMPEDANCE RENORMA LIZATION DEEMBEDDING Single Ended Port Set Balanced Ground Loop EMBEDDING Ground Loop Balanced Port Set Single Ende...

Page 92: ...ti cally unlimited number of traces which can be assigned to different channels Most diagram settings are arranged in the Display softtool hardkey SYSTEM DIS PLAY To assign traces and channels to diagrams use the control elements on the Trace Config Traces and Channel Config Channels softtool tabs hardkeys TRACE TRACE CONFIG and CHANNEL CHANNEL CONFIG Diagrams can contain A title optional The diag...

Page 93: ...e measured quantity is indicated in the trace list see Trace List and Trace Settings on page 94 A trace can be either a data trace a memory trace or a mathematical trace see Trace Types on page 93 Trace Types The analyzer uses traces to display the current measurement result in a diagram It is also capable of storing traces to the memory recalling stored traces and defining mathematical relations ...

Page 94: ...lored background The source port for wave quantities and ratios is indicated in brackets The format section shows how the measured data is presented in the graphical display Use the context menu of the format section to change the format of the related trace The next sections show the value of the vertical or radial diagram divisions Scale Div and the reference value Ref The channel section shows ...

Page 95: ...n the trace list A label Cal Off appears at the end of the trace line if the system error correction no longer applies to the trace 5 2 1 3 Markers Markers are tools for numerical readout of measured data and for selecting points on the trace or in general in the diagram area A marker is displayed with a symbol e g a triangle a crossbar or a line on the trace which can be a data trace or a memory ...

Page 96: ... the diagram scale Marker Function Search for specific points on the trace Marker Search Target Search Bandfil ter Activating and Moving Markers To activate a marker either select the marker symbol itself or the corresponding line in the marker info field To move the active marker on the trace use one of the following methods Drag the marker symbol to the desired position Cartesian diagrams only A...

Page 97: ...ference marker A Δ sign placed in front of the marker line indi cates that the marker is in delta mode Open the context menu of the marker info field to access frequently used marker set tings Customizing the marker info field To change the position appearance or contents of the marker info field use one of the following methods The info field can be moved to several positions in the upper and low...

Page 98: ... the respective target format This must be kept in mind when interpreting the results and physical units displayed The following table describes how a complex marker value z x jy is converted It makes use of the polar representation z x jy z ejφ z where z x2 y2 1 2 and φ z arctan y x Table 5 2 Marker formats Marker Format Description Formula Default For an individual marker this means that the mar...

Page 99: ...and either inductance or capacitance in three lines Inverted Smith diagram Gp Bp Lp or Cp Imp Mag or IMP Mag series Magnitude of series impedance Zs Rs 2 Xs 2 1 2 Imp Mag paral lel Magnitude of parallel impedance Zp Rp 2 Xp 2 1 2 Adm Mag or Adm Mag series Magnitude of series admittance Ys Gs 2 Bs 2 1 2 Adm Mag paral lel Magnitude of parallel admittance Yp Gp 2 Bp 2 1 2 Index Index of the current s...

Page 100: ...ic Marker Search Functions The search functions are tools for searching measurement data according to specific criteria A search consists of analyzing the measurement points of the current trace or of a user defined subrange termed the Search Range to find one of the following Absolute or relative local maxima and minima peak search Trace points with a specific response value target search Trace s...

Page 101: ...the upper band edge frequency Center is calculated as the geometric or arithmetic mean of the lower band edge frequency fLBE and the upper band edge frequency fUBE fCenter sqrt fLBE fUBE geometric mean or fCenter 1 2 fLBE fUBE arithmetic mean The arithmetic mean is always higher than the geometric mean The values are close if the bandwidth is small compared to the geometric mean of the band edges ...

Page 102: ...om the name segment s context menu to change the channel name The measurement mode identifier section optional indicates a special test mode of the channel e g the measurement at arbitrary port frequencies Arb Port n Start indicates the lowest value of the sweep variable e g the lowest frequency measured corresponding to the left edge of a Cartesian diagram The color legend shows the display color...

Page 103: ...ts Diagram Marker info field Trace list separate context menus for trace name section measured quantity sec tion format section scale section and channel section Channel list separate context menus for channel name section sweep range sec tion additional parameter section To open a context menu associated with a display element tap and hold R S ZNB only or right click the element for some seconds ...

Page 104: ...measurement is observable while the dialog is still open This behavior is particularly useful when a numeric value is incremented or decremented or when display elements are added or removed In most dialogs however it is possible to cancel an erroneous input before it takes effect The settings in such dialogs must be confirmed explicitly The two types of dialogs are easy to distinguish Dialogs wit...

Page 105: ...o the right of the pull down list are provided for easy navigation in the file system place the cursor on the icons to obtain Whats this help Windows Explorer opens the selected directory in the Windows Explorer File name specifies a filename to save the current data The analyzer adds the extension in the Files of type field Files of type filters the displayed files by type Open opens selected fil...

Page 106: ...nalyzer adds the extension in the Files of type field Files of type selects a particular file type for the created file Save saves the data in the selected file and directory and closes the dialog Cancel closes the dialog without saving the data Windows Explorer opens the selected directory in Windows Explorer If Ask Before Overwriting is enabled overwriting an existing file has to be con firmed T...

Page 107: ... the following trace formats Cartesian Trace Formats dB Mag Phase SWR Unwr Phase Lin Mag Log Mag Real Imag and Delay Complex trace formats Polar Smith and Inv Smith The VNA firmware allows arbitrary combinations of trace formats and measured quan tities However to extract useful information from the measured data it is important to select a trace format which is appropriate for the analysis of a p...

Page 108: ...e The following examples show dB Mag Cartesian traces for the same measured quan tity and sweep range but with Lin Freq and Log Freq sweep types Figure 5 3 S11 trace in dB Mag format sweep type Lin Freq top and Log Freq bottom Conversion of Complex to Real Quantities Among the measured quantities the R S ZNB ZNBT supports only Stability factors Power Sensor results and DC values are real All other...

Page 109: ...vertical direction Result values for consecutive stimulus values are interconnected by straight lines so the trace is represented as a polygonal chain in the complex plane The stimulus axis is not visible However the stimulus value for a given trace point can be displayed using a marker The difference between the different complex trace formats Polar Smith and Inv Smith is the coordinate system th...

Page 110: ...for definite magnitudes and phase angles The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of an open circuit Z infinity I 0 is one its phase is zero The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of a short circuit Z 0 U 0 is one its phase is 180 deg Smith For Smith traces the response values are interpreted as reflection coefficients Sii and represented in terms of their corresponding complex impedance Z...

Page 111: ... center of the diagram represents Z Z0 1 which is the reference impedance of the system zero reflection At the left and right intersection points between the hori zontal axis and the outer circle the impedance is zero short and infinity open The outer circle corresponds to zero resistance purely imaginary impedance Points outside the outer circle indicate an active component The upper and lower ha...

Page 112: ...plane Γ 0 is mapped to the reference impedance Z0 whereas the circle with Γ 1 is mapped to the imaginary axis of the Z plane The circles for the points of equal resistance are centered on the real axis and intersect at Z infinity The arcs for the points of equal reactance also belong to circles intersecting at Z infinity open circuit point 1 0 centered on a straight vertical line Examples for spec...

Page 113: ...verted Smith chart construction The inverted Smith chart is point symmetric to the Smith chart The basic properties of the inverted Smith chart follow from this construction The central horizontal axis corresponds to zero susceptance real admittance The center of the diagram represents Y Y0 1 where Y0 is the reference admittance of the system zero reflection At the left and right intersection poin...

Page 114: ...inary parts of Γ 2 2 2 2 0 Im Re 1 Im Re 1 Re Y Y G Im Re 1 Im 2 Im 2 2 0 Y Y B According to the two equations above the graphical representation in an inverted Smith chart has the following properties Real reflection coefficients are mapped to real admittances conductances The center of the Γ plane Γ 0 is mapped to the reference admittance Y0 whereas the circle with Γ 1 is mapped to the imaginary...

Page 115: ...ex formats real num bers represent complex numbers with zero imaginary part The following table gives an overview of recommended display formats Complex dimensionless quan tities S parameters and ratios Complex quantities with dimensions Wave quantities Z parameters Y parameters impedances admittan ces Real quantities Stability Factors DC 1 4 PAE Lin Mag ON ON default for Z parameters Y param eter...

Page 116: ...rix links the incident waves a1 a2 to the outgoing waves b1 b2 according to the following linear equation 2 1 22 21 12 11 2 1 a a S S S S b b Meaning of 2 port S parameters The four 2 port S parameters can be interpreted as follows S11 is the reflection coefficient of DUT port 1 i e the ratio between outgoing wave b1 and incident wave a1 in a forward measurement with matched DUT port 2 S11 b1 a1 i...

Page 117: ...S S S S S S S S S S S S b b b b 4 3 2 1 44 43 42 41 34 33 32 31 24 23 22 21 14 13 12 11 4 3 2 1 where again ai i 1 to 4 denote the incident bi i 1 to 4 denote the outgoing waves and the S parameters are expressed as Sij i j 1 to 4 The indices of the S parameters described so far number the output and input ports of a DUT the parameters are referred to as single ended S parameters The S parameter d...

Page 118: ... the dynamic range Amp Ext Gen 1 VNA 2 1 Dual Directional Coupler DUT Redefined Physical Port 1 a wave b1 b wave b2 Source Ext Gen 1 Figure 5 4 Redefined physical port 1 port 2 not used Amp VNA 3 2 coupler DUT Redefined Physical Port 1 a wave b2 b wave b3 Source Port 1 Redefined Physical Port 2 a wave a4 b wave b4 Source Port 4 1 4 Figure 5 5 Two redefined ports High Signal Power When dealing with...

Page 119: ...e for the differential mode is Z0d 100 Ω 2 Z0 The default value for the common mode is Z0c 25 Ω Z0 2 Renormalization can be based on two alternative waveguide circuit theories whose conversion formulas may yield different results if the reference impedance of at least one test port has a non zero imaginary part Conversion formula for wave quantities and S parameters Renormalization transforms the ...

Page 120: ... 0 1 0 1 ii ii ii ii ii A 1 1 1 5 3 3 Impedance Parameters An impedance is the complex ratio between a voltage and a current The analyzer pro vides two independent sets of impedance parameters Converted impedances each impedance parameter is obtained from a single S parameter Z parameters complete description of an n port DUT 5 3 3 1 Converted Impedances The converted impedance parameters Zij 1 i ...

Page 121: ...t i of the DUT U0 I1 U1 Z0i Zii Example For a 2 port DUT that is terminated at its output with the reference impedance Z02 Z11 is the input impedance matched circuit impedance measured in a forward reflection measurement A converted impedance Z11 completely describes a one port DUT The calculation formula of the converted reflection impedances Zii depends on the waveguide circuit theory according ...

Page 122: ... parameter Zij i j can also describe a parallel impedance between the two ports U0 I1 I2 U1 U2 U0 Z0j Zij Z0i The calculation formula of a converted parallel transmission impedance Zij depends on the waveguide circuit theory according to which Reference Impedances are calculated Table 5 6 Calculation of Converted Parallel Transmission Impedances Traveling Waves Power Waves Shunt thru Measurements ...

Page 123: ...d as an alternative to S parameters or Y parameters to characterize a linear n port network completely 2 Port Z Parameters In analogy to S parameters Z parameters are expressed as Zij where i denotes the measured and j the stimulated port The Z parameters for a two port are based on a circuit model that can be expressed with two linear equations 2 22 1 21 2 2 12 1 11 1 I Z I Z V I Z I Z V Meaning ...

Page 124: ...ter Y parameters complete description of the n port DUT 5 3 4 1 Converted Admittances The converted admittance parameters describe the input admittances of a DUT with fully matched outputs The converted admittances are the inverse of the Converted Impedances 5 3 4 2 Y Parameters The Y parameters describe the admittances of a DUT with output ports terminated in a short circuit voltage 0 The analyze...

Page 125: ...f propagation 5 3 5 Wave Quantities and Ratios The elements of the S Z and Y matrices represent fixed ratios of complex wave amplitudes As long as the assumption of linearity holds the S Z and Y parameters are independent of the source power The network analyzer provides two additional sets of measurement parameters which have an unambiguous meaning even if the DUT is measured outside its linear r...

Page 126: ...d to DUT port i In a standard forward S parameter measurement a1 Src Port 1 is the incident wave and b1 Src Port 1 is the reflected wave at DUT port 1 5 3 5 2 Ratios A ratio measurement provides the complex ratio of any combination of transmitted or received wave amplitudes Ratios complement the S parameter measurements where only ratios of the form bi aj ratios between outgoing and incoming waves...

Page 127: ...re Ratios dialogs Figure 5 6 More Wave Quantities dialog The following detectors are available Normal selects the default detector mode where each valid measurement point is displayed without modification The analyzer then proceeds to the next sweep point Normal detector mode ensures that the measurement is performed at maxi mum speed and that a meaningful complex result is obtained AVG Real Imag ...

Page 128: ...he warning disappears 5 3 6 Unbalance Balance Conversion Unbalance balance conversion is the simulation of one or more unbalance balance transformers baluns integrated in the measurement circuit It converts the DUT ports from an unbalanced state into a balanced state and virtually separates the differential and common mode signals The analyzer measures the unbalanced state but converts the results...

Page 129: ...ommon mode of each logical port Example 2 physical ports Reflection measurements on 1 balanced port Bal port Differential mode Zref Z0d Common mode Zref Z0c DUT Balanced port Log VNA port 3 physical ports Reflection and transmission measurements on 1 balanced port Bal port Differential mode Zref Z0d Common mode Zref Z0c DUT Balanced port Log VNA port Single ended port Single ended unbalanced port ...

Page 130: ... notation of a general S parameter is S mout min out in where mout and min denote the output and input port modes out and in denote the output and input port numbers Meaning of 2 port mixed mode S parameters The mixed mode 2 port S parameters can be interpreted as follows S mout min 11 is the mixed mode input reflection coefficient defined as the ratio of the wave quantities b1 mode mout to a1 mod...

Page 131: ...orts or one balanced and two single ended ports Both device types are fully characterized by 4x4 mixed mode S matrices 5 3 6 3 Imbalance and Common Mode Rejection An ideal unbalance balance transformer balun converts an unbalanced signal into a balanced one and vice versa When it is driven with an unbalanced signal at its physi cal port 1 single ended logical port 1 unbalanced signals with equal a...

Page 132: ...d balanced logical port j DUT Balanced port Log NWA port Single ended port Physical port c Logical port j balanced Physical port d Logical port i single ended Physical port a Imbji Sca Sda and Imbij Sac Sad CMRRji Sdsji Scsji and CMRRij Ssdij Sscij DUT with balanced logical ports i and j DUT Balanced port Log NWA port Balanced port Log NWA port Physical port c Logical port j balanced Physical port...

Page 133: ...ition can be tested with the stability factors μ1 and μ2 The μ1 and μ2 factors both provide a necessary and sufficient condition for uncondi tional stability The conditions μ1 1 or μ2 1 are both equivalent to unconditional stability This means that μ1 and μ2 provide direct insight into the degree of stability or potential instability of linear circuits References Marion Lee Edwards and Jeffrey H S...

Page 134: ...operations on the measured traces Some of the operations e g the time domain transform require additional software options see Chapter 5 7 Optional Extensions and Accessories on page 202 The R S ZNB ZNBT can also check whether the measured values comply with speci fied limits and export trace data using different file formats 5 4 1 Limit Check A limit line restricts the allowed range for some or a...

Page 135: ...nition The analyzer places few restrictions on the definition of limit line segments The following rules ensure a maximum of flexibility Segments do not have to be sorted in ascending or descending order e g the Start Stimulus value of segment no n does not have to be smaller than the Start Stimulus value of segment no n 1 Overlapping segments are allowed The limit check in the overlapping area is...

Page 136: ...ogarithmic interpolation mode that allows you to carry over the limit line definition to logarithmic sweeps While Show Limit Line is active the diagrams display all limit line segments Exception In a segmented frequency sweep with point based x axis gaps between the segments are minimized To facilitate the interpretation the R S ZNB ZNBT dis plays only the limit line segments which provide the lim...

Page 137: ...es not have to be smaller than the Start Stimu lus value of range no n 1 Overlapping ranges are allowed The limit check in the overlapping area is related to the tighter limit the pass test involves a logical AND operation Gaps between ranges are allowed and equivalent to switching off an intermediate ripple limit range Ripple limit ranges can be partially or entirely outside the sweep range howev...

Page 138: ... line which is defined by its center coordi nate in the diagram and its radius Depending on the diagram type circle limit can serve different purposes With a circle limit line centered on the origin of a polar diagram you can check whether the magnitude of the measurement results exceeds a limit defined by the radius of the limit line With a circle limit line adjusted to the right border of a Smit...

Page 139: ... User Manual 1173 9163 02 53 With a circle limit line centered on the left border of an inverted Smith diagram Y infinity you can check whether the imaginary part of the admittance Im Y sus ceptance falls below a limit Operations on Traces ...

Page 140: ...le has the extension limit and is stored in the directory shown in the Save Limit Line and Recall Limit Line dialogs The file starts with a preamble containing the channel and trace name and the header of the segment list The following lines contain the entries of all editable columns of the list Example of a limit line file The limit line is described by the limit line file Operations on Traces ...

Page 141: ...ing lines contain the entries of all editable columns of the list Example of a ripple limit file The ripple limit list is described by the ripple limit file Compatibility with other instruments The VNAs of the R S ZNx and R S ZVx families use the same file format Ripple limit files can be interchanged without restriction 5 4 2 Trace Files The R S ZNB ZNBT can store one or several data or memory tr...

Page 142: ...or Re Im MA for linear Mag Phase DB for Mag Phase in deci bels the data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dialog Reference resistance specifies the impedance system underlying the trace data given as a real positive resistance default 50 Ω Comment lines start with the exclamation mark and can contain any text used for documentation of the trace data file Any number of comm...

Page 143: ...n Mag Phase MA or dB Mag Phase DB data format is selected the real and imaginary S parameter values re Sij im Sij are replaced by mag Sij ang Sij or db Sij ang Sij respectively The snp Free Config export mode allows you to define the set of physical ports whose S parameters should be exported and the order in which they are exported The examples above represent the simple scenario with consecutive...

Page 144: ... command MMEMory STORe TRACe PORTs Renormalization of S parameters Renormalization means that the S parameters at connector impedances are converted into S parameters at certain target impedances During export the S parameters can be renormalized in two ways either a common target impedance is used for all ports or the individual port reference impedances are used If the reference impedances are i...

Page 145: ... Phase respectively The data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dialog imTrace1 second response value of first trace im Trace_Name for output for mat Re Im ang Trace_Name for output formats lin Mag Phase or dB Mag Phase The data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dialog reTrace2 first response value of second trace re Trace_Name mag Trace_Name or db ...

Page 146: ...se export options Use the Matlab dat format if you want to import and process the trace data in Matlab 5 4 3 Memory Mapped Trace Data Transfer The VNA firmware uses the Named Shared Memory Windows feature to share trace data with other processes running on the instrument Such processes or applications can read trace data directly from the shared memory which is much faster than using SCPI commands...

Page 147: ...the buffer need to know this offset Its size depends on whether the first trace data block contains formatted real or unformatted complex values c Use SYSTem DATA MEMory OFFSet to query the offset of the last added trace 3 Create the named shared memory buffer SYSTem DATA MEMory COMMit ShMemName The name must be unique Before the COMMit you can use SYSTem DATA MEMory CATalog to query the names of ...

Page 148: ...tem error correction data 3 The system error correction data is used to correct the measurement results of a DUT that is measured instead of the standards Calibration is always channel specific because it depends on the hardware settings in particular on the sweep range This means that a system error correction data set is stored with the calibrated channel The analyzer provides a wide range of so...

Page 149: ...he current calibration see Chapter 5 5 4 Calibration Labels on page 167 Calibration and port de activation The way the analyzer fimware activates deactivates ports after a successfull calibration system error correction or power calibration has slightly changed In all FW releases calibrated ports that were previously disabled are automatically enabled as single ended logical ports Starting with FW...

Page 150: ... to high Unidirectional trans mission measure ments in any direc tion and between any combination of ports TOSM or UOSM n port Open Short Match1 at each port Through2 between all port pairs All Reflection tracking Source match Directivity Load match Transmission track ing High Reflection and transmission mea surements classi cal 12 term error correction model Adapter Removal 2 port Open Short Matc...

Page 151: ...Match irrespective of their properties 2 Or any other known two port standard To be used in a guided calibration the known standard must be declared to be Through irrespective of its properties The calibration type must be selected in accordance with the test setup Select the cali bration type for which you can obtain or design the most accurate standards and for which you can measure the required...

Page 152: ...racking error terms The Match standard is used to derive the directivity error A reflection OSM calibration is more accurate than a normalization but is only applica ble for reflection measurements 5 5 1 3 One Path Two Ports Calibration A one path two ports calibration combines a reflection OSM full one port calibration with a transmission normalization The fully calibrated port is termed the node...

Page 153: ...y n port measurements n 1 The number of required standard measurements and of error terms increases as shown in the follow ing table Number of ports Number of standards to be connected Number of standard measurements Number of error terms 2 2 3 1 7 2 3 2 1 8 2 3 2 2 10 3 3 3 2 1 12 3 3 2 2 1 15 3 3 2 2 3 21 4 4 3 3 2 1 18 4 3 2 3 2 1 24 4 3 2 2 6 36 No isolation terms are available An Open Through...

Page 154: ...ion sweep data for the unknown through the analyzer auto matically determines its delay time transmission phase 5 5 1 5 Adapter Removal Many DUTs use different connector types on their RF ports e g port 1 N type connec tor female port 2 PC 3 5 type connector female DUTs of this sort are also known as noninsertable devices A suitable calibration kit is then required for each of the different connec...

Page 155: ...lly removed from the obtained error coefficients Uncertainties arising from a non ideal characterization of the unknown through almost cancel whereas they add up in the UOSM technique As a consequence Adapter Removal will provide more accurate results This holds up to a transition point where uncertainties due to connectivity issues increase Calibration ...

Page 156: ...ation requires a low reflection low loss Through standard with an electrical length that can be different from zero a Reflect and a Match The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of the Reflect standard can be unknown but must be nonzero its phase must be roughly known 90 deg The magni tude and phase of the reflection coefficient must be the same at both test ports TRM calibration is especially...

Page 157: ...s In the low frequency domain where TRL becomes inaccurate replace TRL by TRM calibration The methods can be combined or used separately The list of measured standards in the calibration step for TRL calibration is extended if the calibration kit in use contains the necessary standards A 2 line 3 line calibration requires two three different Lines of matching gender The lines must be measured betw...

Page 158: ...ng fshort The formulas are also applied if flong fshort For a TRL calibration using three Lines with different length the allowed frequency ranges are calculated in an analogous manner to obtain three ideally overlapping fre quency ranges The borders between two adjacent frequency ranges are calculated as the geometric mean of the frequency limits flong and fshort of the two ranges A second or thi...

Page 159: ...rties as the Reflect standard used for a TRL cali bration I e the magnitude of its reflection coefficient can be unknown but must be nonzero Its phase must be roughly known 90 deg The magnitude and phase of the reflection coefficient must be the same at both test ports The Attenuation standard must be well matched on both sides and cause an attenuation different from 0 dB the exact value of the tr...

Page 160: ...equired an Automatic Calibration always propo ses a minimum number of port assignments However for each port assignment all possible through connections are measured by default If you want to apply the Reduced Through logic also for each port assignment you can activate it in the system configuration 5 5 1 12 Complementary Isolation Measurement For each port pair in a manual transmission normaliza...

Page 161: ...s subdialogs Calibration kits and connector types are global resources the parameters are stored independently and are available irrespective of the current recall set 5 5 2 1 Calibration Standard Types The following table gives an overview of the different standards and their circuit models offset and load models Table 5 8 Calibration standard types Standard Type Characteristics Ideal Standard Of...

Page 162: ... calibration The default characteristic impedance is equal to the reference impedance of the system The loss is the energy loss along the transmission line due to the skin effect For resistive lines and at RF frequencies the loss is approximately proportional to the square root of the frequency In Agilent mode the offset loss is expressed in units of Ω s at a frequency of 1 GHz The following formu...

Page 163: ...port standard which is fully matched in both directions the reflection factor at both ports is zero No load and offset parameters need to be set 5 5 2 2 Cal Kit Parameter Types The analyzer uses three types of parameters to describe the calibration standards The parameter type is the same for all standards in a kit and therefore appended to the kit name Universal parameters no suffix describe cali...

Page 164: ...dB sqrt GHz or 0 GΩ s in Agilent mode All inductance and capacitance parameters are set to zero 5 5 2 3 Sliding Match Standards The Sliding Match is a one port standard consisting of an air line with a movable low reflection load element sliding load This standard is used because a no perfect Match is available over a wide frequency range However a series of measurements at a given frequency with ...

Page 165: ... frequencies above the Min Freq In general the Sliding Match provides better results than the Match within its specified fre quency range 5 5 2 4 Cal Kit Files Calibration kit files can be used to store the parameters of a particular calibration kit to reload the data and to exchange calibration kits from one network analyzer to another Cal kit file contents Cal kit files are independent of the cu...

Page 166: ...Windows based software tool intended to import edit and export csv cal kit files The software is available for download at http www vnahelp com products html The decimal separator used by the VNA Cal Kit Man ager V2 1 depends on the language version of the Windows operating system Cal kit files generated on an English operating system contain dots the ones generated on a German system contain comm...

Page 167: ...t interpolation This means that a set of measured correction data is available at each sweep point Cal int The system error correction is applied however the correction data for at least one sweep point is interpolated from the measured values This means that the channel settings have been changed so that a current sweep point is different from the cali brated sweep points It is not possible to di...

Page 168: ...proper con nections are almost excluded No need to handle calibration kit data The internal standards do not wear out because they are switched electronically Limitations of automatic calibration Calibration units do not contain characterized Through standards so calibration types TOM TSM TRM TRL TNA are not available Safety instructions Please observe the safety instructions provided with the cal...

Page 169: ...s recognized and initialized the new hardware When the unit is connected for the first time this may take longer than in normal use The unit is ready to be used see Chapter 5 5 5 2 Performing an Automatic Calibra tion on page 170 Safety aspects The calibration unit is intended for direct connection to R S ZNB ZNBT network analyzers following the procedure described above You can also connect the u...

Page 170: ...of the analyzer Allow for a sufficient warm up time before starting the calibration Refer to the specifications of the calibration unit for details To ensure best accuracy the analyzer automatically reduces the source power to 10 dBm If the test setup contains a large attenuation deactivate Auto Power Reduction for Cal Unit in the Calibration tab of the System Config dialog Ensure an input power o...

Page 171: ...ion unit a modified set of characterization data suitable for the cal unit with adapters may be desirable The R S ZNB ZNBT provides a characterization wizard which you can use to generate your own characterization data sets for modified R S cal units The characterization data can be stored in the cal unit and used for automatic calibration whenever needed A cal unit characterization can be perform...

Page 172: ...ly a subset of all possi ble through connections is measured To calibrate n test ports with an m port calibration unit m n the calibration unit has to be reconnected at least n m times Each of these re connections is described by its port assignment i e the mapping of calibration unit ports to test ports Then for each assignment an automatic calibration is performed Finally the analyzer combines t...

Page 173: ...est port must be the same in all assignments Again this minimizes the number of port reconnec tions between the calibration stages Same as for One Path Two Port calibrations using the test port with the lowest number as node port Every other calibrated port could serve as node port Among the minimal ones the star shaped solutions with fixed but arbitrary node port are also optimal w r t the averag...

Page 174: ... power levels and power readings at a particular position calibration plane in the test setup Scalar power calibration is different from the system error correction described in Chapter 5 5 Calibration on page 148 A power calibration is required for accurate measurement of wave quantities or ratios see section Chapter 5 1 5 Data Flow on page 90 For best accuracy choose a cali bration method accord...

Page 175: ...ents perform a two port SMARTerCal for a port pair including the measurement port In general a power calibration involves two stages 1 Source power calibration An external power meter is connected to the calibra tion plane The analyzer uses the power meter readings to calibrate its reference receiver Subsequently it modifies its source power so that the calibrated reference receiver reading corres...

Page 176: ...e analyzer performs a first calibration sweep at the source power that is likely to produce the target power Cal Power at the cali bration plane A known attenuation or gain at the source port and in the signal path between the source port and the calibration plane can be specified The power which the external power meter measured at the calibration plane is displayed in the calibration sweep diagr...

Page 177: ...uracy of power wave quantity measurements The correction data acquired in a frequency or power sweep is re used if a Time or CW Mode sweep is activated Calibration procedure The measurement receiver calibration is based on a received wave bn with known power The calibration involves a connection to a previously source power calibrated source port The received wave to calibrate can be generated by ...

Page 178: ...xtrapola tion see below This means that a set of measured correction data is available at each sweep point PCai The power calibration is applied however the correction data for at least one sweep point is interpolated from the measured values This means that the channel settings have been changed so that a current sweep point is different from the calibrated sweep points It is not possible to disa...

Page 179: ...on 5 5 6 4 Extended Test Setups The power calibration data can be modified to account for an additional two port device in the test setup The known transmission coefficients of the two port can be entered manually or automatically CHANNEL CAL Pwr Cal Settings Transm Coeffi cients The R S ZNB ZNBT supports two different test scenarios A Two port at DUT during measurement Test and measurement proced...

Page 180: ...o calibration methods serve different purposes The system error correction requires a set of calibration standards it provides vec tor error corrected S parameters For equal port frequencies the n port calibration types provide the full set of error terms For frequency conversion measurements a source match correction and optional load match correction is calculated The receiver power calibration ...

Page 181: ...bration units provide the n port system error correction data TOSM or UOSM a subsequent power calibration sweep completes the calibration 5 5 7 2 Calibration Types Except for Adapter Removal the names of the SMARTerCal calibration types consist of a prefix P indicating the additional power calibration plus the system error correc tion type The R S ZNB ZNBT supports the SMARTerCal equivalent of all...

Page 182: ... the system error correc tion labels Table 5 16 Calibration labels SMARTerCal Label Meaning SCal The SMARTer Cal is applied without interpolation This means that a set of measured correction data is available at each sweep point SCal int The SMARTer Cal is applied however the correction data for at least one sweep point is interpolated from the measured values This means that the channel settings ...

Page 183: ...et of the available chan nels might have to be swept See SENSe CORRection COLLect CHANnels MCTYpes on page 1096 This advanced mode of parallel calibration is available via remote control only 5 6 Offset Parameters and De Embedding The R S ZNB ZNBT functionality described in this section complements the calibra tion compensating for the effect of known transmission lines or matching networks betwee...

Page 184: ...to the skin effect the total loss can be approximated by an expression of the following form DC ref DC ref Loss f f Loss f Loss f Loss The Loss at DC LossDC the reference Freq for Loss fref and the Loss at Freq Loss fref are empirical parameters for the transmission lines connected to each port which can be entered in the CHANNEL OFFSET EMBED One Way Loss soft tool tab For a lossless transmission ...

Page 185: ... This yields the delay in one direction and should be approx equal to the Auto Length result The measurement results using trace formats and trace statistics functions depend on the selected delay aperture and evaluation range Auto Length is particularly accu rate because it uses all sweep points For non dispersive cables aperture and evalua tion range effects are expected to vanish Use TRACE MARK...

Page 186: ... Preconditions for Auto Length and Loss effect on measured quantities and exceptions Auto Length and Loss is enabled if the measured quantity contains the necessary phase information as a function of the frequency and if the interpretation of the results is unambiguous A frequency sweep must be active The measured quantity must be an S parameter ratio wave quantity a converted impedance or a conve...

Page 187: ...e test fixtures to be terminated with an open or short circuit Fixture Compensation complements a previous system error correction and replaces a possible manual length offset and loss correction For maximum accuracy it is rec ommended to place the reference plane as close as possible towards the outer test fix ture connectors using a full n port calibration The Fixture Compensation is then car ri...

Page 188: ... Parameters Offset and loss parameters can be particularly useful if the reference plane of the cali bration cannot be placed directly at the DUT ports e g because the DUT has non coaxial ports and can only be measured in a test fixture Offset parameters can also help to avoid a new complete system error correction if a cable with known properties has to be included in the test setup A positive le...

Page 189: ...cts the length offset of both physical ports of a logical port by the same amount 5 6 2 Embedding and Deembedding The R S ZNB ZNBT allows you to define virtual networks to be added to removed from the measurement circuit for a DUT with single ended or balanced ports This con cept is referred to as embedding deembedding The embedding deembedding function has the following characteristics Embedding ...

Page 190: ...n to be evaluated in a 2 port measurement VNA 1 3 2 4 DUT 1 2 3 C1 C3 Lp Balun Matching circuit Single ended port Balanced port The idea of virtual embedding is to simulate the matching network and avoid using physical circuitry so that the analyzer ports can be directly connected to the input and output ports of the DUT The matching circuit is taken into account numerically The analyzer measures ...

Page 191: ...e towards the DUT ports enabling a realistic evaluation of the DUT without the distorting network Deembedding can be combined with length off set parameters see Chapter 5 6 1 Offset Parameters on page 183 The simplest case of single port deembedding can be depicted as follows 5 6 2 3 Circuit Models for 2 Port Networks The lumped element 2 port transformation networks for de embedding consist of th...

Page 192: ...d of a shunt C or L as seen from the analyzer port followed by a serial C or L They are named Shunt C Serial L Shunt L Serial C Shunt C Serial C Shunt L Serial L At the GUI the capacitance C i in parallel with resistance R i circuit blocks can be replaced by equivalent capacitance C i in parallel with conductance G i circuit blocks In addition there is also a Shunt L Shunt C circuit model availabl...

Page 193: ...t In the default setting the resistors are not effective since the serial Rs are set to 0 Ω the shunt Rs are set to 10 MΩ Moreover the serial elements can be replaced by imported 2 port S parameters or the entire transformation network can be described by imported 4 port S parameters The first network is defined by its S parameters stored in an imported four port Touch stone file s4p No additional...

Page 194: ...arallel with conduc tance G i circuit blocks 5 6 2 5 Port Pair De Embedding Port pair de embedding extends the functionality of balanced port de embedding to pairs of single ended physical ports The analyzer uses the 4 port transformation net works known from balanced port de embedding however each transformation net work is assigned to an arbitrary pair of single ended physical ports A simple cir...

Page 195: ... 2 and 1 3 with appropriate sets of 4 port S parameters The R S ZNB ZNBT FW handles Port Pair De Embedding as a special case of Port Set De Embedding 5 6 2 6 Port Set De Embedding The port set de embedding feature allows de embedding a linear 2m port network connecting m physical VNA ports to m physical DUT ports m 2 Offset Parameters and De Embedding ...

Page 196: ...rt set deembed ding is calculated after single ended deembedding and the port set embedding step precedes single ended embedding It is possible to combine a sequence of port sets for deembedding embedding each port set having its own transformation network The effect of port set de embedding depends on the port sets themselves but also on their order The same physical ports can be used repeatedly ...

Page 197: ...ection of the DUT causing a difference in potential between the analyzer s and the DUT s ground reference A typ ical and often unavoidable source of ground loops is the parasitic inductance of the ground contacts In contrast to the 2 port de embedding networks the ground loop represents a single wire connection that can be described by a one port S matrix On the other hand the ground loop de embed...

Page 198: ...ing algorithms to calculate and remove these effects from the mea surements leaving only the result for the area of interest Instead of asking the user to define the fixture by parametrizing one of the given lum ped circuit models or by somehow providing a suitable sNp file the firmware of the R S ZNB ZNBT now also provides integration for third party tools that model the test fixture from measure...

Page 199: ...ted third party tool to calculate the fixture deembedding files After a final confirmation the calculated deembedding files s2p for single ended ports s4p for balanced ports are used for deembedding the DUT at the respective logical port s Test Coupons The test fixture consists of a set of lead ins DUT Figure 5 10 DUT with Test Fixture balanced The fixture modeling tools require test coupons for t...

Page 200: ... fixture modeling tool support assumes symmetrical lead ins and lead outs 5 6 2 10 Combining Several De Embedding Networks The R S ZNB ZNBT allows you to select a combination of networks to be numerically added removed at different layers 2 port networks at single ended physical ports 4 port networks at pairs of single ended physical ports 4 port networks at balanced logical ports 1 port ground lo...

Page 201: ...gle 4 port network 4 Ground Loop Deembedding the DUT s ground connection can be deembedded from a single 1 port network 5 Ground Loop Embedding the DUT s ground connection can be embedded in a sin gle 1 port network 6 Balanced Embedding every balanced logical port can be embedded in a single 4 port network 7 Port Set Embedding every port set can be embedded in one or more 4 6 or 8 port networks Th...

Page 202: ...e equipped options are listed in the Options tab of the Info Dialog SYSTEM SETUP Setup Info For a complete list of options accessories and extras refer to the product brochure or to the Options section of the R S ZNB ZNBT product pages on the Internet The following sections provide an introduction to the software and hardware options described in this documentation The use of external power meters...

Page 203: ...NBT8 B520 21 to 24 R S ZNBT8 B124 R S ZNBT8 B524 Analyzers R S ZNBT20 26 40 on the other hand are available with a minimum of 8 test ports order number 1332 9002 24 34 44 They can be extended with additional blocks of 4 ports up to a maximum of 24 ports Extended Dynamic Range reflectometers are not available for these models Table 5 18 Additional Test Ports for R S ZNBT20 26 40 9 to 12 R S ZNBT20 ...

Page 204: ...distant The time domain response is repeated after a time interval which is equal to Δt 1 Δf where Δf is the spacing between two consecutive sweep points in the frequency domain For a sweep span of 4 GHz and 201 equidistant sweep points Δf 4 GHz 200 2 107 Hz so that Δt 50 ns Δt is termed measurement range in time domain or unambiguous range Additional constraints apply if the selected Chirp z tran...

Page 205: ... The step response corresponds to the response of a DUT that is stimulated with a voltage waveform that transitions from zero to unity The two alternative responses are mathematically equivalent the step response can be obtained by integrating the impulse response Integrate impulse response Obtain step response The step response is recommended for impedance measurements and for the analysis of dis...

Page 206: ...acing Δf and the additional condition that f1 Δf In other words all frequencies fi are set to harmonics of the start frequency f1 If a harmonic grid including the DC value f 0 is mirrored to the negative frequency range the result is again an equidistant grid The point symmetry with respect to the DC value makes harmonic grids suitable for lowpass time domain transformations Visualization of the h...

Page 207: ...number of sweep points and interpolated extrapolated values The harmonic grids cannot be calculated for any set of sweep points If the minimum number of sweep points is smaller than 5 then the interpolation extrapolation algorithm for additional sweep points does not work The same is true if the number of sweep points or stop frequency exceeds the upper limit Besides the ratio between the sweep ra...

Page 208: ...ppression Passband ripple Best for Steepest Edges Rectangle 13 dB 0 547 dB Eliminate small distortions in the vicinity of the useful signal if demands on amplitude accu racy are low Steep Edges Hamming 43 dB 0 019 dB Good compromise between edge steepness and side lobe suppression Normal Gate Hann 32 dB 0 032 dB Good compromise between edge steepness and side lobe suppression Maximum Flat ness Boh...

Page 209: ...nts The vector network analyzer R S ZNB ZNBT with time domain option K2 supports TD site VSWR measurements For the frequency range 1 GHz to 18 GHz this method of SVSWR measurement is pro posed in standard ANSI C63 25 Hence an instrument with upper frequency limit above 18 GHz that is equipped with time domain option K2 supports TD site VSWR measurements in accordance with ANSI C63 25 EMC Test Site...

Page 210: ...nna response is related to the shortest distance the earliest impulse is the direct antenna response Reflections from the test site are from farther distance away thus come at later time It is therefore possible to separate the direct antenna response S21 direct from reflections S21 reflected by using time gating and to calculate TD SVSWR 1 r 1 r where r S21 reflected S21 direct Measurement Proced...

Page 211: ...o predict the system response to arbitrary time domain signals by calculating the convolution of the input signal with the impulse response With option R S ZNB ZNBT K20 the R S ZNB ZNBT firmware implements a virtual signal generator that is able to generate multilevel PAM signals NRZ PAM 4 PAM 8 PAM 16 including a simulated low pass behavior The simulated eye diagram using the DUT s measured S par...

Page 212: ... diagram can be displayed as an info field or expor ted to an ASCII file Figure 5 15 Eye Diagram Result Info Field The following results are available Eye Minimum and Eye Maximum These values represent the minimum and maximum outputs of the eye diagram processing These values include any over and under shoots seen during the symbol transitions Eye Base Eye Top Eye Mean and Eye Amplitude Eye Base a...

Page 213: ...ime separation between the rising and falling edge at the 50 level of the eye diagram Duty Cycle Dist is the absolute distance Duty Cycle Pct gives the same value as a percentage of the Bit Period Crossing Percent The Crossing Height is the height above Eye Base where the rising and falling edges cross Crossing Percent gives the same value as a percentage of the Eye Amplitude Opening Factor This i...

Page 214: ...ws you to compare the step responses calculated from dif ferent traces measured on the same analyzer channel The skew is calculated as the delta time or length at user defined percentage of the step size Figure 5 18 Skew measurement For instance this can be used to evaluate the quality of a balanced transmission line intra pair skew Limit Test Testing against a user defined skew limit is also supp...

Page 215: ...arameter trace via inverse Fourier transformation The distance between the reference plane and the fault can then be calculated from the propagation time accounting for the electrical properties of the transmission line Moreover it is possible to define which of the peaks shall be considered as being due to a fault The following example shows the reflection at the end of a faultless open cable con...

Page 216: ...ance that can be measured is inversely proportional to the fre quency span The smaller the frequency span the longer the maximum distance between the calibrated reference plane and the fault to be located However a smaller frequency span comes at the cost of a coarser distance resolu tion The R S ZNB ZNBT can automatically determine a suitable number of sweep points for a given maximum distance to...

Page 217: ...resent a major extension to the analyzer s measurement function ality in particular they allow you to measure frequency converting DUTs The following figure shows a transmission measurement on a mixer VNA 1 2 RF LO IF fIF up fRF fLO fIF down fRF fLO In this example the transmission parameter S21 corresponds to the mixer s conversion gain Before measuring the port frequencies must be set appropriat...

Page 218: ...s recommended for details refer to Chapter 5 5 7 SMARTerCal on page 180 A load match correction optional involves an additional reverse sweep It can pro vide a significant improvement of the transmission S parameter measurements if the load ports are poorly matched Select the appropriate correction type according to your accuracy and speed require ments Notice that none of the correction types pro...

Page 219: ...s such as frequency ranges conversion loss compression and isolation Two Stage Mixer Measurements The scalar mixer measurement is also suited for measuring a system of two mixers with frequency multipliers at their RF and LO inputs The RF and LO input frequencies of the first mixer are both multiplied by an integer fraction the converted output signal fint is fed to the second mixer together with ...

Page 220: ...e pendent LO signals at both mixers The IF signal is the mixer output signal mixing product which is at one of the fol lowing conversion frequencies IF LO RF or IF LO RF i e LO RF for LO RF or IF RF LO for RF LO The IF frequency is selected in the Fre quencies dialog A test setup with two mixers involves two independent conver sion settings The signal description above with the swept RF signal and...

Page 221: ...weep range CW frequency frequency conversion settings IF signal right side Analyzer port number e g Port 2 fixed frequency RF LO or RF LO expected power range The following mixer signal diagram corresponds to a Time or CW mode sweep RF signal left side Analyzer port number e g Port 1 fixed power CW fre quency frequency conversion settings 1 1 denotes no conversion LO signals 1 or 2 from below Sign...

Page 222: ...nnel To simulate this scenario the fre quency difference tone distance between the upper and lower signal is chosen to be small compared to the frequencies of the two tones fL fU or Δf fU fL fL A nonlinear behavior of the DUT causes emissions at frequencies which correspond to sums and differences of the upper and lower tone frequencies and their integer multi ples These intermodulation products c...

Page 223: ...tones see Chapter 5 7 8 Internal Second Source on page 227 In the follow ing example port 3 of a R S ZNB replaces the external generator For a R S ZNBT with more than 8 ports the lower and upper tone could be provided by ports 1 and 9 for example VNA 1 3 2 4 Upper Tone DUT 1 2 Lower Tone An external combiner is required anyway Operation with Internal Second Source is not supported if External Swit...

Page 224: ...urement Results The intermodulation measurement provides two different types of results In the swept measurement the analyzer performs a frequency or power sweep of the two tone stimulus signal and displays the selected intermodulation quantities as a function of the lower tone frequency or power Optional Extensions and Accessories ...

Page 225: ... 53 In the intermodulation spectrum measurement CW Mode Spectrum the fre quency and power of the lower and upper tones is kept constant The analyzer dis plays all intermodulation products near the signals up to a selectable order Optional Extensions and Accessories ...

Page 226: ...ined as follows IPkout PL out IMkrel k 1 In this formula PL out denotes the lower tone power in dBm measured at the DUT out put In analogy the input intercept point IPkin is defined as IPkin PL in IMkrel k 1 The intermodulation suppression generally decreases with increasing stimulus power The intercept point is equal to the lower tone power for which the intermodulation sup pression would reach 0...

Page 227: ...cy of R S ZNB4 and R S ZNB8 network analyzers for details refer to the data sheet and to SENSe FREQuency commands 5 7 8 Internal Second Source Options R S ZNB B2 R S ZNB20 B2 R S ZNB40 B2 and R S ZNBTx B112 The hardware options R S ZNB B2 Internal Second Source for R S ZNB4 R S ZNB8 4 Port and R S ZNB20 B2 Second Internal Generator for R S ZNB20 4 Port R S ZNB40 B2 Second Internal Generator for R ...

Page 228: ...t of the RF connection configuration 5 7 9 Precision Frequency Reference Option R S ZNB ZNBT B4 An optional OCXO improves the static frequency accuracy of the R S ZNB ZNBT For details refer to the data sheet 5 7 10 GPIB Interface Option R S ZNB ZNBT B10 This hardware option provides a GPIB bus connector according to standard IEEE 488 IEC 625 GPIB The GPIB bus interface can be used for controlling ...

Page 229: ...ernal part handler The digital control signals on the interface connector indicate the possible start and the end of a measurement as well as a global limit check result Typically the handler will insert the device to be tested into a test fixture and provide a trigger pulse to initiate the measurement After the measurement is com plete the handler will remove and replace the device and sort it in...

Page 230: ...nnected via Direct Control which in turn requires Device Control option R S ZNB ZNBT B12 No matter if connected internally or externally there is no need to perform any kind of calibration or alignment of the extension board The analyzer firmware automati cally detects and supports it The controlled devices can be hot plugged The analyzer firmware only supports a single RFFE GPIO interface board M...

Page 231: ... description see the R S ZN Z25 data sheet 5 7 14 Additional Removable System Drive Option R S ZNB B19 R S ZNBT B19 Option R S ZNB ZNBT B19 provides an additional removable system drive for the R S ZNB ZNBT including operating system and VNA firmware See the data sheet for the available variants of this option 5 7 15 Extended Power Range Various B2x Options see table below The Extended Power Range...

Page 232: ...ZNB8 They extend the dynamic range up to 140 dB typically 150 dB for full 2 port calibrated measurements Compared to standard R S ZNB4 8 analyzers the noise floor of the receivers is shifted 10 dB down by reducing the attenuation in the frontends The trace noise for transmission measurements is also improved Hence a R S ZNB4 8 with Extended Dynamic Range option is well suited to test pas sive devi...

Page 233: ...sions with Dynamic Range reflectometers see Chapter 5 7 1 Additional Test Ports R S ZNBT only on page 203 They can be retrofitted at Rohde Schwarz service Extended Dynamic Range options are not available for R S ZNBT20 26 40 Extended Dynamic Range and Receiver Step Attenuators are mutually exclusive on the same 4 port block Mixed equipping with Extended Dynamic Range and standard 4 port blocks wit...

Page 234: ... S ZNB ZNBT B81 This hardware option provides four rear panel connectors labeled DC INPUT 1 4 which can be used for DC measurements in different voltage ranges The DC inputs are also needed for the measurement of the Power Added Efficiency PAE 5 7 18 1 Power Added Efficiency The Power Added Efficiency PAE is the ratio of the added RF power generated by an active two port device e g an amplifier to...

Page 235: ...wer Added Efficiency dialog suggests different measurement types involving different test setups The measurement types depend on the properties of the DC power supply constant current I0 or constant power U0 and an optional precision resistor R used to measure the DC current Depending on the measurement type one or two of the val ues I0 U0 and or R must be entered as parameters of the PAE calculat...

Page 236: ...age at the DUT Um pro vides the current and hence the DC input power R U U U I U P m m m DC 0 Constant current source I0 The DC power supply provides a constant current I0 the DC voltage at the DUT Um is measured This provides the DC input power 0 I U P m DC Voltage and current R Voltage and current of the DC power supply can be both unknown a precision resistor R is connected in series to the DUT...

Page 237: ... the R S ZNB ZNBT 5 7 20 External Power Meters The connection of an external power meter to the R S ZNB ZNBT can serve different purposes Extended measurement functionality Each external power meter represents an additional receive port External power meters increase the number of RF input sig nals of a DUT that the analyzer can measure simultaneously They can also pro vide accurate results for si...

Page 238: ...cable between the analyzer and the power sensor must be disconnected see tips below R S power sensors and power meters auto matically detect the presence of any significant input power This aborts zeroing and generates an error message Zeroing can take a few seconds depending on the power meter model refer to the documentation of your external power meter for more infor mation Repeat zeroing Durin...

Page 239: ...al generators increase the number of RF input signals for the DUT A typical example is a mixer measurement with a 2 port analyzer where an external generator provides the LO input signal VNA 1 2 RF LO IF USB ports Control connection e g USB External generator RF out Power calibration An external generator can provide the reference signal for a source or receiver calibration A typical example is a ...

Page 240: ...accuracy and frequency stability in a test setup where different devices represent the signal sources and receivers it is advisable to use a common reference frequency Accurate frequencies are particularly important if external genera tors are used for measurements with narrow measurement bandwidths A common reference frequency can be established in different ways Use the analyzer as master device...

Page 241: ... connector in order to switch the generator to the next point in the list Afterwards the analyzer waits for the next EXT GEN BLANK signal If the USER PORT connection is interrupted during the measurement the sweep is halted It is continued after a Restart Sweep If the number of sweep points exceeds the maximum number of entries in the list depending on the generator type the analyzer must interrup...

Page 242: ...up to 48 ports seamlessly perform ing the required matrix switching operations Figure 5 19 R S ZNB connected to two R S ZN Z84 each equipped as 2x24 matrix While it is allowed to connect multiple matrices to a R S ZNB ZNBT matrix cascading is not supported Operation with Internal Second Source is not supported across switch matrices However an N port analyzer is always limited to measuring N signa...

Page 243: ...gister the matrix as managed object 3 define the RF configuration a configure the matrix VNA connections according to the existing or planned physical connections between VNA test ports and matrix VNA ports b assign the matrix test ports and the remaining VNA ports i e those that are not connected to a matrix VNA port to DUT test ports After this initial setup the R S ZNB ZNBT takes control of the...

Page 244: ...Left 2x12 submatrix full crossbar not connectable R S ZN Z84 4x24 VNA ports Matrix VNA ports Matrix test ports Transmission measurement possible A C B D 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 Figure 5 20 Unconnected right submatrix With the same extension type connecting one of two submatrix VNA ports enables reflection measurements for the corresponding matrix test ports H...

Page 245: ...rix may offer multiple routes to a given matrix test port and hence mea surements may be performed using different physical paths where a path consists of the traversed VNA connections and matrix routes These paths may have different characteristics in particular if the corresponding matrix routes differ in the number of semiconductor or mechanical switching functions that have to be traversed Exa...

Page 246: ...tly one of the equipped 2x6 modules The overall route quality is determined by the number of solid state switches traversed on this 2x6 module SP4T SP4T SP4T SP4T SP4T SP4T SP4T SP4T SP3T SP3T 2x6 Module Priority 1 Routes Priority 2 Routes Figure 5 24 Routes and priorities See the data sheet of the respective switch matrix for details on the available routes Optional Extensions and Accessories ...

Page 247: ...llows to select which optimization should be performed Always choose the precision optimization if the management connection is established using Direct Control see Chapter 5 7 11 Device Control on page 229 The switch ing speed of the matrix in this case is in the same range as the source switch of the VNA 5 7 22 5 Multiple Paths and Calibration With switch matrices a signal loss of up to 25 dB is...

Page 248: ...12 Route 21 Route 22 This kind of multipath calibration offers the following additional benefit During manual calibration the measured reflection transmission coefficients are pre sented as memory traces one per path By comparing these traces it should be pos sible to track down hardware problems cables connectors matrix already during calibration Optional Extensions and Accessories ...

Page 249: ... the related remote control commands For a general overview of the analyzer s capabilities and their use refer to Chapter 5 Concepts and Features on page 80 6 1 Function Keys and Softtools Most of the Function Keys serve as openers for an associated softtool in the analyzer GUI By default the following opener logic is applied If the associated softtool is not displayed pressing the hardkey opens t...

Page 250: ...er Softtool default STIMULUS START Alt Shift J Stimulus Softtool Selects an input field corresponding to the start stop center or span of the active channel s current sweep type Activates the corresponding tab on the Stimulus softtool STIMULUS STOP Alt Shift K STIMULUS CENTER Alt Shift F STIMULUS SPAN Alt Shift H CHANNEL PWR BW AVG Alt Shift L Power Bw Avg Softtool default CHANNEL SWEEP Alt Shift ...

Page 251: ...ws you to select the quantities to be measured and displayed Access TRACE MEAS Background information For a detailed description of all measurement results of the R S ZNB ZNBT refer to Chapter 5 3 Measurement Results on page 115 Efficient trace handling To select a result and display it as a trace you can simply drag and drop the corre sponding button into a diagram area See also Chapter 4 3 4 Han...

Page 252: ...to as S out in where out and in denote the output and input logical port numbers respectively If entered manually out and in must be expressed using the same number of dig its I e for out 10 and in 9 you can specify S out in as S1009 or S010009 but not as S109 For a channel setup with n single ended ports n2 single ended S parameters can be measured In presence of balanced ports standard S paramet...

Page 253: ... in the diagrams on the main diagonal the trans mission coefficients Sij i j occupy the other diagrams By default reflection coeffi cients are displayed in Smith diagrams transmission coefficients in Cartesian dia grams dB Mag scale See also Format Softtool Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine CALCulate Ch PARameter DEFine SGRoup S Param Wizard Opens a dialog that guides you through the s...

Page 254: ...he wizard proceeds in the following steps 1 Select the test setup Choose the port setup of the analyzer according to the port configuration of your DUT Then connect the DUT to the selected analyzer ports This step corresponds to the Predefined Config tab of the Balanced Ports dia log see Predefined Config Tab on page 256 2 Define the port impedances Assign reference impedances to all physical and ...

Page 255: ...cessary select a smaller source power to protect the input port of the analyzer Note The predefined bandwidths and source powers have been selected according to the following criteria The large measurement bandwidth Fast Sweep ensures that the noise of an S21 trace at minimum source power and 0 dB attenuation is smaller than 0 1 dB The default source power for a passive DUT ensures that the analyz...

Page 256: ...orts balanced or unbalanced in the active channel Access CHANNEL CHANNEL CONFIG Port Config Balanced Ports Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 5 3 6 Unbalance Balance Conversion on page 128 Chapter 5 3 6 1 Balanced Port Configurations on page 129 Chapter 5 3 2 Reference Impedances on page 119 Predefined Config Tab The Predefined Config tab of the Balanced Ports dialog pr...

Page 257: ...ble configurations depend on the number of analyzer ports Remote command SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt CLEar Logical Port Config Tab The Logical Port Config tab of the Balanced Ports dialog allows you to configure logical ports balanced or unbalanced and to disable unused physical ports in the active channel This tab is only visible if more than 4 ports are available on the VNA and o...

Page 258: ... LPORt LogPt SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt CLEar User Config Tab The User Config tab of the Balanced Ports dialog defines a new balanced port con figuration If more than 4 test ports are available on the VNA and or connected switch matrices this tab is replaced by the Logical Port Config Tab tab Physical Ports Logical Ports Allows you to renumber logical ports Remote command SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt SOURce C...

Page 259: ... Ch LPORt LogPt CLEar Reference Impedance Tab The Reference Impedance tab of the Balanced Ports dialog allows you to define or redefine the impedances of the logical ports Background information Refer to Chapter 5 3 2 Reference Impedances on page 119 Figure 6 1 Reference Impedance Tab 4 physical ports Figure 6 2 Reference Impedance Tab 4 physical ports Meas Softtool ...

Page 260: ...ed Mode Common Mode Differential Mode Defines arbitrary reference impedances Single Ended Mode is available for single ended logical ports only Common Mode and Differential Mode impedances for balanced ports only The default values for the balanced port reference impedances are derived from the real default reference impedance Z0 50 Ω of the single ended physical analyzer ports The default value f...

Page 261: ...ference Impedances on page 119 Remote command CALCulate Chn TRANsform IMPedance RNORmal 6 2 2 Ratios Tab Selects ratios of wave quantities as measured quantities Background information Refer to Chapter 5 3 5 Wave Quantities and Ratios on page 125 6 2 2 1 Controls on the Ratios Tab The More Ratios button opens the More Ratios dialog which allows to select an arbitrary ratio of wave quantities b i a...

Page 262: ...to the S parameter S22 output reflection coefficient b1 a2 Source Port 2 is the ratio of the wave quantities b1 and a2 and corresponds to the S parameter S12 reverse transmission coefficient The analyzer can also measure arbitrary ratios for other source ports see Chap ter 6 2 2 2 More Ratios Dialog on page 262 Tip In the trace list the source port is indicated in brackets b2 a1 P1 denotes the rat...

Page 263: ...Name B2 A1 CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine Trace_Name B2 A1 Denominator Selects the type left pull down list and the port number assignment right pull down list of the wave that forms the denominator of the ratio Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure Trace_Name B2 A1 CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine Trace_Name B2 A1 Use Generator as Source If selected the Port control lists the external gener...

Page 264: ...ed quantities Background information Refer to Chapter 5 3 5 Wave Quantities and Ratios on page 125 6 2 3 1 Controls on the Wave Tab The More Wave Quantities button opens the More Wave Quantities dialog which allows to select an arbitrary wave quantity e g for different source ports or higher port numbers a i Source Port i b j Source Port i Selects one of the standard 2 port wave quantities ai bj f...

Page 265: ...nt this wave is transmitted at port 2 of the DUT reverse measure ment b2 Source Port 2 is the wave received at physical port 2 In a standard S parame ter measurement this wave is fed to the output port port 2 of the DUT reverse measurement Tip In the trace list the source port is indicated in brackets For example a1 P1 denotes the wave a1 with source port 1 The analyzer can also measure arbitrary ...

Page 266: ...rator as Source If selected the Port control lists the configured external generators Otherwise it lists the analyzer ports To configure external generators use the External Generators dialog See Chap ter 5 7 21 External Generators on page 239 Source Port Selects the source for the stimulus signal Depending on the state of the Use Genera tor as Source flag either analyzer ports Port 1 to Port n or...

Page 267: ...ulate Ch PARameter MEASure CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine SENSe Ch SWEep DETector TIME 6 2 4 Intermod Tab Selects intermodulation products and derived results as measured quantities The intermodulation products occur at frequencies which correspond to sums and differen ces of the upper and lower tone frequencies and their integer multiples The intermodulation measurement requires options R S ZNB Z...

Page 268: ...the frequency of the lower tone minus the tone distance The lower and upper IM n frequencies are also displayed in the Frequencies and Powers dialog see Chapter 6 12 4 4 Frequencies and Power Dialog on page 548 The Upper IM3 Product at DUT Out is the third order upper intermodulation prod uct at the output of the DUT This quantity corresponds to the outgoing wave quan tity b wave at the output of ...

Page 269: ... Products Dialog This dialog allows you to select higher order intermodulation products Access TRACE MEAS Intermod More IM Products Background information Refer to Intermodulation Quantities on page 226 Order Defines the order of the intermodulation product Note that measuring a particular order must be prepared in the intermodulation chan nel setup see Chapter 6 12 4 Intermod Tab on page 539 Remo...

Page 270: ...measured lower tone level at the DUT output Lower Tone at DUT Out The rela tive result is often termed intermodulation suppression Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine 6 2 4 3 Intercept Points Dialog This dialog allows you to select intercept points of higher order and intercept points which are measured at the input of the DUT Access TRACE MEAS Intermod Mor...

Page 271: ...mand CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine DUT Port Defines if the intercept point is referenced to the DUT output or input port Both values differ by the attenuation of the lower tone signal upon transmission through the DUT see Intermodulation Quantities on page 226 Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine 6 2 5 Z Sij Tab Selects conver...

Page 272: ...n measurement Z22 is the input impedance at port 2 of a 2 port DUT that is terminated at port 1 with the reference impedance Z0 matched circuit impedance measured in a reverse reflection measurement Z12 and Z21 denote the forward and reverse converted transfer impedances respectively Use the Smith chart to obtain an alternative graphical representation of the converted impedances in a reflection m...

Page 273: ...he output and input port numbers of the DUT Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure Trace_Name Y S11 Y S12 CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine Trace_Name Y S11 Y S22 Y S out in softkeys Selects the 2 port converted admittance parameters The parameters describe the admittances of a 2 port DUT obtained in forward and reverse transmission and reflec tion measurements Y11 is the input admittance at p...

Page 274: ... See Chapter 6 2 1 3 Balanced Ports Dialog on page 256 6 2 7 Y Z Params Tab Allows you to select Y and Z parameters as measured quantities Both Y and Z parameters can serve as an alternative to S parameters for characterizing a linear n port network Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 5 3 3 Impedance Parameters on page 120 Chapter 5 3 4 Admittance Parameters on page 124 ...

Page 275: ...2 reverse measurement with input terminated in a short circuit V1 0 Y22 is the output admittance defined as the ratio of the current I2 to the voltage V2 measured at port 2 reverse measurement with input terminated in a short circuit V1 0 Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure Trace_Name Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine Trace_Name Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 Z11 Z12 Z21 Z22 Selects one of...

Page 276: ...tity The Imbal CMRR measurements require at least two logical ports are available at least one of them balanced Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 5 3 6 Unbalance Balance Conversion on page 128 Chapter 5 3 6 3 Imbalance and Common Mode Rejection on page 131 6 2 8 1 Controls on the Imbal CMRR Tab The following buttons in the Imbal CMRR tab open additional dialogs Imbalan...

Page 277: ... the active trace The buttons are available if either logical port 1 or logical port 2 or both is defined as a balanced port A yellow font color indicates that currently the other logical port number is undefined and the physical port with the same number is marked as unused If you select it as the measured quantity the port is automatically enabled as a single ended port with logi cal port number...

Page 278: ... calculated DUT Balanced port Balanced port Log NWA port Physical port c Logical ports j k single ended Physical port d Logical port i balanced Physical port a Physical port b Imbalance 1 Imbalance 2 Imbalance 1 selects the balanced logical port i as the input the single ended logical ports j and k as the output and calculates the following imbalance parameter Imbjk i Sca Sda Scb Sdb Imbalance 2 s...

Page 279: ...must be different The pull down list contains all possi ble physical single ended port combinations For an analyzer with n ports provides n n 1 stability parameters Stability parameters are expressed as K out in μ1 out in and μ2 out in where out and in denote the logical output and input port numbers of the DUT Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure Trace_Name KFAC21 MUF121 MUF221 CALCulate...

Page 280: ...ows a list of all power meters that have been properly configured See Configured Devices on page 693 The bordered label below displays the type and serial number of the selected power meter Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure TraceName PmtrD1 CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine TraceName PmtrD1 Auto Zero Initiates an automatic zeroing procedure of the power meter which must be disconnec ted f...

Page 281: ...UType 6 2 11 DC Tab Selects the ranges for the DC voltages fed to the DC INPUT connectors at the rear panel as measured quantities and opens the PAE measurement dialog The DC input connectors are available as option R S ZNB ZNBT B81 see Chapter 5 7 18 DC Inputs on page 234 6 2 11 1 Controls on the DC Tab The PAE button opens the Power Added Efficiency dialog DC 1 DC 2 DC 3 DC 4 Source Port Selects...

Page 282: ... sig nals To protect the instrument all ranges are pre set to 20 V the widest range If the actual voltage of the input signal exceeds the selected range the measurement is incorrect and a DC overload message is displayed Remote command SENSe Ch DC DCInp RANGe 6 2 11 2 Power Added Efficiency PAE Dialog The Power Added Efficiency PAE dialog configures the measurement of the PAE of an active 2 port d...

Page 283: ...input parameters and DC voltage measurements For an overview see Table 5 26 Note The measurement types for Constant Voltage Source and Voltage and Cur rent require an additional non zero known precision resistor R Remote command SENSe Ch PAE TYPE Formula Shows the formula for the calculation of the DC supply power PDC depending on the selected Measurement Type The parameters R U0 and or I0 must be...

Page 284: ...nations of display formats and measured quantities see Chapter 6 2 Meas Softtool on page 251 Nevertheless to extract useful infor mation from the data it is important to select a display format which is appropriate to the analysis of a particular measured quantity An extended range of formats is available for markers To convert any point on a trace create a marker and select the appropriate marker...

Page 285: ... exceeds 180 the curve jumps by 360 if it falls below 180 the trace jumps by 360 The result is a trace with a typical sawtooth shape The alternative Unwr Phase format avoids this behavior Application Phase measurements e g phase distortion deviation from linearity Tip alternative formats The magnitude of each complex quantity can be displayed on a linear scale or on a logarithmic scale It is possi...

Page 286: ... Standing Wave Ratio SWR from the measured quantity typically a reflection S parameter and displays it in a Cartesian diagram Properties The SWR or Voltage Standing Wave Ratio VSWR is a measure of the power reflected at the input of the DUT It is calculated from the magnitude of the reflection coefficients Sii where i denotes the port number of the DUT according to 1 1 ii ii S S SWR The superposit...

Page 287: ...le appears on the horizontal axis scaled linearly The magnitude of the complex quantity C i e C sqrt Re C 2 Im C 2 appears on the vertical axis also scaled linearly Application Real measurement data i e the Stability Factors and the DC voltages are always displayed in a Lin Mag diagram Tip alternative formats The magnitude of each complex quantity can be displayed on a logarithmic scale It is poss...

Page 288: ...n inverted Smith chart to display a complex quantity primarily a reflection S parameter Properties The Inverted Smith chart is a circular diagram obtained by mapping the positive complex semi plane into a unit circle If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient Sii then the unit Inverted Smith chart represents the normalized admittance In contrast to the polar diagram the scaling o...

Page 289: ...ement results To compensate for a frequency dependent delay in the test setup a system error correction is required Note The delay for reflection factors corresponds to the transmission time in forward and reverse direction see Length and delay measurement in Chapter 5 6 1 3 Auto Length on page 184 Remote command CALCulate Chn FORMat GDELay Aperture Points Defines an aperture Δf for the group Dela...

Page 290: ...cy sweep For Log Frequency and Segmented Frequency sweeps it varies with the sweep point number m Application The aperture must be adjusted to the conditions of the measurement A small aperture increases the noise in the group delay a large aperture tends to mini mize the effects of noise and phase uncertainty but at the expense of frequency reso lution Phase distortions i e deviations from linear...

Page 291: ... automatically when a display format diagram type is selected Scale settings that are not compatible with the current display format are unavailable grayed out Relations between the scaling parameters The scaling parameters Scale Div Ref Value Ref Pos Max and Min are cou pled together in the following manner Max Min Scale Div Number of graticule divisions Max Ref Value when Ref Value is 10 Min Ref...

Page 292: ...to Scale Diag Common Scale Similar to Auto Scale Diagram on page 292 but scales equally formatted traces together Ref Value Marker See Ref Val Marker Max Marker Min Marker on page 382 Scale Div Sets the value of the vertical diagram divisions in Cartesian diagrams Scale Div corresponds to the increment between two consecutive grid lines The unit depends on the display format dB for display format ...

Page 293: ...eference line Ref Value is left unchanged so the current trace is shifted together with the Ref Pos Ref Pos is not available grayed for polar diagrams Polar Smith Inv Smith Remote command DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe RPOSition Max Min Define the upper and lower edge of a Cartesian diagram Max and Min are not available grayed for polar diagrams Polar Smith Inv Smith Remote command DISPlay...

Page 294: ...Traces Decouple Trc Assigns independent scale settings to all traces to the active trace Remote command n a 6 4 3 Zoom Tab Provides graphical and stimulus zoom functions for cartesian diagrams The graphical zoom magnifies a paraxial rectangular portion of a diagram without modifying any sweep parameters The stimulus zoom also magnifies the selected rect angle but at the same time narrows the sweep...

Page 295: ...e command n a Zoom Select Stim Zoom Select Prepares the analyzer GUI for the selection of a paraxial rectangular zoom area The effect of the subsequent selection depends on the current zoom mode as indica ted on the button label In Mode Graphical Zoom button label Zoom Select the selected rectangle is magnified without modifying any sweep parameters In Mode Stimulus Zoom button label Stim Zoom Sel...

Page 296: ... WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr ZOOM STATe Max Min Start Stop Defines the coordinates of the graphical zoom window for the active diagram Max and Min define the response axis range Start and Stop define the stimulus axis range The input fields are only enabled if a zoom area was selected before Remote command DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr ZOOM BOTTom DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr ZOOM STARt DISPlay WIND...

Page 297: ...Dia gram Channel Tip You can also select an item in a trace list or a trace line in a diagram to make the related trace the active one This function is disabled if only one trace is defined Add Trace Creates a trace in the active Diagram Channel and makes it the Active Trace The new trace is created with the settings of the former active trace but displayed in another color The former and the new ...

Page 298: ...undo function to restore a trace that was unintentionally deleted Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter DELete CALCulate PARameter DELete ALL CALCulate Ch PARameter DELete CALL Diagram Channel Displays the active diagram and channel i e the diagram and channel of the Active Trace Allows you to move the active trace to another diagram or channel Remote command DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED Sh...

Page 299: ...select the quantity to be measured left buttons up to 9 ports right numeric input 10 or more ports 6 5 1 3 Trace Manager Dialog The Trace Manager dialog allows you to perform operations on traces Access TRACE TRACE CONFIG Traces Trace Manager All existing traces of the current recall set are listed in a table with several editable white or non editable gray columns Table Area The table contains th...

Page 300: ...era tors etc which places some restrictions on the syntax of trace names The first character of a trace name can be one of the following an upper case letter from A to Z or lower case letter from a to z an underscore _ a square bracket or For all other characters of a trace name the numbers 0 to 9 can be used in addi tion Note The analyzer does not accept illegal or ambiguous trace names If an ill...

Page 301: ... that each data trace is assigned its own independent channel For data traces previously assigned to the same channel new channels are cre ated based on the original channel s settings Data traces and their associated memory traces are assigned to the same channel Remote command n a Couple All Scales Decouple All Scales Couple All Scales couples the scale settings of all traces to the scale settin...

Page 302: ...e but disabled for the memory traces Channel settings made for a memory trace act on the associated data trace Some of the channel settings for a data trace e g the Stimulus range also affect the display of the memory traces If due to a change of the sweep type the stimulus type of a data trace changes all its memory traces are deleted Active Trace vs Active Data Trace In the context of memory tra...

Page 303: ... traces see Coupling of data and memory traces on page 302 Remote command CALCulate Chn MATH MEMorize Destination Selects the destination for the Data to Destination and Data Func to Destination operations The destination can be one of the following An existing memory trace of the active data trace The existing memory trace is overwritten New Trace The data are copied to a new memory trace associa...

Page 304: ...ation on trace functions see Data Func to Destination on page 303 All Data to Destination stores the raw trace without the trace functions All Data Func to Destination stores the trace after it has been transformed using trace func tions Remote command CALCulate Chn MATH MEMorize Destination Selects the destination for the All Data to Destination and All Data Func to Desti nation functions that op...

Page 305: ...ides all data or memory traces in the active recall set Hidden traces are not deleted Remote command DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr SHOW Delete All Mem Deletes all memory traces in the active recall set Tips Use the Trace Manager Dialog to hide or delete arbitrary sets of traces Use the UNDO function of the analyzer to restore a trace that was unintentionally deleted Remote command CALCulate PARam...

Page 306: ...ons on for matted trace data Complex Data math is available in all firmware versions of all R S ZNx vector net work analyzers Formatted Data math was added in version 3 0 of the R S ZNB ZNBT firmware Trace Math Complex Data Formatted Data Activates or deactivates the Complex Data and or Formatted Data formula previ ously defined using Data Mem Data Mem or Define Math via Chap ter 6 5 4 2 User Def ...

Page 307: ...the diagram area The mathematical trace is updated as the measurement goes on and the analyzer provides new active trace data This function is disabled unless a memory trace is coupled to the active data trace Trace coupling ensures that the two traces have the same number of points so that the mathematical trace is well defined Remote command CALCulate Chn MATH FUNCtion CALCulate Chn MATH FORMatt...

Page 308: ...athematical relation Mathi Fct c1 cn Trc1i Trcmi i 1 no of points Different traces can be used in the same mathematical relation provided that they con tain the same number of points The analyzer places no further restriction on the com patibility of traces e g the sweep points of the traces do not have to be the same The number of points belongs to the channel settings Coupled data and memory tra...

Page 309: ...ied by their trace names Data denotes the active data trace Mem is the memory trace associated with the active data trace or the first created one if several memory traces are associated with the active data trace StimVal is the array of stimulus values see footnote for Table 6 2 The trace operands denote unmodified data and memory traces Trace math and other trace functions Smoothing Hold Shift T...

Page 310: ...nto a linear power before the selected trace format is applied Otherwise no conversion is performed and dB Mag results are referenced to 1 μV If Result is Wave Quantity is disabled the analyzer assumes that the result of the mathematical expression is dimensionless Examples for dimensionless expres sions are all terms proportional to ratios of wave quantities e g Data Mem2 Trc1 The selected trace ...

Page 311: ...emati cal expression as it is written in the User Def Math dialog It is possible to change or create math string files using a text editor Remote command CALCulate Chn MATH WUNit STATe 6 5 5 Time Domain Tab The Time Domain tab enables and configures the time domain representation of the measurement results Time domain analysis requires option R S ZNB K2 R S ZNBT K2 If this option is not installed ...

Page 312: ...wn in a second line Trace settings in time domain representation While the time domain representation is active the trace settings behave as follows The Start and Stop settings in the Time Gate tab configure the time axis All trace formats including the circular diagrams are available Limit lines can be defined like the limit lines for time sweeps The bandfilter search functions are available for ...

Page 313: ...re transforming it to the time domain An independent Time Gate can be used after the transformation to eliminate unwanted responses see Chapter 6 5 6 Time Gate Tab on page 316 The analyzer always uses a No Profiling Rectangle window to calculate the time gated frequency domain trace see Time Gated Frequency Domain Trace on page 208 Remote command CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME WINDow Side Lobe Level...

Page 314: ...ent to the Span value on the Time Gate Tab This button is only enabled if TD VSWR is active Remote command CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME SPAN Show Impulse Response To get an impression of the required Gate Span you can quickly create a trace display ing the impulse response of the active trace in a new diagram This button is only enabled if TD VSWR is active 6 5 5 2 Low Pass Settings Dialog The L...

Page 315: ...e the Freq Step Size remains approxi mately the same This algorithm can increase the sweep time due to the additional sweep points introduced The three grids can be calculated repeatedly in any order the analyzer always starts from the original set of sweep points For more information refer to Chapter 5 7 2 4 Harmonic Grid on page 206 Remote command CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPASs Automatic Har...

Page 316: ... then calculates the remaining values red dots by linear interpolation of the magnitude and phase Remote command CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPASs DCSParam CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPASs DCSParam CONTinuous CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPASs DCSParam EXTRapolate CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPFRequency 6 5 6 Time Gate Tab Defines and activates a gate in the time domain An active time gate act...

Page 317: ...he unambiguous range which is given by Δt 1 Δf where Δf is the Freq Step Size Simply reduce the time span until the warn ing disappears Remote command CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME CENTer CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME SPAN CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME STARt CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME STOP Show Range Lines Displays or hides two red lines indicating the start and stop of the time gate in a t...

Page 318: ...ev gate The entered value is the ratio of the power of the central lobe to the power of the first side lobe in dB Remote command CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME DCHebyshev 6 5 7 Distance to Fault Tab With option K3 the R S ZNB ZNBT can locate faults and discontinuities on cables and transmission lines The measured S parameter trace is mathematically converted to the time domain and represented in t...

Page 319: ...see Cable Type on page 321 5 Perform a full one port calibration at physical port 2 see Start Cal Unit P2 Refl OSM Start Cal P2 Refl OSM on page 322 You should now be able to locate the faults peaks by examining the trace Or let the firmware generate a list of faults by enabling Fault Limit Check and defin ing a suitable Fault Limit Use Fault List to display and export the detected faults Distance...

Page 320: ...e Note If the Stop Distance is so high that for the selected cable type the signal reflected at far away discontinuities would be too small a warning tooltip is displayed If the Stop Distance exceeds the unambiguous range for the given frequency span and number of sweep points a warning is displayed in the instrument status bar Use the Auto Number of Points function to adjust the number of sweep p...

Page 321: ... message box OK reduces the frequency span Δf to Δf v c0 100001 2 6 dstop which makes 100001 sweep points sufficient for unambiguous display see the formula above However this reduction of the fre quency span comes at the cost of coarser distance resolution Cancel default leaves the frequency unchanged Remote command CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault POINts Cable Type Opens a dialog that allows to s...

Page 322: ...libration Otherwise the measurement can yield inaccurate results Use Auto Number of Points to let the firmware assist you Fault Limit Check Enables disables checking the current Distance to Fault trace for spikes above the given Fault Limit red line The fault limit is defined relative to the 0 dB line in the test diagram i e the peak response value for total reflection after proper calibration Not...

Page 323: ...ttenuation and a wide range of standard cable types Cable types are defined by their relative permittivity εr or equivalently by their velocity factor 1 sqrt εr and a frequency dependent attenuation table see Frequency Dependent Attenuation Table on page 323 The velocity factor is a measure for the velocity of an electromagnetic wave in a dielec tric with permittivity εr relative to its velocity i...

Page 324: ...attenuation is specified at several frequency points the R S ZNB ZNBT calculates the Attenuation fcenter by linear interpolation If fcenter is below above the specified frequency range then Attenuation fcenter is linearly extrapo lated from the two lowest highest frequency points It is recommended to specify the cable attenuation as accurately as possible The cor rection due to the attenuation fac...

Page 325: ...ess tracking is dis abled see Tracking Enabled on page 326 the table is updated with every sweep Remote command CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK COUNt CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK DATA FaultNo Contents Allows you to filter the Fault Table All Channels default The table displays the faults of all Distance to Fault traces in the current recall set Active Channel The table displays the fa...

Page 326: ...l Separator the fault list of Figure 6 3 is exported to 1 Trc1 457 2 mm 8 56 dB 2 Trc1 1 539 m 9 24 dB For an explanation of the possible filters see Contents on page 325 Tracking Enabled If checked default the Fault Table on page 325 is cleared at every sweep start and populated in real time Uncheck Tracking Enabled to freeze the table contents 6 5 8 Trace Statistics Tab Evaluates statistical and...

Page 327: ...oups of statistical results The values are based on all response values of the trace in the selected evalu ation range Evaluation Range Suppose that the trace in the evaluation range contains n stimulus values xi and n cor responding response values yi measurement points The statistical values are obtained as follows Min and Max are the largest and the smallest of all response values yi Pk Pk is t...

Page 328: ...sults are based on unformatted wave quantities voltages R jX the results are based on the impedance values R and X G jB the results are based on the admittance values G and B In the two latter cases the RMS value is not displayed Remote command CALCulate Chn STATistics FORMat Phase El Length Displays or hides the phase delay Phs Dly and the electrical length El Len of the trace in the selected eva...

Page 329: ...fference of the stimulus values of point B minus point A Flatness is a measure of the deviation of the trace in the evaluation range from linearity The analyzer calculates the difference trace between the active trace and the straight line between points A and B The flatness is the difference between the largest and the smallest response value of this difference trace Remote command CALCulate Chn ...

Page 330: ...he response value at the compression point The info field shows invalid results if the wrong sweep type or trace format is selected or if no compression point with the configured properties was found Remote command CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP STATe CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP LEVel CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP PHASe CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RESult CALCulat...

Page 331: ...alcula tion The Remote command CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RDOMain USER CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RDOMain USER STARt CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RDOMain USER STOP CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RDOMain USER SHOW Defined Value This setting is only visible if Defined Value is used as Reference Value It manually defines the reference value small signal value for...

Page 332: ... ranges are defined similar to the marker search ranges For more infor mation see Chapter 6 7 3 2 Search Range Dialog on page 370 Note A restricted evaluation range is indicated in the Trace Statistics info field Remote command CALCulate Chn STATistics DOMain USER CALCulate Chn STATistics DOMain USER STARt CALCulate Chn STATistics DOMain USER STOP Range Limit Lines On Displays or hides the range l...

Page 333: ...sweep point is replaced by the arith metic mean of the trace values at the sweep point itself and at neighboring sweep points symmetrically to the left and to the right The number of trace values to be averaged is defined by the Aperture and can be adjusted according to the properties of the trace Smoothing operates on the formatted trace and does not significantly increase the measurement time Ti...

Page 334: ...re that is small compared to the width of the observed structures e g the resonance peaks of a filter If necessary restrict the sweep range or switch smoothing off to analyze narrow structures Remote command CALCulate Chn SMOothing APERture Hold Selects the Max Hold peak hold or Min Hold function for the active trace or disa bles both functions Hold Off With enabled Max Hold or Min Hold function t...

Page 335: ... direction leaving the phase of a complex parameter unchanged The Phase factor rotates a trace that is displayed in a polar diagram around the origin leaving the magnitude unchanged The Real value shifts a real trace in vertical direction leaving the imaginary part unchanged The Imag value shifts an imaginary trace in vertical direction leaving the real part unchanged Tip Shifting the trace by con...

Page 336: ...averaging cycle Infinite Average Restart Infinite Average enables or disables Infinite Averaging default disabled Restart starts a new averaging cycle Remote command CALCulate Chn IAVerage STATe Mode Selects the quantities to be averaged Magnitude Phase Perform averaging of magnitude and phase default of the complex trace value Real Imag Perform averaging of the real and imaginary part of the comp...

Page 337: ...rresponding content and file format see Chap ter 6 5 11 2 Export Data File Type Dialog on page 338 snp Free Config opens a dialog to define the port assignment for the created Touchstone s n p file See Chapter 6 5 11 4 Select Ports Dialog on page 342 6 5 11 1 Import Complex Data Dialog The Import Complex Data dialog loads a memory trace from a trace file Trace files are ASCII files with selectable...

Page 338: ...empty if the selected file contains no compatible data Import Complex Data is a standard Open File dialog with an additional button Import Data to New Mem Specifies whether the loaded data overwrite an existing memory trace if available box unchecked or whether they are used to generate a new memory trace box checked If the box is unchecked and the active trace is a memory trace then this memory t...

Page 339: ...in an external application To store measurement data and reimport it in a future measurement session Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 5 4 2 Trace Files on page 141 Chapter 5 4 2 3 Finding the Best File Format on page 146 Figure 6 4 Touchstone File Export Figure 6 5 ASCII Trace Files Export Trace Config Softtool ...

Page 340: ...hase or dB magnitude and phase see also Formatted Values on page 340 Export of Formatted Values is not available for Touchstone files Normalize with Port Specific Impedances For Touchstone file export only activate this in order to renormalize according to the port specific reference impedances instead of a common target impedance see Renormalization of S parameters on page 144 Symmetric Params Fo...

Page 341: ...eld All possible stages of the trace data flow e g trace formats trace mathematics time domain transform shift smoothing are taken into account Some trace functions e g time scale shift stimulus also affect the stimulus values Export of formatted data is not available for Touchstone files Field Separator For ASCII csv or Matlab dat files only Defines the separator that the ana lyzer uses to separa...

Page 342: ...able for trace data import only If checked a selected trace Sij is imported as a memory trace for all data traces in the current recall set that are measuring Sij Remote command MMEMory LOAD TRACe AUTO 6 5 11 4 Select Ports Dialog The Select Ports dialog defines the port assignment for the created Touchstone s n p file Access TRACE TRACE CONFIG Trace Data snp Free Config Touchstone files and file ...

Page 343: ...h of the ana lyzer port numbers must be assigned to one s n p port number Active Channel All Channels Selects data export for the active channel or for all channels Reset Port Assignments Restores the identity between original and assigned port number Save Settings in Recall Set The Select Ports dialog preserves the selected and assigned port numbers By default unchecked these settings are global ...

Page 344: ...it check Limit lines are available for all cartesian diagram types dB Mag limits can also be checked in complex diagrams Smith Polar Background information Refer to Chapter 5 4 1 Limit Check on page 134 6 6 1 1 Controls on the Limit Test Tab The Define Limit Line button opens the Define Limit Lines dialog see Chap ter 6 6 1 2 Define Limit Lines Dialog on page 348 Show Limit Line Shows or hides the...

Page 345: ...witch off the limit check Remote command CALCulate Chn LIMit DISPlay STATe Limit Check Enables disables the limit check for the active trace If enabled an additional info field is displayed in the diagram indicating the PASS or FAIL state Limit violations are marked with a colored square An acoustic signal Limit Fail Beep and a TTL signal indicating pass or fail can be generated in addition The Li...

Page 346: ...IMit FAIL CALCulate LIMit FAIL ALL CALCulate Chn LIMit STATe AREA Limit Fail Beep Activates or deactivates the fail beep The fail beep is a low tone acoustic signal that is generated each time the analyzer detects an exceeded limit No fail beep can be gen erated if the limit check is switched off Note In contrast to the R S ZNB the R S ZNBT does not have a built in audio device and loudspeaker To ...

Page 347: ... to signal 1 or signal 2 assigned to signal 1 but not to signal 2 assigned to signal 2 but not to signal 1 assigned to both signals If several traces are assigned to a pass fail signal then the TTL signal is only gener ated if all traces are within their respective limits It is switched off if one trace exceeds those limits Application Graduated quality check The two pass fail signals can be used ...

Page 348: ...necting two points with linear or logarithmic Interpolation or as a user defined formula Access TRACE LINE Limit Test Define Limit Line Background information Refer to Chapter 5 4 1 Limit Check on page 134 When you switch to a different sweep type existing limit lines are preserved With a different sweep variable however the limit lines cannot be displayed and the corre sponding limit check cannot...

Page 349: ...the first point of the segment Stop Stimulus is the stimulus x axis value of the last point of the segment Response For a limit line segment that is defined as linear functions of the stimulus Response displays the y axis values at the start and stop stimulus x axis values For formula defined line segments it displays the formula Tap the Response field to open the Response Dialog that offers the f...

Page 350: ...sponse value of the active segment The segment numbers in the list are adap ted If no segment is active Insert is equivalent to Add Delete removes the selected segment from the list Delete All clears the entire segment list so it is possible to define or load a new limit line Remote command CALCulate Chn LIMit DELete ALL Recall Save The buttons open an Open File or Save File dialog which allows yo...

Page 351: ... are not overwritten Both import dialogs contain the following file import settings Offsets contains two input fields to define constant offset values for all imported segments The Response offset shifts all segments in vertical direction the Stim ulus offset shifts them in horizontal direction The offsets are added to the start and stop values of all segments Type defines whether the imported seg...

Page 352: ...button or Tap and hold the text field to open the User Def Math Dialog Remote command CALCulate Chn LIMit SEGMent Seg FORMula STATe CALCulate Chn LIMit SEGMent Seg FORMula 6 6 2 Ripple Test Tab Defines ripple limits for the measurement results visualizes them in the diagrams and activates deactivates the ripple limit check A ripple test is a special type of limit test where the difference between ...

Page 353: ...s range and distance the ripple limit are fixed Note Display of the limit line and limit check are independent of each other Hiding the limit line does not switch off the limit check Remote command CALCulate Chn RIPPle DISPlay STATe Ripple Check Switches the ripple limit check of the active trace on or off When the limit check is switched on a movable info field shows the pass fail informa tion an...

Page 354: ...e command CALCulate Chn RIPPle STATe CALCulate Chn RIPPle FAIL CALCulate RIPPle FAIL ALL CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent Seg RESult CALCulate Chn RIPPle STATe AREA Ripple Fail Beep Activates or deactivates the fail beep The fail beep is a low tone acoustic signal that is generated each time the analyzer detects an exceeded ripple limit No fail beep can be generated if the ripple limit check is switch...

Page 355: ...basis A separate ripple limit can be assigned to each range Access TRACE LINE Ripple Test Def Ripple Test Defining ripple limits with minimum effort Choose one of the following methods to create and handle ripple limit ranges effi ciently To configure a limit test with only a few ranges use Add and edit each range in the table individually Use the Align All button to create non overlapping contigu...

Page 356: ...SEGMent Seg LIMit CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent COUNt Add Insert Delete Delete All Align All The first four buttons below the range list extend shorten or reorder the list Add adds a new range to the list The new range is inserted after the previously selected range The current range numbers are adapted the start and stop stimu lus values are set so that an overlap is avoided Moreover the ripple li...

Page 357: ...rmat for Ripple Limits on page 141 Remote command MMEMory LOAD RIPPle MMEMory STORe RIPPle 6 6 3 Circle Test Tab Defines circular limit lines for complex trace formats Polar Smith Inv Smith vis ualizes them in the diagram and activates deactivates the circle limit check Most of the control elements in the Circle Test tab are disabled if the active trace has a cartesian format Background informatio...

Page 358: ...eck Note Display of the limit line and limit check are independent of each other Hiding the limit line does not switch off the limit check Remote command CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle DISPlay STATe Limit Check Switches the limit check of the active trace on or off When the limit check is switched on a movable PASS or FAIL message is dis played in the diagram If the limit check fails at a measurement ...

Page 359: ... circle The circle limits can only be checked if the trace format is complex While a carte sian format is active the limit circles are hidden and the circle limit check is sus pended If the limit check for cartesian limit lines is enabled it is also evaluated in complex diagrams Figure 6 7 Simultaneous dB Mag limit line and circle check Remote command CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle STATe CALCulate Chn...

Page 360: ...s radius and its center on the X axis and Y axis Remote command CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle DATA Global Check See Global Check on page 346 TTL1 Pass TTL2 Pass See TTL1 Pass TTL2 Pass on page 347 6 6 4 Display Circle Tab The Display Circle functionality allows you to limit results in complex trace formats Smith Polar to a user defined circle In particular while the trace format is complex line and c...

Page 361: ...le Test enabled but not limited to Display Circle right PASS Circle Test enabled but limited to Display Circle Remote command CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle STATe Clear Circle Resets the Display Circle to its default configuration unit circle show border off limit to circle off Remote command CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle CLEar Draw Circle Radius Center X Center Y Defines the Display Circle either by d...

Page 362: ...ppears in the numeric entry field Remote command CALCulate Chn DLINe 6 7 Marker Softtool The Marker softtool allows you to position markers on a trace and to define their properties Markers are also convenient tools for searching special points on traces and for scaling diagrams Access TRACE MARKER Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 5 2 1 3 Markers on page 95 Chapter 4 ...

Page 363: ...r Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk X CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence X Mkr i Arb Response Ref Mkr Arb Response Gets sets the response value Y position of an Arbitrary marker see Marker Mode on page 366 Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk Y CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence Y On Enables disables the active marker Markers remember their Marker Props while disabled see Chapter 6 7 2 Marker...

Page 364: ... triangle labeled M i is positioned on the trace and the marker coordinates are displayed in the movable info field The stimulus position of an active marker can be entered in the Mkr i Stimulus entry field The default position is the center of the sweep range You can also drag and drop markers in a diagram to change their X position If the Marker Mode is Arbitrary also the response value Y positi...

Page 365: ...kers Channel Coupled Markers in name of active channel Diagram Coupled Markers in name of active diagram Coupling also works if Tracking is enabled for Marker m in one trace The Marker m of the other traces then follow the movements of the tracked marker The same holds true for the reference marker Remote command CALCulate MARKer COUPled STATe 6 7 2 Marker Props Tab Modifies the properties of a ma...

Page 366: ...crete mode means that a marker can be set to discrete sweep points only If dis crete mode is switched off the marker can be positioned on any point of the trace and its response values are obtained by interpolation Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk MODE CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence MODE Marker Mode Determines if and how the marker s position is adjusted and if and how it can be moved in ...

Page 367: ... the marker s stimulus value i e the marker snaps to the trace Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk TYPE CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence TYPE Marker Info Displays the marker coordinates above the marker symbol Remote command n a Ref Mkr Mkr Places the reference marker to the position of the active marker Ref Mkr Mkr is not active if the active marker is a reference marker Remote command n a Ex...

Page 368: ...ange By default the search range is equal to the entire sweep range If necessary the active marker is enabled to indicate the search result Background information Refer to Basic Marker Search Functions on page 100 6 7 3 1 Controls on the Marker Search Tab Max Min Sets the active marker to the absolute maximum or minimum in the search range i e to the largest or smallest of all response values If a...

Page 369: ...er is set to the next maximum The next maximum is the maximum with the largest response value that is below the current marker response value If Min is active then the marker is set to the next minimum The next minimum is the minimum with the smallest response value that is above the current marker response value If Min or Max is active then the marker is set to the next minimum or maximum whichev...

Page 370: ...ctive the assigned Search Range applies to all sweeps and can be used to achieve uniqueness in Min Max or Target Search See also Chapter 6 5 8 Trace Statistics Tab on page 326 It is possible to define search ranges for each recall set and assign them to the corre sponding markers and the reference marker Select Marker Selects the reference marker or one of the numbered markers that can be assigned...

Page 371: ...rch Ranges are identical to the evaluation ranges for trace sta tistics For more information see Chapter 6 5 8 2 Evaluation Range Dialog on page 331 Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain USER RANGe CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain USER STARt CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain USER STOP Range Limit Lines On Displays or hides the range limit lines in the diagram area Ran...

Page 372: ...format and cannot be modified Changing the trace format resets the Threshold to a format specific default value Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk THReshold CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk THReshold STATe Excursion Settings Defines a minimum excursion for peak searches and activates it If Active only peaks with an excursion above the configured Excursion value are considered By definition the excursio...

Page 373: ...e The required markers are created deleted as needed Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute MMAXimum MMINimum CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion RESult Eval Range Opens the Evaluation Range Dialog that allows you to set the domain for the multiple peak search A modified domain takes effect the next time Max Min is used Tracking Enables or disables tracking for Multiple Peak search I...

Page 374: ...ve trace format and cannot be modified Changing the trace format resets the Threshold to a format specific default value Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer MPEak THReshold CALCulate Chn MARKer MPEak THReshold STATe Excursion Settings Defines a minimum excursion for multiple peak searches and activates it If Active only peaks with an excursion above the configured Excursion value are considered By...

Page 375: ...ows you to specify the target value in different formats see Tar get Format below For example you can search for a particular phase value in a Smith chart Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk TARGet Target Format Selects the format that is used to specify the Target Value The selected target format applies to the current marker only each marker can have a different target format The table below ...

Page 376: ...ts original position Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute TARGet CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion RESult Search Left Search Right Searches the Target Value to the left right of the active marker s stimulus value within the current search range see Chapter 6 7 3 2 Search Range Dialog on page 370 If the search is successful the active marker is moved to the next smaller larger sti...

Page 377: ...med However for other formats measured quantities or sweep types the Bandfilter functions can still be useful to analyze general trace properties The Eval Range button opens the Evaluation Range dialog that allows you to nar row the Bandfilter search to a particular stimulus range See Evaluation Range Dia log Bandwidth Specifies the minimum excursion of the bandpass and bandstop peaks A bandpass p...

Page 378: ...pass region M1 indicates the maximum of the peak Max M2 indicates the point on the left edge of the peak where the trace value is equal to the maximum minus the bandwidth factor Lower Edge M3 indicates the point on the right edge of the peak where the trace value is equal to the maximum minus the bandwidth factor Upper Edge M4 indicates the center of the peak Depending on a system setting the cent...

Page 379: ...gion on the active trace and activates Tracking A bandstop region is the lowest peak local minimum in the search range whose level is at least Bandwidth below the maximum passband value If Bandstop Ref to Max is selected the analyzer uses or creates the four markers M1 to M4 to locate the bandstop region M1 indicates the minimum of the peak Min M2 indicates the Lower Edge of the bandstop i e the p...

Page 380: ...se value at the active marker position plus minus the Bandwidth To be valid the peak must be above below the response value for the band edges Absolute Level The bandpass bandstop is the tallest lowest peak in the search range To be valid the peak must be above below Bandwidth The Lower Band Edge and Upper Band Edge values are given by the frequencies where the trace is equal to Bandwidth None Ban...

Page 381: ... marker appears in the center of the diagram Start Marker sets the beginning start of the sweep range equal to the stimulus value of the active marker leaving the end stop value unchanged The active marker appears at the left edge of the diagram Stop Marker sets the end stop of the sweep range equal to the stimulus value of the active marker leaving the beginning start unchanged The active marker ...

Page 382: ...n so that the delay at the marker position becomes zero Mathematically it modifies the measurement results by subtracting the delay at the current marker position The delay represents the propagation time of the wave Hence Zero Delay at Marker performs an electrical length compensation by adding or subtracting a simulated loss less transmission line of variable length to or from the test port This...

Page 383: ...of the tracked marker The same holds true for the reference marker Remote command CALCulate MARKer COUPled STATe Coupling Type Determines the set of traces whose markers are coupled to the markers of the active trace when marker coupling is enabled All marker coupling applies to all traces in the active recall set that have the same stimulus variable as the active trace Channel marker coupling app...

Page 384: ...s in polar and Smith diagrams this direct relation is lost In any case a marker can be used to dis play the stimulus value of a given trace point For Time Domain traces points in the observation interval are interpreted as stimulus values All stimulus settings except the Time Domain X Axis settings are channel set tings Time Domain X Axis applies to the active time domain trace only Background inf...

Page 385: ...ency and Stop Frequency can be set Note For segmented frequency sweeps the start and stop frequencies and the num ber of sweep points are defined per segment See Chapter 6 10 2 2 Define Segments Dialog on page 402 Remote command SENSe Ch FREQuency STARt SENSe Ch FREQuency STOP SENSe Ch FREQuency CENTer SENSe Ch FREQuency SPAN SYSTem FREQuency query frequency range of the network analyzer Number of...

Page 386: ...t is also dis played on the Power Bw Avg softtool 6 8 2 1 Controls on the Power Tab left R S ZNB with Receiver Step Attenuators and 4 physical ports right R S ZNB ZNBT with Receiver Step Attenuators and 4 physical ports on the VNA and connected switch matrices If the number of test ports on the VNA and connected switch matrices is higher than 4 the Step Attenuators input fields are hidden They are...

Page 387: ...hey protect the instrument from being overloaded or damaged e g if the DUT is a power amplifier Attenuation factors are port and channel specific Possible values are 0 dB to 30 dB in steps of 10 dB The analyzer rounds any entered value below the maximum attenua tion to the closest step Note Receiver step attenuators are optional hardware see Chapter 5 7 17 Receiver Step Attenuators on page 233 If ...

Page 388: ...ain X Axis tab is hidden Related information Refer to the following sections Chapter 5 7 2 Time Domain Analysis on page 203 Chapter 6 5 5 Time Domain Tab on page 311 Figure 6 8 Stimulus Time Domain X Axis softtool tab left Time representation right Distance representation Time Start Time Stop Time Center Time Span Defines the display range for the time domain trace in time representation see Time ...

Page 389: ...interpretation of time and distance depends on the measurement type For reflec tion measurements S parameters Sii or ratios with equal port indices the time axis represents the propagation time of a signal from the source to the DUT and back For transmission measurement it represents the propagation time from the source through the device to the receiver The distance between the source and the DUT...

Page 390: ...ings are changed Optimizing the filter settings A small bandwidth and a high selectivity of the digital IF filter suppress the noise level around the measurement frequency and thus increase the dynamic range However the measurement time increases with smaller filter bandwidths and high selectivity For small bandwidths the filter settling time which is inversely proportional to the band width is re...

Page 391: ... BANDwidth RESolution SENSe Ch BWIDth RESolution Selectivity Selects the shape of the IF filter Filters with Normal selectivity provide the shortest settling time recommended for fast measurements Medium selectivity filters have steeper edges but require longer settling times High selectivity filters have the steepest edges and the longest settling times This filter type is suitable for isolating ...

Page 392: ... To eliminate a spurious signal near the measurement frequency alternative techniques e g a smaller filter bandwidth must be used The average factor is also valid for calibration sweeps The calculation of system cor rection data is based on the averaged trace Factor On Reset Factor defines the number of averaged traces On enables or disables the sweep average Reset starts a new average cycle The a...

Page 393: ...ated parameters the trigger conditions and the periodicity of the measurement Access CHANNEL SWEEP hardkey Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 5 1 4 Sweep Control on page 83 Chapter 5 1 4 3 Stimulus and Sweep Types on page 88 6 10 1 Sweep Params Tab Allows you to define the scope and timing of the measurement in the active channel Segmented sweeps In Segmented linear fre...

Page 394: ...so be defined using the Freq Step Size Tip Measurement time and screen resolution Increasing the number of sweep points improves the resolution of the trace but increa ses the measurement time The overall measurement time is composed of the hard ware settling time at the beginning of the sweep plus the sum of the measurement times at each individual sweep point Hence the measurement time increases...

Page 395: ...surement time for the sweep The minimum possible sweep time is equal to the estimated value in Auto mode Setting a larger sweep time is equivalent to defining a Meas Delay before each partial measurement Auto minimizes the sweep time The Meas Delay is set to 0 s Sweep Time indi cates the estimated sweep time depending on the current measurement settings The Sweep Time and Meas Delay values are mai...

Page 396: ...emote command SENSe Ch SWEep DWELl IPOint Freq Sweep Mode For frequency sweeps you can select Stepped or Swept mode see Chap ter 5 1 4 4 Stepped vs Swept Mode on page 89 For a Segmented sweep this setting can be overridden by segment specific sweep modes see Chapter 6 10 2 2 Define Segments Dialog on page 402 Note Swept mode is only supported for linear frequency sweeps While stepped mode is alway...

Page 397: ... 6 8 1 Stimu lus Tab on page 384 The step width between two consecutive sweep points is con stant and given by Span n 1 where n is the specified Number of Points n 1 Lin Freq is the default sweep type In a Cartesian diagram the measurement result is displayed as a trace over a linear frequency scale as known e g from spectrum ana lyzers The following example shows a Lin Freq sweep with the forward...

Page 398: ...e 135 Remote command SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE on page 1203 LOGarithmic Segmented In a Segmented linear frequency sweep the sweep range can be composed of sev eral continuous frequency sub ranges or single frequency points The sub ranges are termed sweep segments and are defined in the Define Segments Dialog Sweep segments can overlap The segment list must contain at least 2 distinct fre quency points b...

Page 399: ...r 6 8 1 Stimulus Tab on page 384 Power sweeps are particularly suitable for the analysis of non linear effects satura tion compression on active and passive DUTs e g power amplifiers mixers In a Cartesian diagram the measurement result is displayed as a trace over a dB lin ear power scale The following example shows a Power sweep in the source power range between 25 dBm and 0 dBm performed at a CW...

Page 400: ...haracteristics over the time Tip Sweep time The time interval between two consecutive trigger pulses must not be smaller than the minimum measurement time per measurement point See Sweep Time Auto on page 395 Remote command SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE on page 1203 POINt Time Time sweeps like CW Mode sweeps are performed at constant frequency and stim ulus power which can be specified in the Stimulus setti...

Page 401: ...mote command SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE on page 1203 CW Define Segments Opens the Define Segments Dialog that allows to set up the channel for a Segmented frequency sweep Seg X Axis Scales the x axis for a segmented frequency sweep In Freq based mode the x axis covers the frequency ranges of all sweep seg ments including possible gaps between the segments Equal frequency spacings correspond to equal dist...

Page 402: ...r a Segmented frequency sweep and imports or exports segmented sweep settings Access CHANNEL SWEEP Sweep Type Define Segments The dialog contains a table to edit the individual segments of the sweep range Use the Displayed Columns Dialog to select the columns to be displayed and edited Sweep segments are allowed to overlap In contrast to standard frequency sweeps the start and stop frequency in a ...

Page 403: ...e remaining columns allow you to replace channel wide measurement settings by segment specific ones These columns are only displayed and the corresponding segment specific values are only applied if they are selected in the Displayed Col umns Dialog Note Limitations for overlapping segments When overlapping sweep segments are created the marker functions trace evaluation functions trace search fun...

Page 404: ...is inserted before segment no 1 starts at the lower frequency limit of the analyzer The number of points is the same as the number of points of the next segment Delete removes the selected segment from the list Delete All clears the entire segment list so it is possible to define or load a new segmented sweep range Remote command SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg ADD SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg INSert SENSe Ch SEGMen...

Page 405: ...olumns are IF Band width Hz en IF Selectivity en IF Sideband Meas Delay µs bo Sweep Time Auto en Frq Sweep Mode Remote command MMEMory LOAD SEGMent MMEMory STORe SEGMent Displayed Columns Dialog The Displayed Columns dialog allows you to select the channel settings that can be defined per sweep segment These settings are displayed in the Define Segments Dia log and in the Point List opened via Sho...

Page 406: ...r 5 1 4 4 Stepped vs Swept Mode on page 89 Swept mode is only supported for linear frequency sweeps And even for linear fre quency sweeps there are measurement setups that are incompatible with swept mode an information popup displays the corresponding error code and description see SENSe Ch SWEep GENeration ANALog CONDition Selectivity defines the selectivity of the IF filter used for each sweep ...

Page 407: ...g cannot be edi ted Segment Time indicates the estimated sweep time depending on the cur rent measurement settings the Meas Delay is 0 s The segment sweep time and point delay values are maintained until changed explicitly if Auto is switched off Remote command SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer LEVel CONTrol SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer LEVel SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg BWIDth RESolution SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg BWID...

Page 408: ...s Background information Refer to Chapter 5 1 4 1 Partial Measurements and Driving Mode on page 84 Output trigger The R S ZNB ZNBT provides a configurable output trigger signal to synchronize exter nal devices with the measurement This signal is available at the rear panel connector EXT TRIG OUT Configuration of the output trigger signal is a remote control feature TRIGger CHANnel Ch AUXiliary com...

Page 409: ...ns of the trigger signals refer to Chapter 11 3 1 1 USER PORT on page 1381 The External trigger mode can be configured using the Sequence Delay and Sig nal Type settings In Manual trigger mode the trigger signal is generated by the Manual Trigger button If Multiple Triggers is active the trigger sources for different triggered measure ment sequences the trigger slope and the trigger delay can be s...

Page 410: ...ust be adjusted to the triggered measurement sequence If the analyzer receives a trigger event while the last sequence is still running the R S ZNB ZNBT skips the trigger event and generates a message Remote command TRIGger Ch SEQuence LINK Delay Specifies a delay time between the trigger event and the start of the next measurement sequence The specified Delay must be zero or positive so that the ...

Page 411: ...Type on page 410 Delay on page 410 Source The table defines all settings related to Multiple Triggers see Chapter 6 10 3 Trig ger Tab on page 407 For all measurement sequences the following trigger sources are available Free Run means that a trigger signal is not required External 1 is the external trigger signal fed in at either the EXT TRIG IN connector on the rear panel or pin 2 of the USER POR...

Page 412: ...ows depict ignored trigger events Remote command TRIGger Ch SEQuence MULTiple SOURce TRIGger Ch SEQuence MULTiple SLOPe Num TRIGger Ch SEQuence MULTiple HOLDoff 6 10 4 Sweep Control Tab Allows you to select the sweep mode Continuous or Single sweep and the number of sweeps per measurement cycle For the default Remote Language these settings are entered via the controls on the tab and are valid for...

Page 413: ...sure ment is stopped after the specified number of sweeps This setting applies to the active channel Tip If a Remote Language other than DEFAULT is used and Sweep All Channels is selected in the Restart Manager Dialog then Sweeps applies to all channels Remote command SENSe Ch SWEep COUNt SENSe SWEep COUNt ALL Restart Sweep Stops the current measurement and restarts a measurement cycle In Single s...

Page 414: ...epend on the selected sweep mode see Continuous Single on page 413 Sweep Stage Sweep Controller Display in Continuous Sweep Mode in Single Sweep Mode No ongoing sweep Idle Idle Sweep is being prepared Preparing Preparing Ongoing sweep 1 Continuous Sweeping if Sweeps 1 Sweeping m n if n Sweeps 1 Measurement results are being calculated Continuous Calculation Calculation 1 The VNA is sweeping or wai...

Page 415: ...sweep group Remote command INITiate Ch IMMediate SCOPe ALL SENSe Ch SWEep COUNt Sweep Active Channel Apply the sweep control settings to the active channel only The number of sweeps in a Single sweep sequence is equal to the number of Sweeps in the active channel The table lists all channels in the active recall set and allows you to define individual numbers of sweeps for all channels When a new ...

Page 416: ...age 180 Chapter 5 1 5 Data Flow on page 90 It is possible to set up perform and activate multiple system error corrections or SMARTerCals in a single calibration procedure However this Multiple Cal in Calibra tion Wizard feature is disabled by default and has to be activated in the Calibration tab of the System Config dialog 6 11 1 1 Controls on the Start Cal Tab The Start Auto Cal and Start Cal U...

Page 417: ...bration without necessarily repeating all measurements Scalar Power Cal Power Cal Opens the Power Cal Wizard If the active recall set contains several channels an Info box lets you decide whether the R S ZNB ZNBT acquires calibration data for the active channel or for all channels SMARTerCal Start Cal Unit Depending on the Multiple Cal in Calibration Wizard setting the Start Cal Unit but ton eithe...

Page 418: ...NNEL CAL Start Cal Calibration Start Cal Unit The wizard proceeds in three steps 1 Step 1 Ports allows you to configure the calibration and to select a calibration unit along with its characterization 2 Step 2 Connections allows you to define the port assignments between the R S ZNB ZNBT and the calibration unit 3 Step 3 Cal Unit guides you through the required measurements on the standards provid...

Page 419: ... the remote control command SENSe Ch CORRection CDATa If external switch matrices are involved use SENSe Ch CORRection SMATrix CDATa instead Step 1 Ports Allows you to define the calibration to be performed and to select the calibration unit to be used along with its characterization Background and related information Refer to the following sections Chapter 5 5 1 Calibration Types on page 149 Chap...

Page 420: ...was dissolved and only the uncalibrated single ended port was disabled In earlier FW versions there was no such port deactivation mechanism Since FW version 2 40 an uncalibrated port is only disabled if it is not used by a measurement i e if it is not required by any trace of the related channel Remote command The port parameters in many calibration commands define the calibrated ports Cal Unit Di...

Page 421: ...AL SDATa Query further cal unit properties SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL DATE SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL FRANge SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL PORTs SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL WARMup STATe Calibration Type Source Selects the calibration type for the selected physical ports For an overview refer to Table 5 7 The reflection calibration types can be used for any combination of physical p...

Page 422: ... if more than 4 ports are available Next Proceeds to Step 2 Connections Next is unavailable and a warning is displayed if the following happens The selected characterization data do not cover all the ports to be calibrated The selected characterization data do not contain all standards needed for the selected calibration type Step 2 Connections Defines the port assignments between the R S ZNB ZNBT...

Page 423: ...ections 4 test ports and multiple port assign ments If multiple port assignments are required and Use Reduced Number of Through on page 675 is enabled make sure that each port assignment contains the Common Port Port Assignment manual The Connections step allows you to configure the assignments between VNA ports and calibration unit ports manually Cal Softtool ...

Page 424: ...tenuation in the signal path you can either enter the port assignment manually or connect matching port numbers and select Default Port Assignment Remote command SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs CONNection Default Port Assignment Restores the default port assignments Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment DEFine DEFault SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment DEFine TPOR...

Page 425: ...asured S parameter The lower part visualizes the active port assignment and the measurement progress Calibration Sweep Diagrams During the calibration sweep each diagram contains a single S parameter trace and a typical result trace for the measured calibration standard If switch matrices are involved a sweep is performed for every possible signal path and for each of these paths a separate S para...

Page 426: ...he output port i Instead of a single Sij trace we have multiple traces Sijvativbtj E g S21v1t1v2t2 means that S21 is measured with VNA port 1 connected to the input port and VNA port 2 connected to the output port Start Cal Sweep Abort Sweep Starts the calibration sweep for the related port assignment or aborts it Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg ACQuire Detect Ports ...

Page 427: ...n COLLect AUTO SAVE Extended cal unit settings MMEMory AKAL FACTory CONVersion MMEMory AKAL USER CONVersion SYSTem COMMunicate AKAL CONNection SYSTem COMMunicate AKAL MMEMory STATe 6 11 1 4 Calibration Unit Wizard MultiCal The MultiCal version of the Calibration Unit Wizard guides you through the setup and simultaneous acquisition of multiple automatic system error corrections Access CHANNEL CAL S...

Page 428: ...ew calibrations Delete or Modify existing calibrations Add Adds a new system error correction The Add button opens the Define Calibration Dialog without pre selected ports Delete Deletes the selected calibration from the list of configured calibrations Modify Edits the selected system error correction opens the Define Calibration Dialog with the corresponding ports and calibration type pre selecte...

Page 429: ...tivates deactivates ports after a successfull calibration system error correction or power calibration has slightly changed In all FW releases calibrated ports that were previously disabled are automatically enabled as single ended logical ports Starting with FW version 2 10 uncalibrated ports were disabled in the related channel s If only one of the physical ports forming a balanced port was cali...

Page 430: ...nit Dialog on page 486 By default the R S ZNB ZNBT uses the last generated cal unit characterization Tip If the characterization wizard is password protected the Characterization button is unavailable Use this functionality to prevent inadvertent activation of inappropriate characterizations See Authentication on page 487 See also Chapter 5 5 5 3 Characterization of Calibration Units on page 171 R...

Page 431: ...rization Wizard on page 488 Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO TYPE SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs TYPE SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO CONFigure Step 2 Connections Defines the port assignments between the R S ZNB ZNBT and the calibration unit Background information Refer to Chapter 5 5 5 4 Multiple Port Assignments on page 172 for details on multi ple port assignments Figure...

Page 432: ...ulting system error correction or to discard it Background and related information Refer to Chapter 5 5 Calibration on page 148 for background information Refer to Chapter 6 11 1 6 Calibration Setting Wizard MultiCal on page 441 for the MultiCal variant of the wizard If the active channel is already equipped with a system error correction the Cali bration Setting wizard loads the underlying setup ...

Page 433: ... 9163 02 53 The layout of the main panel depends on the number of test ports available Figure 6 18 Calibration Presetting Ports and Type 4 test ports Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated Note Calibration and port de activation Cal Softtool ...

Page 434: ...note one or more reflection mea surements at each port Reflection calibration types can be used for any set of test ports reflection calibra tions are repeated for each port Straight horizontal arrows example Trans Norm denote one or more transmis sion measurements between each pair of two ports Transmission calibration types require at least two physical ports For unidirectional transmission cali...

Page 435: ...parameters or typical values One of the selected calibration kits does not contain all standards that are required for the previously selected calibration type Different connector types are defined at the ports but the selected calibration type requires uniform connectors A cal kit standard does not cover the entire calibrated frequency range Figure 6 19 Calibration Setting Wizard Step 2 Connector...

Page 436: ...LLect SCONnection PhyPt SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection CATalog SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection DELete Cal Kit Selects a cal kit for the connector at each selected physical port The drop down list contains all available calibration kits for the selected connector type The assignment of a calibration kit to a connector type must be the same for all physi cal ports If a ...

Page 437: ...d Type Start Start Step 3 Calibration Step 3 Calibration Allows you to acquire error correction data for every required port pair and calibration standard where required depends on the selected ports and calibration type On Apply the R S ZNB ZNBT calculates the system error correction error terms from the measurement data of the standards and applies the result to the active channel The Reduced Th...

Page 438: ...e calibrated ports and standards and visualizes the measurement progress Calibration Sweep Diagrams During the calibration sweep each diagram contains a single S parameter trace and a typical result trace for the measured calibration standard If switch matrices are involved a sweep is performed for every possible signal path and for each of these paths a separate S parameter trace is shown see Cha...

Page 439: ...lved the label also indicates which VNA port b is switched to the input port j and which VNA port a is switched to the output port i Instead of a single Sij trace we have multiple traces Sijvativbtj E g S21v1t1v2t2 means that S21 is measured with VNA port 1 connected to the input port and VNA port 2 connected to the output port Start Cal Sweep The dock widget below the diagrams shows the calibrate...

Page 440: ...t of the sweep range The sweep points for the calibration sweep are in ascending order like for an ordinary measurement If Restart Sweep on Std Meas is inactive the new standard measurement is started at the current sweep point the current sweep is continued as a calibration sweep Note This function has a secondary effect in IDLE mode i e while the calibration sweep is NOT running If active only t...

Page 441: ...ns Access CHANNEL CAL Start Cal Start Manual The wizard proceeds through the following steps 1 Ports and Type Allows you to define the system error corrections you want to perform test port sets calibration types 2 Connectors and Cal Kits Allows you to define the connector type and gender of the calibrated ports and to select the appropriate cal kits If necessary you can import a calibration kit 3...

Page 442: ...rection opens the Define Calibration Dialog with the corresponding ports and calibration type pre selected Next Proceeds to Step 2 Connectors and Cal Kits Inactive as long as no calibration is defined Define Calibration Dialog you to select the test ports to be calibrated and the calibration type to be used Background information Refer to Chapter 5 5 1 Calibration Types on page 149 for background ...

Page 443: ...t de activation The way the analyzer fimware activates deactivates ports after a successfull calibration system error correction or power calibration has slightly changed In all FW releases calibrated ports that were previously disabled are automatically enabled as single ended logical ports Starting with FW version 2 10 uncalibrated ports were disabled in the related channel s If only one of the ...

Page 444: ...ed for any set of test ports reflection calibra tions are repeated for each port Straight horizontal arrows example Trans Norm denote one or more transmis sion measurements between each pair of two ports Transmission calibration types require at least two physical ports For unidirectional transmission calibration types Trans Norm One Path Two Ports the Source port must be specified in addition The...

Page 445: ...n the selected ports and calibration types Same logic as in the single calibration version of the wizard see Step 3 Calibration on page 437 The possibility to share measurements between the calibrations and the Reduced Through logic help to keep the number of measurements as small as possible see Chapter 5 5 1 11 Full n Port Calibration with Reduced Number of Through Connec tions on page 159 6 11 ...

Page 446: ...l Power Pmtr n shows the reading of the power meter n in use This trace is only shown during the first calibration sweeps the following sweeps are based on the reference receiver result a m P m shows the source power reading of the analyzer wave quantity ref erence receiver at the calibrated source port P m After a successful power calibration the trace a m P m must be close to the Cal Power Durin...

Page 447: ...ion See Power Cal Dialog Ref Receiver on page 448 and Power Cal Dialog Meas Receiver on page 449 and Power Cal Dialog Source Flatness on page 450 A green checkmark indicates that the calibration data has been acquired successfully Remote command SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection ACQuire SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt ACQuire SOURce Ch POWer CORRection DATA PARameter Wv SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRec...

Page 448: ...lizes the connectivity A power meter must be connected to the calibrated source port Access Power Cal Wizard Ref Receiver Background information Refer to Chapter 5 5 6 1 Source Power Calibration on page 175 Start Cal Sweep Starts the calibration sweeps for the selected port and power calibration settings and closes the dialog The calibration is performed as described in Calibration procedure on pa...

Page 449: ...g guides you through the calibration of a measurement receiver To ensure accurate source signal powers a source power calibration must be performed before the measurement receiver calibration Background information Refer to Chapter 5 5 6 2 Measurement Receiver Calibration on page 177 Access Power Cal Wizard Meas Receiver left source and meas port identical right source and meas port different Port...

Page 450: ...ed port and power calibration settings and close the dialog The calibration is performed as described in Calibration procedure on page 177 No additional calibration settings are needed Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt ACQuire SENSe Ch CORRection POWer DATA SENSe Ch CORRection POWer DATA PORT PhyPt Power Cal Dialog Source Flatness In Source Flatness mode the Power Cal dialog guides yo...

Page 451: ...e Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect ACQuire 6 11 1 8 SMARTerCal Wizard Cal Unit The SMARTerCal Cal Unit wizard guides you through the setup and execution of an automatic SMARTerCal Access CHANNEL CAL Start Cal SMARTerCal Start Cal Unit The guided SMARTerCal is analogous to a regular automatic calibration with an addi tional power calibration sweep at a single analyzer port It consists of the follo...

Page 452: ...Scalar Power Calibration on page 181 When you apply the acquired SMARTerCal the active calibration is replaced and discarded To persist any kind of calibration you can transfer it to the calibration Pool using the Calibration Manager Dialog The system error correction data determined in a calibration procedure is stored in the analyzer You can read these correction data using the remote control co...

Page 453: ...erence R S ZNB ZNBT 453 User Manual 1173 9163 02 53 Figure 6 24 SMARTerCal Cal Unit Step 1 Ports Figure 6 25 SMARTerCal Cal Unit Step 1 Ports 4 Ports Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated Cal Softtool ...

Page 454: ...l units are connec ted one of them must be selected for calibration active cal unit A warning is dis played if the current sweep range of the network analyzer exceeds the characterized frequency range of the calibration unit For background information see Chapter 5 5 5 Automatic Calibration on page 167 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess ALL SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRe...

Page 455: ...onfigured and are available for the scalar source power calibration of a single source port The last configured power meter is selected by default See Configured Devices on page 693 Remote command SENSe CORRection COLLect PMETer ID Power Port Selects the port for the scalar source power calibration Select All Deselect All Selects deselects all ports These buttons are only shown if more than 4 port...

Page 456: ...re 6 27 SMARTerCal Cal Unit Step 2 Connections Related information Refer to Chapter 5 5 5 4 Multiple Port Assignments on page 172 for details on multi ple port assignments Port Assignment manual The Connections step allows you to configure the assignments between VNA ports and calibration unit ports manually Cal Softtool ...

Page 457: ...O ASSignment COUNt Default Port Assignment Restores the default port assignments Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment DEFine DEFault SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment DEFine TPORt DEFault Start Proceeds to Step 3 SMARTerCal If the configured port assignments are invalid this action is disabled Step 3 SMARTerCal In the final step the R S ZNB ZNBT displays a SMARTerCa...

Page 458: ...al 1173 9163 02 53 2 Finally a Replace the calibration unit by the power meter b Start the power calibration sweep The upper part of the screen displays power trace diagrams and the lower part dis plays the power meter connection Cal Softtool ...

Page 459: ...Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO TYPE SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs TYPE SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg ACQuire SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO POWer Detect Ports Start Cal Performs the Detect Port Assignment and Start Cal Sweep functions one after the other Detect Port Assignment Starts a procedure by whi...

Page 460: ...tion of correction data Incompatibilities between the selected calibration type the standards and the channel settings can cause the calibration to be inaccurate The analyzer auto detects potential sources of errors and displays appropriate self explanatory notice boxes Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO TYPE SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs SENS...

Page 461: ...Multiple Cal in Calibration Wizard feature is disabled by default and has to be activated in the Calibration Tab of the System Config dialog Use the Power Cal Wizard to perform an additional source flatness calibration see Chapter 5 5 7 3 Combining SMARTerCal with Scalar Power Calibration on page 181 Refer to Chapter 6 11 1 8 SMARTerCal Wizard Cal Unit on page 451 for fur ther information Step 1 P...

Page 462: ...ort Access SMARTerCal Wizard Cal Unit MultiCal Step 1 Ports Add Mod ify The Multiple Cal in Calibration Wizard MultiCal feature is disabled by default and has to be activated in the Calibration Tab of the System Config dialog For background information on calibration types see Chapter 5 5 1 Calibration Types on page 149 The layout of the main panel depends on the number of test ports available Fig...

Page 463: ...y range of the calibration unit For background information see Chapter 5 5 5 Automatic Calibration on page 167 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess ALL SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess Characterization Displays all characterizations that are stored in the active cal unit The Factory char acterization is available for all calibration units it ensures an accurate calibration...

Page 464: ... are available for the scalar source power calibration of a single source port The last configured power meter is selected by default See Configured Devices on page 693 Remote command SENSe CORRection COLLect PMETer ID Power Port Selects the port for the scalar source power calibration Select All Deselect All Selects deselects all ports These buttons are only shown if more than 4 ports are availab...

Page 465: ... a SMARTerCal screen that guides the user through the calibration data acquisition The logic is identical to that of the single calibration case see Step 3 SMARTerCal on page 457 6 11 1 10 SMARTerCal Wizard Manual The SmarterCal Manual wizard guides you through the setup and execution of a manual SMARTerCal Access CHANNEL CAL Start Cal SMARTerCal Start Manual The wizard proceeds through the follow...

Page 466: ...hannel is already calibrated the wizard attempts to load the calibra tion If the calibration setup is unchanged and sweep data are available the exist ing system error correction can be optimized without repeating the measurement of all standards When you apply the acquired SMARTerCal the active calibration is replaced and discarded To persist any kind of calibration you can transfer it to the cal...

Page 467: ...67 User Manual 1173 9163 02 53 Figure 6 30 SMARTerCal Manual Step 1 Ports and Type The layout of the main panel depends on the number of test ports available Figure 6 31 SMARTerCal Manual Step 1 Ports and Type 4 ports Cal Softtool ...

Page 468: ...it is not used by a measurement i e if it is not required by any trace of the related channel Remote command The port parameters in many calibration commands define ports to be calibrated Type Selects the calibration type to be performed For background information see Chap ter 5 5 7 2 Calibration Types on page 181 SMARTerCal is based on a full n port calibration n 1 Adapter Removal is a 2 port cal...

Page 469: ...d calibration kits is described by ideal kit parameters or typical values One of the selected calibration kits does not contain all standards that are required for the previously selected calibration type Different connector types are defined at the ports but the selected calibration type requires uniform connectors A cal kit standard does not cover the entire calibrated frequency range The select...

Page 470: ...re always adjusted to the current selection User defined connectors can be added or removed in the Cal Connector Types Dialog Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection PhyPt SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SCONnection PhyPt SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection CATalog SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection DELete Cal Kit Selects a cal kit for the connector at each selected...

Page 471: ...ound information see Chapter 5 5 2 4 Cal Kit Files on page 165 Remote command MMEMory LOAD CKIT Back Go back to Step 2 Connectors and Cal Kits Start Start Step 3 SMARTerCal Step 3 SMARTerCal Allows you to acquire error correction data for every required port pair and calibration standard plus power correction data from the power meter The order of the system error correction and power calibration ...

Page 472: ...h their related measurements and visualizes the measurement progress Calibration Sweep Diagrams During the calibration sweep each diagram contains a single S parameter trace and a typical result trace for the measured calibration standard If switch matrices are involved a sweep is performed for every possible signal path and for each of these paths a separate S parameter trace is shown see Chap te...

Page 473: ...bol indicates that the minimum number of calibration measurements for the port has been performed Tip Optional calibration measurements If the selected calibration kit comprises a Sliding Match then for every required Match measurement either the Match or at least three positions of the Sliding Match must be measured See Chapter 5 5 2 3 Sliding Match Standards on page 164 For a PTRL calibration at...

Page 474: ...ration type the standards and the channel settings can cause the calibration to be inaccurate The analyzer auto detects potential sources of errors and displays appropriate self explanatory notice boxes Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected DUMMy SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected DEFault SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect DELete SENSe Ch CORRection DATA PARameter Sfk SENSe Ch C...

Page 475: ...ed ports Delete Deletes the selected SMARTerCal from the list of configured SMARTerCals Modify Edits the selected SMARTerCal opens the Define Calibration Dialog with the corre sponding ports and calibration type pre selected Next Proceeds to Step 2 Connectors and Cal Kits Inactive as long as no calibration is defined Define Calibration Dialog Selects the calibrated analyzer ports the calibration t...

Page 476: ... in a single port p perform a two port SMARTerCal for a port pair including p as Power Port Note Calibration and port de activation The way the analyzer fimware activates deactivates ports after a successfull calibration system error correction or power calibration has slightly changed In all FW releases calibrated ports that were previously disabled are automatically enabled as single ended logic...

Page 477: ...ll other calibration types can be used for any combination of 2 or more ports Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine Power Meter Shows a list of all power meters that have been properly configured and are available for the scalar source power calibration of a single source port The last configured power meter is selected by default See Configured Devices on page 693 Remote comman...

Page 478: ...tions and the Reduced Through logic help to keep the number of measurements as small as possible see Chapter 5 5 1 11 Full n Port Calibration with Reduced Number of Through Connec tions on page 159 6 11 2 Cal Devices Tab Provides access to all functions for calibration kit management and cal unit characteri zation Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 5 5 2 Calibration Sta...

Page 479: ...gether with the associated calibration kit parameters The Calibration Kits Dia log provides buttons to export and import cal kit and connector settings After assigning a calibration kit to a user defined connector type you can still change its name offset model and reference impedance If you switch between sexed and sexless all kits assigned to the connector type are deleted Char Imp The character...

Page 480: ...d from a circuit model see View Modify Cal Kit Standards Dialog on page 485 For TEM type lines the relative permittivity εr is needed for the conversion of a ZVR type Loss in units of dB sqrt GHz into an Agilent type Offset Loss in units of GΩ s and vice versa see View Modify Cal Kit Standards Dialog on page 485 The Electrical Length and Delay values in the View Modify Cal Kit Standards Dialog are...

Page 481: ...ameter Types on page 163 Chapter 6 11 2 1 Cal Connector Types Dialog on page 479 The contents of the Available Cal Kits table vary depending on the selected Connec tor Type The table can also contain kits with ideal or typical parameter values see Cal Kit Parameter Types The Agilent Model is an optional scheme to characterize the offset parameters of the standards see Offset Parameters on page 485...

Page 482: ...e dialog are used to manage calibration kits Add creates a cal kit file for the selected connector type Copy creates a cal kit file based on the contents of an existing cal kit file Delete deletes an imported or user defined cal kit file Standards opens the Kit Standards dialog which shows the contents of the cal kit file For user defined or imported kits you can modify the contents See Kit Standa...

Page 483: ...and MMEMory LOAD CKIT MMEMory STORe CKIT Kit Standards Dialog The Kit Standards dialog shows the calibration standards in a selected calibration kit It is also used to modify the contents of a user defined kit Related information Refer to the following sections Chapter 5 5 2 4 Cal Kit Files on page 165 Chapter 6 11 2 2 Calibration Kits Dialog on page 481 Chapter 5 5 2 1 Calibration Standard Types ...

Page 484: ...dards have the right gender Standards with restricted port assignment are always assumed to have the gender that is appropriate for the calibrated port The port assignment is stored in the cal ibration kit file instead of the gender During the calibration the analyzer checks whether the cal kit contains the necessary standard types for the required ports Remote command SENSe CORRection CKIT Standa...

Page 485: ... Standards Dialog View Modify The diagram in the View Modify Cal Kit Standards dialog depends on the standard type for which the dialog was opened Moreover it is possible to modify the circuit model using the buttons in the upper right of the dialog Offset Parameters The entries in the upper part of the View Modify Cal Kit Standards dialog specify the offset parameters for the transmission lines o...

Page 486: ...ed in series R is the constant resistive contribution It is possible to select Open for Ω so that the inductance coefficients are irrelevant Short for 0 Ω Match for the reference impedance of the current connector type any resistance R The fringing capacitance C and the residual inductance L are both assumed to be frequency dependent and approximated by the first four terms of the Taylor series ar...

Page 487: ...peration Set Password opens a dia log to enter the password and activate password protection at the next time the Set Password dialog is opened Enter an empty string no password to deactivate pass word protection Tip A password also blocks a switchover of the active characterization during calibra tion see Characterization on page 421 Remote command SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT PASSword Char...

Page 488: ...ation Wizard Start Characterization The guided characterization consists of the following steps 1 Characterization Select the characterized ports and cal unit standards to ini tiate the characterization sweeps 2 Save Characterization Data Save the characterization data to the calibration unit Step 1 Characterization Selects the calibration type and the characterized cal unit ports and initiates th...

Page 489: ... PORTs CONNection SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT PORTs Take OSM Take All OSM and Through Take OSM starts a calibration sweep for the related port Take All OSM and Through initiates a series of calibration sweeps the R S ZNB ZNBT acquires a full set of one port and two port data The latter is required for the transmission normaliza tions and for a One Path Two Ports calibration see Dependency b...

Page 490: ...cterized calibration unit does not have an SD card slot the checkbox is hidden If the calibration unit has an SD card slot but the SD card is not accessible the checkbox is grayed out File name Comment Optional Selects a filename to reference the characterization data set in the Characterize Cal Unit and Calibration Unit dialogs and a comment to be written into the characteriza tion file A filenam...

Page 491: ...power calibration proce dure Background information Refer to Chapter 5 5 6 Scalar Power Calibration on page 174 6 11 3 1 Controls on the Pwr Cal Settings Tab Some buttons serve as openers for additional dialogs Cal Power see Chapter 6 11 3 2 Modify Cal Power Dialog on page 493 Transm Coefficients see Chapter 6 11 3 3 Power Meter Transmission Coeffi cients Dialog on page 495 Power Meters see Chapte...

Page 492: ...sured deviation from the desired power For analyzer test ports a convergence factor 1 is appropriate Convergence factors dif ferent from 1 may be indicated for external generator ports which show a nonlinear behavior In general it is recommendable to start the calibration with a convergence factor 1 and choose smaller values 0 8 0 4 in case that the iteration fails Inappro priate convergence facto...

Page 493: ...rget power for the power calibration cal power and defines the target power for the reference receiver calibration These set tings are particularly important for test setups involving external attenuators or amplifi ers Access CHANNEL CAL Pwr Cal Settings Cal Power Related information The settings in the Modify Cal Power dialog are also used to define port specific source powers in arbitrary mode ...

Page 494: ...mote command SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate OFFSet SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt GENerator Gen OFFSet Cal Power Offset Port Cal Power For power calibrations only Specifies a gain positive values or an attenuation nega tive values in the signal path between the source port and the calibrated reference plane With a Cal Power Offset of n dB the target power at the reference plane cal power is equal to...

Page 495: ...Reference Receiver Cal Power is also used for the power calibration step in a SMARTerCal see Chapter 5 5 7 SMARTerCal on page 180 Note Risk of damage due to high power settings If an external device e g an ampli fier is connected between the calibrated test port and the power meter ensure that the Reference Receiver Cal Power does not exceed its maximum input power Remote command SOURce Ch POWer P...

Page 496: ...ansmission characteristics of an additional two port in the calibrated frequency range Access Power Meter Transmission Coefficients Dialog Two Port Config Frequency Transm Coefficients Insert Delete Delete All The required two port information is a list of transmission coefficients at different fre quency values power loss list The buttons in the dialog provide different ways of cre ating and modi...

Page 497: ...fficients Remote command SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection TCOefficient FEED Import File Imports the transmission coefficients from a trace file The imported file must be either in Touchstone s n p or in csv format see also Chapter 5 4 2 Trace Files on page 141 Remote command MMEMory LOAD CORRection TCOefficient Ch Recall Save You can save the displayed power loss list to a power meter correction l...

Page 498: ... in the setup information Setup Info Setup Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection STATe Load Match Correction Load match correction prevents a possible impairment of the transmission S parameter measurements due to the influence of the waves reflected at the receive load ports It is performed as follows The correction is based on the system error corrected a and b waves of the source and load ports An...

Page 499: ...h channel and trace appears in the setup information see Setup Tab on page 684 Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection PCAL Manage Cals Recall Last Cal Set Loads and activates the recall set for which the last calibration was performed If the last calibrated setup is already active nothing is changed The calibrated setups are automatically stored in the C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibr...

Page 500: ...dditional source ports G1 Gm in the port overview A source power calibration is available at each generator port Remote command SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection STATe SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection GENerator Gen STATe SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt STATe SENSe Ch CORRection PCAL 6 11 4 3 Calibration Manager Dialog The Calibration Manager dialog stores user correction data to the cal pool and as...

Page 501: ...ce Apply Apply to All The buttons between the tables are used to modify the calibration pool and apply cali bration data sets cal groups to channels Add copies the correction data of the selected channel to the cal pool generating a new pool member cal group Add All copies the correction data of all channels to the cal pool generating new pool members cal groups Replace overwrites a cal group with...

Page 502: ...set can be modified directly in the corresponding table cell Delete from Pool deletes a cal group file from the pool Note however that calibra tions being used in any of the opened recall sets cannot be deleted Remote command MMEMory DELete CORRection Preset User Cal Selects a cal group from the pool that is activated during a user defined preset A Preset User Cal is particularly useful for scenar...

Page 503: ...r the selected calibration Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection DATE SENSe Ch CORRection DATA PARameter Sfk SENSe Ch CORRection DATA PARameter Sfk PORT PhyPt SENSe Ch CORRection DATA PARameter COUNt SENSe Chn CORRection SSTate 6 12 Channel Config Softtool The Channel Config functions select create and delete channels configure the source and receive ports of the R S ZNB ZNBT and optimize the measure...

Page 504: ...of all channels in a recall set is given by the channels creation time By default the channels are named Ch1 Ch2 so that Ch n 1 precedes Ch n This order is always maintained even if channels are renamed invisible because no traces are assigned to them or distributed over several diagram areas Tip You can also select a line in the channel list to activate the corresponding channel Remote command Th...

Page 505: ...am Creates a channel and a trace with default settings and assigns the created trace to a new diagram area The new channel is named Ch n where n is the largest of all existing channel numbers plus one The name can be changed in the Channel Manager dialog Tip To create a channel and a trace with default settings and to display the trace in the active diagram area use New Channel Copy Channel Diagra...

Page 506: ...k widgets are disabled Related remote commands generate an error When Fixture Simulator is reactivated the situation before the deactivation is restored Note The Offset and One Way Loss settings are not affected by the Fixture Simu lator switch Use the All Compensation Off All Compensation On functions of the Fixture Compensation dialog to de activate these compensations as well see Chap ter 6 13 ...

Page 507: ...CONFigure CHANnel Ch MEASure STATe INITiate Ch CONTinuous Add Delete The buttons below the channel table add and delete channels Add adds a new channel to the list The new channel is named Ch n where n is the largest of all existing channel numbers plus one Delete deletes the channel selected in the table This button is disabled if the setup contains only one channel In manual control each setup m...

Page 508: ...ir steps sizes refer to Chapter 11 3 5 RFFE GPIO Interface on page 1395 RFFE Tab The RFFE tab is divided into two parts The upper part gives access to the RFFE interface settings and allows manual command execution and result display see Basic RFFE Interface Settings and Command Execution on page 510 The lower part allows you to define and apply test voltages and to execute voltage and current mea...

Page 509: ...e area up to column Output Voltage allows you to define and apply the GPIO pin voltages see Basic GPIO Configuration on page 513 The right part allows you to define and execute voltage and current measurements on the GPIO pins see GPIO Voltage and Current Measurements on page 514 The Apply button activates both the Output Voltage and Range Shunt resist ance settings The Meas button starts the volt...

Page 510: ... response if success fully read Seq Enables disables the corresponding RFFE interface in the Sweep Sequencer see Chapter 6 12 1 6 Sweep Sequencer on page 515 Remote command CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus SETTings STATe CLK VIO VLow VHigh These columns give access to the physical properties of the RFFE interfaces clock rate CLK supply voltage VIO and the voltage levels of the data signal SDATA VLow and clock ...

Page 511: ...er mode this section is hidden For details and background information see the MIPI Alliance Specification for RF Front End Control Interface Remote command CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus COMMand DATA SEND Use the SEND button to send the previously defined command e g before starting the sweep for the related channel On a R S ZN B15 Z15 var 03 before the command is executed the related shunt resistance is set...

Page 512: ...pressed Remote command CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST DATA CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST VIO Range Shunt Defines the current range for the voltage and current measurement on the respective RFFE pin The analyzer firmware automatically selects a suitable shunt resistance The Output Voltage and Range Shunt settings do not take effect until Set is pressed Remote command CONTrol Ch ...

Page 513: ...rent Results of the voltage current measurements on the related RFFE pins Remote command CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST DATA VOLTage CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk VOLTage CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST VIO VOLTage CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST DATA CURRent CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk CURRent CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST VIO CURRent 6 12 1 5 GPIO Configuration Access GPIOs Tab of the RFFE Config dialog Basic GPIO Configuration The l...

Page 514: ...current measurements on the GPIO pins The measurement parameters are channel specific However only one configura tion can be measured at a time Voltage and current measurements on the RFFE and GPIO pins are only possible with Var 03 of the extension board R S ZN B15 Z15 part number 1323 9355 03 or 1325 5905 03 The high resistance configuration of GPIO pins 9 and 10 requires FPGA version 6 1 0 or h...

Page 515: ...ply is pressed Remote command CONTrol Ch GPIO Port RANGe CONTrol Ch GPIO Port SHUNt Meas Starts the voltage and current measurement Note that Start Meas does not automatically activate the Voltage and Range Shunt settings of the current channel Use Apply to activate them manually The measurement sampling time can only be set via remote command It is not channel specific and applies to RFFE and GPI...

Page 516: ...e existing sequence or above the selected step respectively 3 Make the appropriate settings in the sweep sequencer table a Define the RFFE commands RFFE columns b Set the GPIO voltages GPIO columns c Specify the delays between subsequent commands switches and before the sweep or segment start Wait column 4 Use Delete to remove the selected item or Delete All to clear or the command switch sequence...

Page 517: ...n define the delay times between subsequent sequence steps and between the final sequence step and the sweep segment start Remote command Unsegmented sweeps CONTrol Ch SEQuence Nr DELay Segmented sweeps CONTrol Ch SEGMent Nr SEQuence Nr DELay 6 12 2 Port Config Tab Configures the source and receive ports of the R S ZNB ZNBT for measurements on frequency converting DUTs defining arbitrary port freq...

Page 518: ...ive recall set The selected stimulus axis is displayed in the channel line Select the axis according to your port configura tion and measurement results Example Port 1 provides the RF input signal for a mixer the IF output signal is measured at Port 2 The port frequency of Port 1 is equal to the channel base frequency fb the port fre quency of Port 2 is set to the IF frequency fb fLO To view the r...

Page 519: ...ettings dialog is an example of a Multi channel Setup Dialog For the selected channel it configures the source and receiver ports of the R S ZNB ZNBT for arbitrary frequencies source and receiver levels Access CHANNEL CHANNEL CONFIG Port Config Port Settings Related information Refer to the following sections Chapter 5 7 4 Frequency Conversion Measurements on page 217 Chapter 6 17 4 2 External Pow...

Page 520: ...ayed with its port number device type Info and Frequency Result according to the current channel base frequency and Freq Conversion set tings Values that cannot be modified are displayed with a gray background frequency results that cannot be measured are displayed with a red background RF Off Turns the RF signal at a source port analyzer test port or generator port on or off The column is disable...

Page 521: ... a generator as a signal source Check Gen in the Port Settings dialog especially if the generator is not assigned to a particular measurement result or drive port Select the generator as a source for a particular measurement result or for a power calibration see e g Chapter 6 2 3 2 More Wave Quantities Dialog on page 265 Note If External Switch Matrices are part of the RF connection configuration ...

Page 522: ...uency Conversion Formula Gen ports driven by the same internal source R S ZNBT only must use the same frequency conversion formula Current Formula Apart from the current Frequency Conversion Formula the analyzer firmware main tains a list of named user defined formulas Add Formula to List adds the current frequency conversion formula to this list Remove Selected Formula removes the selected user d...

Page 523: ...an Offset Ratio of 1 If the RF signal is at the channel base frequency the port frequency is at the frequency of the upper lower side band To measure n th order intermodulation products select integer Base Ratio and Offset Ratio with Base Ratio Offset Ratio n To measure the n th harmonic of the channel base frequency select a Frequency Offset of 0 and an integer Base Ratio n Remote command SOURce ...

Page 524: ...fy the port specific source power as a function of the stimulus frequency The resulting output power at port frequency f is calculated as Power Result Slope f Remote command SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate SLOPe Modify Cal Power Dialog The Modify Cal Power dialog allows you to define port specific source powers which can be necessary to ensure a definite signal power at the inputs of the DUT...

Page 525: ... on page 494 Cal Power Offset on page 494 Receiver Level Tab Provides access to the receiver step attenuator settings Receiver step attenuators are optional hardware see Chapter 5 7 17 Receiver Step Attenuators on page 233 Attenuation Sets the attenuation at the respective measurement receiver b wave See Step Attenuators on page 387 Remote command SENSe Ch POWer ATTenuation Channel Config Softtool...

Page 526: ...log Apply OK Activates or deactivates frequency conversion arbitrary mode depending on the cur rent port configuration If individual port frequencies are selected the arbitrary mode is activated If individual port powers but no individual frequencies are selected the current mode is maintained If all port frequencies are equal to the channel base frequency and all port powers are equal to the chan...

Page 527: ... if option R S ZNB ZNBT K4 is available Furthermore a particular port source or receiver can only be selected if the user defined linear function for calculating the respective frequency power is not constant 6 12 2 3 Define Parallel Measurement Dialog With the R S ZNBT or a 4 port R S ZNB with internal second source you can mea sure multiple DUTs or multiple paths of a single DUT in parallel The ...

Page 528: ...tab on the right Figure 6 41 Define Parallel Measurement R S ZNB For the R S ZNBT the table and controls in the lower left part allow you to define the available DUTs along with their physical ports The visualization in the upper left part shows the ports and connectivity of the selected DUT DUT perspective The DUT Definition tab to the right visualizes the VNA perspective Channel Config Softtool ...

Page 529: ...nition Tab Auto Setting R S ZNBT only The Auto Setting functionality allows you to set up a parallel measurement of multiple identical DUTs quickly It assumes the DUTs are fully connected in an aligned way i e port j 1 Port Count of DUT i 1 Number of DUTs is connected to VNA port i 1 Port Count j The logic of the Auto Setting function requires Number of DUTs Port Count to be less or equal than the...

Page 530: ... if available Decreasing the number of DUT ports deletes the highest numbered physical DUT ports along with their VNA connections if any The firmware automatically dis solves incomplete balanced ports 4 In the Port Order column define the drive port order of the related DUT R S ZNBT only Auto lets the VNA firmware select the default drive port order If desired specify an explicit drive port orderi...

Page 531: ...ity 1 1 For balanced ports the firmware uses the lower of the two physical port numbers 3 To number the logical ports consecutively from bottom to top in the graphical visu alization click Aligned 1 2 3 4 To assign a new number to a particular logical port a Select the VNA port b Specify a new logical port number less or equal than the number of physical VNA ports in the Logical Port field Control...

Page 532: ...e Parallel Measurement dialog allows you to set the reference impedance for balanced and unbalanced DUT ports To change the reference impedance for a particular DUT port proceed as follows 1 Select the related row in the DUT table lower left part of the dialog The DUT perspective upper left part of the dialog now displays the selected DUT 2 Activate the Reference Impedance tab 3 In the DUT perspec...

Page 533: ...h GROup Grp SIMultaneous FOFFset STATe Minimum Offset The Minimum Offset can be specified either as an absolute value Direct Value or as a multiple of the measurement bandwidth Bandwidth Factor Remote command SOURce Ch GROup Grp SIMultaneous FOFFset MOFFset MODE SOURce Ch GROup Grp SIMultaneous FOFFset MOFFset DVALue SOURce Ch GROup Grp SIMultaneous FOFFset MOFFset BWFactor State indication warnin...

Page 534: ...de Image Suppr and AGC Mode Driving Mode Determines the order of partial measurements and sweeps In Auto mode the analyzer optimizes the display update Fast sweeps are per formed in Alternated mode slower sweeps in Chopped mode In Alternated mode a partial measurement is performed at all sweep points par tial sweep before the hardware settings are changed The next partial measure ment is carried o...

Page 535: ...e known spurious signals LO RF means that the LO frequency is always above the measured RF fre quency This mode is appropriate for avoiding single known spurious signals Tip In the presence of several spurious signals setting the Image Suppr parameter globally can be insufficient To improve the result perform a segmented frequency sweep and assign independent LO frequencies to the individual sweep...

Page 536: ...GC The A D converter is always operated at optimum input level selecting one of the following gain settings for every measurement point Low Noise corresponding to a higher internal A D converter input level This set ting increases the dynamic range and is appropriate for low RF input levels Low Dist corresponding to a lower internal A D converter input level This set ting allows for a high RF over...

Page 537: ... enabled in Man ual AGC Mode only Access CHANNEL CHANNEL CONFIG Mode AGC Mode Manual Con fig The manual AGC settings are persisted and reused for subsequent measurement sweeps which can increase measurement speed compared to Auto mode while not compromising measurement quality Without the Extended Power Range option only the AGC of the measurement receivers the b waves can be statically set to Low...

Page 538: ...ode is selected for each drive port Reset and a single shot measurement of the current channel is initiated During this measurement the VNA firmware observes the Low Dist LD vs Low Noise LN gain decisions of the AGC It then determines the statically assigned gain for the individual sweep segments drive ports receivers in the following way if LD was selected for any of the related measurement point...

Page 539: ...uration Background information Refer to Chapter 5 7 4 3 Intermodulation Measurements on page 222 6 12 4 1 Controls on the Intermod Tab The buttons on the Intermod tab open the following dialogs Intermod Wizard See Chapter 6 12 4 2 Intermodulation Presetting Wizard on page 541 Define Intermod See Chapter 6 12 4 3 Define Intermodulation Distortion Measurement Dialog on page 545 Frequencies Powers Se...

Page 540: ...tance The analyzer displays intermodulation products up to a selectable order IM Order around the lower and upper tone frequencies The channel settings differ from the swept intermodulation measurement therefore a new channel is created when the spectrum measurement is activated Add CW Mode The following example shows an intermodulation spectrum with the following settings CW Frequency 2 GHz lower...

Page 541: ...command SENSe Ch FREQuency CW SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation SPECtrum MORDer SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation SPECtrum STATe 6 12 4 2 Intermodulation Presetting Wizard The Intermodulation Presetting wizard guides the user through the setup of an inter modulation measurement Access CHANNEL CHANNEL CONFIG Intermod Intermod Wizard The wizard proceeds in 4 steps 1 Configure intermodulation measurement R...

Page 542: ...ference R S ZNB ZNBT 542 User Manual 1173 9163 02 53 2 Define the frequency or power sweep ranges for the lower tone Refer to Chap ter 6 12 4 4 Frequencies and Power Dialog on page 548 Channel Config Softtool ...

Page 543: ...GUI Reference R S ZNB ZNBT 543 User Manual 1173 9163 02 53 3 Select the measurement results Refer to Chapter 6 2 4 Intermod Tab on page 267 Channel Config Softtool ...

Page 544: ...GUI Reference R S ZNB ZNBT 544 User Manual 1173 9163 02 53 4 Finish the wizard with or without power calibration Refer to Chapter 6 12 4 5 Intermod Pwr Cal Wizard on page 549 Channel Config Softtool ...

Page 545: ...gs The OK button is available when a valid configuration has been defined Access CHANNEL CHANNEL CONFIG Intermod Define Intermod Independent sources for the lower and upper tone requires a R S ZNB ZNBT with two internal sources see Chapter 5 7 8 Internal Second Source on page 227 Alterna tively an external generator can be used see Chapter 5 7 4 3 Intermodulation Mea surements on page 222 Channel ...

Page 546: ...ided by an exter nal generator Note If external switch matrices are part of the RF connection configuration operation with internal second source is not supported In a matrix configuration only external generators can be used as upper tone generator Remote command SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation UTONe Receiving Port Selects the receiving port for the signal from the output of the DUT Remote command...

Page 547: ...additional measurement at a different frequency therefore the measurement time increases with the number of selected orders If a higher order IM is selected its fre quency can exceed the upper or lower frequency limit of the analyzer Use the Fit Fre quency Range button in the Frequencies and Power Dialog to restrict the sweep range accordingly Remote command SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation ORDer Im...

Page 548: ...ep type frequency or power sweep The frequency and power settings for the lower tone are identical with the Stimulus settings see Chapter 6 8 Stimulus Softtool on page 384 Remote command SENSe Ch FREQuency STARt SENSe Ch FREQuency STOP SENSe Ch FREQuency CW SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STARt SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STOP SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude Frequency Range The Frequency Range tab...

Page 549: ...n The necessary calibration steps are automatically performed across the entire fre quency or power range of the intermodulation measurement Access CHANNEL CHANNEL CONFIG Intermod Intermod Pwr Cal Start Cal Sweep Starts the intermodulation power calibration An external combiner and a power meter are required for the calibration setup see Chapter 6 17 4 2 External Power Meters Dialog on page 691 Th...

Page 550: ...ncy is performed Receiver power calibration for the measured intermodulation products The combiner output is connected to the receiving port The receiving port is calibrated at the frequency of the intermodulation products using the signal from the lower tone signal calibrated in the first step If a frequency conversion measurement is active a second receiver power calibra tion is performed at the...

Page 551: ...re Apply After all calibration steps have finished successfully Apply activates the resulting power calibrations and closes the Intermod Pwr Cal wizard 6 12 5 Pwr Cal Settings Tab Replicates the Pwr Cal Settings tab of the Cal softtool see Chapter 6 11 3 Pwr Cal Settings Tab on page 490 6 12 6 Mixer Mode Tab Controls the measurement of the mixing products generated by a mixer under test MUT that i...

Page 552: ...erCal Start Cal Unit see Chapter 6 12 6 4 SMARTerCal Cal Unit Wizard for Mixer Mode on page 559 SMARTerCal Start Manual see Chapter 6 12 6 5 SMARTerCal Man ual Wizard for Mixer Mode on page 561 SMARTerCal Repeat launches the adequate Mixer Meas specific wiz ard to repeat the currently active SMARTerCal if available Reset Freq Conv Reset Freq Conv disables all frequency conversion measurements in t...

Page 553: ...Depending on your selection the required channels and traces are set up automatically the active channel and its first trace will be renamed all other channels and traces in the active recall set will be deleted Table 6 3 Auto created channels and traces Measurement Parameter Channel Name Trace Name Conversion Gain S j i Ch_M Conv RF Reflection S i i Ch_M RF_Refl IF Reflection S j j Ch_M IF_Refl R...

Page 554: ... o frequency conversion Note that LO parameters can only be measured if a VNA port was selected as the respective LO in the previous step This in turn requires a second internal source see Chapter 5 7 8 Internal Second Source on page 227 3 The configuration of the mixer measurement is now prepared and can be applied using the Finish button If changes were made in the previous wizard steps it is hi...

Page 555: ...og It lets you set up one or more channels for mixer measurements Access CHANNEL CHANNEL CONFIG Mixer Mode Mixer Meas Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 5 7 4 2 Scalar Mixer Measurements on page 218 Two Stage Mixer Measurements on page 219 The upper part the Define Mixer Meas dialog shows a diagram with the RF and LO signals the mixing product IF and the current frequen...

Page 556: ...he Frequency tab controls the frequency of the RF and LO signals and the analyzer IF signal frequency The table in the Frequency tab contains the following columns Type specifies how the frequency for each signal is defined One of the mixer input and output signals is at the analyzer s channel base frequency Base Freq the signal is swept if a frequency sweep is active it is at fixed frequency CW f...

Page 557: ...alue The Fixed power settings also appear in the Port Configuration dialog The Start CW power for the IF port sets the IF source power for the reverse sweep This setting is only relevant if Load Match Correction is active Stop shows the stop value of the power sweep range for power sweeps only If a segmented frequency sweep with segment specific powers is active the Base Pwr is no longer editable ...

Page 558: ...measurements at different mixer output frequencies e g to analyze the isolation for IF RF or higher order mixing products use the Define Port Settings dialog see Chapter 6 12 2 2 Port Settings Dialog on page 519 The basic formulas described above are adjusted to the mixer measurement settings If the RF or one of the LO signals is in Auto mode instead of IF the formulas above are automatically conv...

Page 559: ...Unit with the fol lowing differences Always all channels are calibrated The affected test ports are already preselected and labeled according to their role in the mixer measurement The adequate calibration type is already preselected A source flatness calibration can be automatically included as a the final calibration step Background information Refer to Chapter 5 5 7 SMARTerCal on page 180 for b...

Page 560: ...560 User Manual 1173 9163 02 53 If the R S ZNB ZNBT is used as LO and only a 2 port Cal Unit is available Multi ple Port Assignments are required 2 Perform a SMARTerCal Figure 6 43 System Error Correction Channel Config Softtool ...

Page 561: ...h the fol lowing differences Always all channels are calibrated The affected test ports are already preselected and labeled according to their role in the mixer measurement The adequate calibration type is already preselected A source flatness calibration can be automatically included as a the final calibration step Background information Refer to Chapter 5 5 7 SMARTerCal on page 180 for backgroun...

Page 562: ... 46 Scalar Power Calibration 6 13 Offset Embed Softtool The Offset Embed softtool allows you to define a length offset and loss for each test port The offset compensates for the known length and loss of non dispersive and per fectly matched transmission lines between the calibrated reference plane and the Offset Embed Softtool ...

Page 563: ...ab Access CHANNEL OFFSET EMBED 6 13 1 1 Overview Panel Shows an overview of the overall calculation flow and provides quick access to the Offset Embed functions Access CHANNEL OFFSET EMBED Overview Figure 6 47 Offset Embed dock widget Overview Calculation Flow Use one of the buttons to configure the corresponding function A green LED on a but ton indicates that the corresponding deembedding embedd...

Page 564: ...ctive Port i e adds removes them to from the calculation flow without changing the parameter values Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet PhyPt COMPensation STATe Reset Offsets The Reset Offsets button resets the length and loss parameters for all ports to their default values Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet PhyPt STATe 6 13 1 3 Single Ended Panel Allows you to activate or deactivate...

Page 565: ...ile s2p No additional parameters are required When loading the touchstone file the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left VNA side even ports right DUT side However it is also possible to Swap Gates instructing the analyzer to reinterpret the loaded S parameters e g S12 S21 Note The loaded S parameters are stored in the active recall set Recall sets contain the full embedding and deembedding d...

Page 566: ...ts are ordered according to their num bers i e in natural order This is particularly significant for large port sets Remote command CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId DEFine CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PSET DEEMbedding ListId DEFine CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding DELete CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId DEFine CALCulate Ch TRANs...

Page 567: ...ded file is stored in the active recall set Persisted recall sets contain the full de embedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments Remote command MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch PPAir DEEMbedding ListId MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch PPAir EMBedding ListId 6 13 1 5 Balanced Panel This panel allows you to activate or deactivate deembedding embedding of balanced ports Access Overview Pan...

Page 568: ... file When loading a touchstone file the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left VNA side even ports right DUT side However it is also possible to instruct the analyzer to assume an Increasing Port Sequence i e that the low port numbers are on the VNA side Furthermore it is possible to Swap Gates i e to instruct the analyzer to swap the VNA and DUT side Note The loaded S parameters are stored i...

Page 569: ...emoves it to from the calculation flow without changing its parameters Remote command CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding group STATe CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding group STATe File Name 1 The ellipsis button in the File Name 1 column is enabled if a 1 port data Network net work s1p file is selected Note The loaded S parameter trace is stored in the active recall s...

Page 570: ...required touchstone file can also be selected from here If necessary use the button on the right hand side to open the Balanced Ports Dialog and change the balanced port configuration This panel can also be activated by selecting the Differential Match Tab softtool tab Refer to its description of this softtool tab for background information parameters and additional remote commands Active The chec...

Page 571: ...they can be trans ferred to other instruments Remote command MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt 6 13 2 Offset Tab Defines length offset parameters for each port Use the complementary dock widget to activate or deactivate length loss compensation for selected ports see Chapter 6 13 1 2 Offset Panel on page 563 The marker function Zero Delay at Marker function overwrites the offs...

Page 572: ...elay Electrical Length Mech Length Defines the length offset at the selected port as a delay an electrical length or a mechanical length The three quantities are related by r mech r mech L Length Electrical c L Delay and overwrite each other See also Chapter 5 6 1 1 Definition of Offset Parameters on page 183 Note The entered parameters must correspond the actual one way length of the transmission...

Page 573: ...djust Time Gate Activates the operating mode where the time gate is moved in the opposite direction when the Delay setting or any other length offset parameter is changed The button is available if a time gate is active see Time Gate on page 317 In time domain a positive delay shifts the time gate to the left a negative delay shifts it to the right left no delay right delay 1 ns The position of th...

Page 574: ...phase format the Auto Length corrected trace shows the devia tion from linear phase Note that in order to calculate the electrical length offset of port i you have to select a trace that uses port i as one of its receive ports It is not relevant for the Auto Length function which Port is selected If the measured quantity is a ratio or if it is derived from a ratio its receiving port is given as th...

Page 575: ...shall be acquired Auto Length Auto Length and Loss Auto Length or Auto Length and Loss implies that a global electrical length offset and loss is determined in analogy to the general offset compensation see Chap ter 5 6 1 3 Auto Length on page 184 and Chapter 5 6 1 4 Auto Length and Loss on page 186 Remote command SENSe CORRection COLLect FIXTure LMParameter LOSS STATe Direct Compensation With Dir...

Page 576: ...and loss compensation for selected ports Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet PhyPt COMPensation STATe Measurement Type The Open Short and Open and Short buttons bring up the Measure Fixture wiz ard dialog that guides you through the actual fixture measurement See Open Short vs Open and Short compensation on page 188 Measure Fixture wizard The Measure Fixture dialog guides you through the pre...

Page 577: ...ip Remote control provides additional flexibility You can Measure the same ports repeatedly without changing the standards and attribute the results to different channels Calculate the compensation data for different ports using mixed Open and Short standards Refer to the program example for SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure ACQuire Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure STARt SENSe ...

Page 578: ...h CORRection commands identifies the physical port Loss at DC Loss at Freq Freq for Loss Defines the one way loss parameters for the transmission line at the selected port The loss can be modeled as the sum of a constant and a frequency dependent part The total loss is approximated by an expression of the following form DC ref DC ref Loss f f Loss f Loss f Loss This means that all three loss param...

Page 579: ...is derived from a ratio its receiving port is given as the index of the wave quantity in the numerator If the active trace shows an S parameter Sij then Auto Length adds a length offset at port i If the receive port is balanced then the same offset and length is applied to both its physical ports Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt AUTO 6 13 4 Single Ended Tab Allows you to specify 2 por...

Page 580: ...dding network definition Port Physical port The transformation networks are defined such that the analyzer is con nected to the left of the circuit while the DUT is connected to the right side You can define independent transformation networks for all ports Remote command The PhyPt numeric suffix in the embedding deembedding commands identifies the physical port see e g CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNET...

Page 581: ...s SENDed EMBedding PhyPt STATe CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt TNDefinition CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters C Cmp CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters G Cmp CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters L Cmp CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters R Cmp Select F...

Page 582: ...erwise it opens the Fixture Modeling Dialog that guides you through the fixture modeling Use the Info button to get additional information about the selected tool For back ground information see Chapter 5 6 2 9 Fixture Modeling and Deembedding on page 198 6 13 5 Fixture Modeling Dialog Allows you to model a test fixture using the selected fixture modeling tool and to deem bed selected ports using ...

Page 583: ...ure DUT Test Fix ture on page 586 3 Run the selected third party tool to calculate the Touchstone files modeling the test fixture see Chapter 6 13 5 4 Save Fixture Model on page 587 The calculated sNp file s can then be used to deembed the DUT at selected port s All files generated by actions in this dialog are stored in the directory C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Embedding The curren...

Page 584: ...re Coupon Measure DUT Test Fixture and Save Fixture Model sections common for all tools the advanced settings of the selected tool tool specific Remote command n a Apply This button is only active if the selected deembedding tool has been successfully run see Chapter 6 13 5 4 Save Fixture Model on page 587 Applies the calculated deembedding files _left_DUT sNp and _right_DUT sNp to the ports marke...

Page 585: ...ne file is written to C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Embedding For Coupon Type 1x Open 1x Short ISD only the measurement proceeds in two steps one for the 1x Open and one for the 1x Short coupon The label of the Mea sure button changes accordingly Remote command CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt COUPon MEASure CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt COUPon MEASure OPEN CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt COUPon ME...

Page 586: ... 1 Balanced 2 or 4 Tip use a 4 port 2x thru when strong FEXT far end crosstalk is present 2 Remote command CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt COUPon STATe CALCulate FMODel SFD Ph_pt COUPon STATe 6 13 5 3 Measure DUT Test Fixture The Measure DUT Test Fixture section allows you to measure the whole structure i e the DUT with the test fixture Measure Starts the measurement of DUT Test Fixture at the Active p...

Page 587: ...UT Figure 6 55 Save Fixture Model section left single ended right balanced Run Fixture Modeling Tool Runs the selected fixure deembedding tool This button is only active if both the test coupon measurement finished successfully or the test coupon data were successfully loaded from file see Chapter 6 13 5 2 Measure Coupon on page 584 the measurement of DUT test fixture finished successfully see Cha...

Page 588: ...kboxes to indicate the ports physical for single ended deembedding logical for balanced deembedding to which the deembedding files generated by Run Fixture Modeling Tool shall be assigned when the dialog is closed using Apply Note For a left deembedding file the original port order is used for a right de embedding files the swap gates ports function is used Remote command CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_p...

Page 589: ...the fixture and 2x Thru have the same impedance at every location Remote command CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt ATTenuation BEHavior on page 795 Lead Ins Defines how the ISD tool shall interpret the lead in data Scaling for Lead In Atten Lead Ins Scales the test coupon s attenuation Default is 1 Remote command CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt SCALe ATTenuation on page 802 Scaling for Flt Tm Lead Ins Overrid...

Page 590: ... DUT Fixture ports 1 to N on left ports 1 to N are on the left and ports N 1 to 2 N are on the right Odd on left default 1 3 5 etc are on the left and ports 2 4 6 etc are on the right All on left all ports are on the left Note Ports on the left right are assumed to be coupled if Trace Coupling isn t set to None A port on the left side is not considered to be coupled to a port on the right side Rem...

Page 591: ...nd single ended insertion losses Weak coupling is extracted even if there are 2 ports enabled on the test coupon Strong default if the test coupon is a 4 port file and there are two ports to be extracted the ISD tool optimizes odd and even mode insertion losses The ISD tool automatically reverts to Weak if these conditions are not met Remote command CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt TRACe COUPling Operat...

Page 592: ...specify advanced parameters for the SFD tool 2x Thru Port Ordering Tells the SFD tool about the port ordering of the 2x Thru test coupon Ports 1 3 on Left default odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right Ports 1 2 on Left ports 1 to N are on the left and ports N 1 to 2 N are on the right Remote command CALCulate FMODel SFD Ph_pt DIFFcfg Total Port Ordering Tells the SFD tool about...

Page 593: ... dock widget to create the required port sets and to activate or deactivate dembedding embedding for selected port sets see Chapter 6 13 1 4 Port Sets Panel on page 565 Background information Refer to Chapter 5 6 2 5 Port Pair De Embedding on page 194 and Chap ter 5 6 2 6 Port Set De Embedding on page 195 If the Fixture Simulator is disabled for the related channel see Fixture Simulator on page 50...

Page 594: ...bedding embedding network has to be defined via an s 2m p Touchstone file The symbol selects no network and disables de embedding for the selected port set The D1 and D2 networks are defined by imported S parameter data see D1 D2 For 4 port networks that are partly defined by lumped elements the lumped element parameters are displayed below the graphical network list See Chapter 5 6 2 4 Cir cuit M...

Page 595: ...rmore it is possible to Swap Gates i e to instruct the analyzer to swap the VNA and DUT side Note The loaded file is stored in the active recall set Persisted recall sets contain the full de embedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments Remote command MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch PPAir DEEMbedding ListId MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch PPAir EMBedding ListId 6 13 7 Balanced Tab Select...

Page 596: ... definition Logical Port Logical analyzer port as defined in the Balanced Ports configuration The transfor mation networks are defined such that the physical analyzer test ports are connected to the left of the circuit the DUT ports are on the right side You can define independent transformation networks for all balanced ports Remote command The LogPt numeric suffix in the embedding deembedding co...

Page 597: ...Tworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters C Cmp CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters L Cmp CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters R Cmp CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters G Cmp CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt TNDefinition CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBed...

Page 598: ... about the selected tool For background information see Chapter 5 6 2 9 Fixture Modeling and Deembed ding on page 198 Note Define at least two Balanced Panel before running the modeling tool 6 13 8 Ground Loop Tab Allows you to specify a 1 port ground loop deembedding embedding network Such a network is either defined via its S parameter stored in a one port Touchstone file s1p or by selecting a p...

Page 599: ...ing The 1 Port Data network is defined by imported S parameter data see Select File The remaining networks Shunt L and Shunt C are defined by lumped elements whose parameters are displayed below the graphical list Tip Drag and drop the network symbols in horizontal or vertical direction to switch to the next symbol Use the Conductance in Embedding Networks switch to change from resistances in Capa...

Page 600: ...ransferred to other instruments Remote command MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch GLOop DEEMbedding group MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch GLOop EMBedding group Set to Ideal Ground This function is enabled as long as the 1 Port Data network is active An imported S parameter set is replaced by the S parameters of an ideal through connection which eliminates the transformation network Ground Loop per Port Group If ...

Page 601: ...nactive i e all controls except the Overview button are grayed out Overview See Overview on page 572 Type Currently only Differential Match Embedding is supported Logical Port Logical analyzer port as defined in the Balanced Ports configuration The transfor mation networks are defined such that the physical analyzer test ports are connected to the left of the circuit the DUT ports are on the right...

Page 602: ... EMBedding LogPt PARameters R Cmp CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt PARameters C Cmp CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt PARameters G Cmp Select File Select File is enabled as long as the 2 Port Data network is selected This net work is defined by its S parameters stored in a two port Touchstone file s2p No additional parameters are required No...

Page 603: ...53 Top Default offset calculation Bottom Offset calculation after de embedding GUI mockup Remote command SENSe CORRection EDELay VNETwork 6 14 File Softtool The File softtool allows you to work with recall sets and trace data Access SYSTEM FILE File Softtool ...

Page 604: ... trace and display settings It can be stored to a VNA recall set file znx znxml For background information see Chapter 5 1 2 Recall Sets on page 81 6 14 1 1 Basic Recall Set Functions To create a recall set based on the current analyzer configuration select Save To open an existing recall set select Open Recall To create an additional setup select New File Softtool ...

Page 605: ...use Open Recall To rename a setup use Save Remote command MEMory DEFine Open Recall Loads a recall set from a file znx znxml Opens the Open Dialog with suitable file filters Check the 32 Bit File Mode option on the right hand side of this dialog if you want to open a znx file that was saved by a 32 bit firmware If the current setup includes External Switch Matrices and the recall set to be loaded ...

Page 606: ...g is displayed This may happen for example if you attempt to load a recall set of a different R S ZNB ZNBT model or with different optioning Remote command MMEMory LOAD STATe Save Saves the active recall set to a file znx znxml Displays the Save Dialog that allows you to specify a file name and location for the recall set file Remote command MMEMory STORe STATe Recent Files The buttons are labeled...

Page 607: ...ion comprises the physical RF connections of the related switch matrices For each Matrix in Recall Set select the corresponding row and select View Matrix RF Connec tions to view the respective matrix RF connections Make sure that the Assigned Matrix is connected accordingly Background information Refer to Chapter 5 7 22 External Switch Matrices on page 241 View Matrix RF Connections This dialog p...

Page 608: ...re position in the favorites list If the list is complete i e if there are no more spare positions new favorites can only be added after existing ones were removed Add Active Recall Set Adds the active recall set to the list of favorites This button is only active if the current setup was loaded from or saved to a recall set Import Opens a file browser that allows you to add an arbitrary recall se...

Page 609: ...s to define the content printer and page settings see Chap ter 6 14 4 Printer Setup Dialog on page 609 To File Opens the Save Image dialog that allows you to select an output format and to save the diagram content to a file See also Save Dialog on page 105 Note that only the first page of the Print result is saved Remote command HCOPy DESTination To Clipboard Copies the diagram content to the clip...

Page 610: ...the following options are offered No Diagram at all Active Diagram only All diagrams on one page All diagrams on their own page and Hard copy of the diagram The latter is the new print option which preserves colors and layout If selected in the Print other information group the content of the Info Table see Info Table Show Position on page 663 and or Setup Info see Setup Tab on page 684 is printed...

Page 611: ...Remote command HCOPy PAGE COLor 6 14 4 3 Page Setup Tab The Page Setup settings are visualized in the preview page in the lower part of the dialog Tip The printer settings are not affected by a preset of the R S ZNB ZNBT Use the Remote tab in the System Config Dialog to restore default settings 6 14 5 Trace Data Tab See Chapter 6 5 11 Trace Data Tab on page 336 6 14 6 More Tab The More buttons loa...

Page 612: ...ent to the Windows Close window command and to the close icon in the title bar of the main firmware application window 6 15 Applic Softtool The Applic softtool gives access to applications and tools that extend the functionality of the analyzer firmware Access SYSTEM APPLIC Use the combo box at the top of the softtool to load one of the available applications and to display the softtool tabs relat...

Page 613: ...ternal tools Any new shortcut in the C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna External Tools direc tory replaces one of the buttons Title and Bar Task Bar On Displays or hides the title bar and the task bar across the bottom of the screen Typi cally you can use the task bar to change between the VNA application and other exter nal tools See also Chapter 4 3 2 1 Title Bar on page 52 Screen Keyboa...

Page 614: ...y application is provided by the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R S ZNB ZNBT K20 It is only visible if this option is installed Access SYSTEM APPLIC TDR Background information See Chapter 5 7 2 7 Extended Time Domain Analysis on page 211 6 15 2 1 TDR Setup Tab The TDR Setup tab allows you to set up the measurement for the time domain trans formation which is then used to analyze the time dom...

Page 615: ...Tab on page 416 Stimulus The Stimulus section provides quick access to settings that are also available in the TDR Stimulus Settings Dialog These settings are only available in Automatic Harmonic Grid mode which is activated automatically when opening the TDR Stimulus Settings dialog 6 15 2 2 TDR Stimulus Settings Dialog This dialog allows you to configure the frequency sweep whose results are the...

Page 616: ...ve length parameters are related by r mech r mech L Length Electrical c L Delay i e setting one of them determines the other two Note The length of the DUT determines the appropriate start frequency and step size of the frequency sweep It is important that the user enters a value that is at least as high as the actual one A higher value is acceptable as long as the resulting start fre quency is no...

Page 617: ...HReshold Rise Time The minimum rise time according to the selected Rise Time Definition the user wishes to measure on the DUT This in turn determines the stop frequency of the frequency sweep the smaller the Rise Time the larger the stop frequency limited by the analyzer s maximum fre quency Remote command SENSe Ch HARMonic RTIMe DATA TDR Stimulus Advanced Settings Dialog The TDR Stimulus Advanced...

Page 618: ...Eye Diag tab is for enabling and configuring the eye diagram and its measure ments Access SYSTEM APPLIC TDR Eye Diag Eye Diagram The Eye Diagram checkbox enables the eye diagram with the current settings default or defined in Eye Diagram Dialog or disables it Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE STATe Eye Diagram Opens the Eye Diagram Dialog that allows to create an eye diagram and to perform basic se...

Page 619: ... description of the result values see Eye Diagram Results on page 212 Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE MEASurement STATe CALCulate Chn EYE MEASurement DATA Measurements If the active trace is an eye diagram the Measurements button brings up a dialog which allows to select and configure the eye measurements to be displayed if Display Measurements is enabled The following measurement results can be ...

Page 620: ...active trace is an eye diagram the Export Measurements button opens the Export Eye Measurements ASCII Files dialog that allows to save the Eye Diagram Results to an ASCII file The Export Eye Measurements ASCII Files dialog is a standard Save File dialog with the additional options of selecting a Field Separator semicolon comma tab or space and a Decimal Separator comma or point Note that the decim...

Page 621: ...eam Describes the bit stream generated by the virtual generator Bit Stream can either be a pseudo random binary sequence PRBS of the selected Length or a user defined bit stream The PRBSs are generated using a linear feedback shift register with generator polyno mials allowing the maximal run length of the sequence Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE INPut BPATtern TYPE Length Length of the bit strea...

Page 622: ... Symbol Rate The Symbol Rate baud rate defines the number of symbol changes per unit time or equivalently the symbol period 1 Symbol Rate To convert symbol rate to data rate multiply the symbol rate with the number of bits per symbol 2 bits per symbol for NRZ 4 bits per symbol for PAM 16 Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE INPut DRATe Modulation Defines the modulation of the generated bit stream NRZ ...

Page 623: ...80 of the signal amplitude Note that the measured rise time after the DUT will also be affected by the rise time of the DUT so this measured rise time may not be equal to the setting made in this dia log Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE INPut RTIMe DATA CALCulate Chn EYE INPut RTIMe THReshold Define Colors Opens a dialog that allows to change the color gradient of the eye diagram as a heat map Tra...

Page 624: ...to configure its DC properties Equalization allows you to perform signal equalization at the virtual receiver A green LED indicates that the respective building block is active However the calcula tion chain can also be shortened using the Slider control below the building blocks Slider Allows you to shorten the simulation calculation chain without deactivating the building blocks at the tail end ...

Page 625: ... stream Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE STIMulus ENCoder Scrambler Enables disables scrambling of the encoded bit stream The scrambler is a linear feedback shift register LFSR implementing the polynomial G X X 16 X 5 X 4 X 3 1 Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE STIMulus SCRambler Emphasis The Emphasis dialog allows you to introduce a pre emphasis filter to the digital signal simulated for the eye d...

Page 626: ...nce up to four taps can be used the bit pattern for defining all cursor values must use four consecutive bit values Here a repeating bit pattern 0 1 1 1 1 0 is used By definition the voltage levels for encoding the bits are symmetrical using V for the ones and V for the zeros In the graphic below the blue and the red trace indicate the signals used for differential encoding on a symmetric line Va ...

Page 627: ...nables disables pre emphasis Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE EMPHasis STATe Cursor Settings Sets the weights of the filter taps in the pre emphasis FIR filter Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE EMPHasis CURSor PRE CALCulate Chn EYE EMPHasis CURSor POST 1 2 Jitter The Define Eye Jitter dialog allows you to add jitter to the digital signal simulated for the eye diagram measurement Access Jitter butto...

Page 628: ...rces At this point each of the individual jitter sources can be activated Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer STATe Random Random jitter is determined from a normal Gaussian random distribution whose mean is zero and whose Std Deviation in seconds is specified by the user Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer TYPE RANDom CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer RANDom STDDeviation Periodic This type of jitt...

Page 629: ...le must consist of floating point values in parsable format separated by any whitespace and or line end ings Each value describes the jitter for a symbol transition even when the current and the previous symbols are the same The jitter value is implicitly given in the unit s and denotes the delta between the time of the ideally expected transition given by the data rate and the actual one Positive...

Page 630: ... dialog allows you to switch between different transmission and reflection paths of the DUT and to configure its DC properties In addition it allows you to switch between the real DUT with measured frequency response and an ideal one with flat frequency response which can be useful when configuring the other eye diagram blocks see Chapter 6 15 2 5 Advanced Settings Dialog on page 624 Access DUT bu...

Page 631: ...ye diagram measurement Access Equalize button in the Advanced Settings Dialog This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R S ZNB ZNBT K20 only Similar to the usage of emphasis the equalization targets to improve the signal quality at the receiver end of the transmission system The building block Equalize simulates a continuous time linear equalizer CTLE which is typically r...

Page 632: ...s represented as an eye diagram the Eye Mask Test tab allows you to set up an eye mask for it to enable testing against this mask and to export the test results Access SYSTEM APPLIC TDR Eye Mask Test For a Modulation type other than NRZ display of eye mask and eye mask test is not available i e the buttons in the Eye Mask Test tab are grayed out Define Mask Opens the Define Mask Configuration Dial...

Page 633: ...aker To hear these sounds connect a USB audio device to the R S ZNBT or operate it via remote desktop Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE MASK FAIL BEEP Export Test Results Opens a dialog that allows the user to save the mask test results to an ASCII file Remote command MMEMory STORe EYE MASK RESults Global Check TTL1 Pass TTL2 Pass see Chapter 6 6 1 Limit Test Tab on page 344 6 15 2 7 Define Mask Co...

Page 634: ...t these mask areas can be selectively enabled Polygon Setup Allows you to define the center polygon and to activate it in the mask test The center polygon can either be an octagon a hexagon or a rectangle Shape combo box The sizes of the polygon can be set using the main minor widths and heights as shown in the corresponding visualization Figure 6 61 Center polygon setup octagon Applic Softtool ...

Page 635: ... Center and also their vertical off sets are specified relative to this point Remote command CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe TOP STATe CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe TOP HORizontal CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe TOP VERTical CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe BOTTom STATe CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe BOTTom HORizontal CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe BOTTom VERTical Mask Center Defines the center point of the eye ...

Page 636: ... is shown below Mask Top Active true Width Top 9e 009 Offset Top 6 Mask Bottom Active true Width Bottom 9e 009 Offset Bottom 6 Mask Polygon Active true Shape Octagon Main Width 9e 009 Minor Width 8e 009 Main Height 9 Minor Height 8 MASK CENTER Horizontal 0 Vertical 0 TEST SETTING Fail Condition Samples Percent Violation Tolerance 1 Violation Percent 10 Remote command MMEMory LOAD EYE MASK MMEMory ...

Page 637: ... stimulus grid to be harmonic If the rise time measurement cannot be enabled a message is displayed Instead of performing the required configuration changes manually you may also use the Auto Setup button of the info field to let the firmware do this for you Remote command CALCulate Chn TTIMe STATe Start Value Stop Value Defines the lower upper percentage for the rise time measurement Remote comma...

Page 638: ...ow Pass Step time domain transformation Type is used which requires the stimulus grid to be harmonic If these conditions are not met a message is displayed Instead of performing the required configuration changes manually you may also use the Auto Setup button of the corresponding info field to let the firmware do this for you Remote command CALCulate Chn DTIMe STATe Reference Trace Selects the re...

Page 639: ... Check On Enables the skew check with the specified Skew Limit Remote command CALCulate Chn DTIMe LIMit STATe Skew Limit Defines the limit value for the skew check The unit depends on the current format of the X axis see Time Distance on page 389 Remote command CALCulate Chn DTIMe LIMit LIMit Skew Fail Beep This checkbox determines whether the R S ZNB ZNBT should make an audible beep on skew limit...

Page 640: ...define the y axis scaling of the active diagram The scal ing logic is the same as for all other diagram types see Chapter 6 4 Scale Softtool on page 290 Access SYSTEM APPLIC TDR Y Axis This tab is only visible if the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R S ZNB ZNBT K20 is available 6 15 2 12 X Axis Tab The X Axis tab allows you to define the x axis scaling of the active diagram The scal ing logic...

Page 641: ...ings allow you to adjust the center span or start stop no matter if the X axis rep resents Time or Distance see Time Distance on page 389 6 15 3 DUT Centric Application The DUT Centric application provides functions for configuring and managing DUTs and for a DUT centric measurement setup and calibration Access SYSTEM APPLIC DUT Centric 6 15 3 1 DUT Centric Wizard The DUT Centric Wizard guides you...

Page 642: ...irmware 2 Specify the basic properties of your DUT 3 Specify how the DUT is connected to the VNA 4 Select the measurements to be performed At this point the wizard knows how many additional channels are required and how they should be set up per default 5 Adjust the default channel settings to your needs 6 Review the channels to be created and the parameters to be measured Decide about calibration...

Page 643: ...d from DUT Manager to load a previously configured mixer from the DUT manager This will open a dialog that allows you to select the DUT to be loaded Save to DUT Manager Use Save to DUT Manager to persist new modified mixer settings to the DUT man ager when you proceed to the next step of the DUT Centric Wizard If a DUT with the same name exists you are asked whether you want to overwrite the exist...

Page 644: ...ZNBT 644 User Manual 1173 9163 02 53 DUT VNA Connections The DUT VNA Connections page of the DUT Sentric Wizard allows you to configure the RF connections between VNA and DUT Figure 6 66 Mixer VNA connections Applic Softtool ...

Page 645: ...independent sources on the VNA and connected external generators Measurement Selection The Measurement Selection page of the DUT Centric Wizard allows you to select the mixer properties to be measured Channel Settings The Channel Settings page allows you to change the measurement channel configu ration proposed by the DUT Centric Wizard based on the properties of the DUT the RF topology and the se...

Page 646: ...rameter measurements one channel for intermodulation measurements Summary The Summary page of the DUT Sentric Wizard summarizes which channels will be created and which parameters they will mea sure allows you where to define these channels new setup append to current setup replace current setup allows you to decide whether to proceed with a suitable calibration Applic Softtool ...

Page 647: ...els then on closing the DUT Centric Wizard the FW will create the channels and proceed with suitable calibrations Guided Amplifier Setup Define DUT The Define DUT step allows you to specify basic properties of an amplifier or load them from the DUT Manager Similar to the Amplifier Configuration Dialog of the DUT Manager Applic Softtool ...

Page 648: ...ager Use Save to DUT Manager to persist new modified mixer settings to the DUT man ager when you proceed to the next step of the DUT Centric Wizard If a DUT with the same name exists you are asked whether you want to overwrite the existing DUT con figuration or to create a DUT with a different name DUT VNA Connections The DUT VNA Connections page of the DUT Sentric Wizard allows you to configure t...

Page 649: ...tions are actually possible depends on the number of ports on the ana lyzer and connected switch matrices and the number of independent sources on the VNA and connected external generators Measurement Selection The Measurement Selection page of the DUT Centric Wizard allows you to select the amplifier properties to be measured Applic Softtool ...

Page 650: ...3 9163 02 53 Channel Settings The Channel Settings page allows you to change the measurement channel configu ration proposed by the DUT Centric Wizard based on the properties of the DUT the RF topology and the selected measurements Applic Softtool ...

Page 651: ...annels new setup append to current setup replace current setup allows you to decide whether to proceed with a suitable calibration Calibrate Newly Created Channels If you select Calibrate Newly Created Channels then on closing the DUT Centric Wizard the FW will create the channels and proceed with suitable calibrations Guided Calibration Wizard The Guided Calibration wizard lets you calibrate a se...

Page 652: ...ts of a set of stan dard calibration wizards for system error correction and power calibration During the calibration phase a progress bar below the active calibration wizard s dock widget indicates the overall progress of the guided calibration After all required calibration steps were performed the Guided Calibration wizards asks you to connect your DUT to the VNA as you have specified in the DU...

Page 653: ... DUT Type Use this filter to focus on DUTs of a particular type With a particular DUT type selected the table area only shows DUTs of this type and the Add button creates DUTs of this type without further inquiry If the DUT Manager is opened from the DUT Centric Wizard the filter is set to the DUT type that is being configured Edit This button is only active if exactly one row is selected in the t...

Page 654: ...utton is only active if exactly one row is selected in the table area It allows you to copy the selected DUT Delete This button is only active if at least one row is selected in the table area It allows you to delete the selected DUTs Export DUTs Import DUTs Export DUTs allows you to save the currently configured DUTs to a file Import DUTs allows you to import a set of user defined DUTs either in ...

Page 655: ...guration dialog allows you to set up the fundamental properties of a mixer Access DUT Manager Dialog Edit with a DUT of type Mixer selected The DUT type Mixer is only availble if the instrument is equipped with software optionR S ZNB ZNBT K4 See Chapter 5 7 4 Frequency Conversion Measure ments on page 217 Most of the mixer properties are straight forward Applic Softtool ...

Page 656: ...agrams Access SYSTEM DISPLAY Related information Refer to the following sections Chapter 5 1 3 Traces Channels and Diagrams on page 81 Chapter 5 2 1 Display Elements of a Diagram on page 92 Chapter 4 3 4 Handling Diagrams Traces and Markers on page 58 6 16 1 Diagram Tab Selects a diagram as the active diagram defines a title deletes or adds diagrams and arranges them on the screen Many of the func...

Page 657: ...the diagram to activate the diagram including the last active trace in the diagram tap on a trace list to activate the trace including the corresponding diagram Some of the functions of the Traces Tab activate a particular trace including the corresponding diagram Remote command DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr CATalog Add Tr Diag Creates a diagram and a trace which is displayed in the new diagram T...

Page 658: ... use the functions in the Split Tab Remote command DISPlay WINDow Wnd MAXimize Title Defines a title for the Active Diagram The visibility of the title area can be toggled using Show Title Remote command DISPlay WINDow Wnd TITLe DATA Via remote control it is also possible to define a diagram name and to retrieve the lists of diagrams together with their names DISPlay WINDow Wnd NAME DISPlay WINDow...

Page 659: ...r Traces Remote command No command display configuration only Split All Creates a separate diagram for each trace in the active recall set and automatically arranges those diagrams in the diagram area Existing diagrams are deleted during this process Tip To vary the size and position of the diagram areas drag and drop the separating frames or use the functions in the Split tab Remote command No co...

Page 660: ...e traces among the diagrams Traces with different format and channel settings e g Cartesian and complex diagrams are separated if possible Example of four traces in Quad Split display If less than two three four traces are available the new diagrams are created with a default trace Dual triple quad split corresponds to Split Type Tile Horizontal with 2 3 4 diagrams Tip To vary the size and positio...

Page 661: ...a default trace Tip To vary the size and position of the diagrams drag and drop the separating frames or use the functions in the Diagram tab Remote command DISPlay LAYout Diagrams Rows Columns Selects the number of Diagrams or Rows and Columns to which the traces in the active recall set are split The split is performed according to the selected Split Type If the entered number of Diagrams exceed...

Page 662: ... are optimized for the analyzer screen and for color hardcopies respectively Dark Background sets a black background color The traces and information ele ments in the diagram areas are displayed in different colors This setting is usually suitable for observing results on the analyzer screen Light Background sets a light background color The traces and information ele ments in the diagram areas ar...

Page 663: ...you check Hide Sensitive Information for a particular recall set to mask the stimulus values you are asked to set a password If this password is non empty it is requested the next time someone tries to uncheck Hide Sensitive Information to unmask all stimulus values for this recall set Both checked state and password are stored in and loaded from the active recall set Remote command DISPlay ANNota...

Page 664: ...te command DISPlay IWINdow STATe Font Size Scales the fonts in the diagrams The scaling affects the trace and channel lists and the info fields Remote command DISPlay RFSize 6 16 3 2 Define User Color Scheme Dialog The Define User Color Scheme dialog modifies the predefined color schemes changing the colors and styles of the individual display elements User defined color schemes can be saved to a ...

Page 665: ...es Configures the selected screen element Color opens a standard color dialog where you can assign a color to the selected element Trace Line Style and Trace Line Width are enabled if the selected element is a trace Remote command DISPlay CMAP DispEl RGB DISPlay CMAP TRACe RGB Limit Test Show Limit Fail Symbols Displays or hides the colored squares on the trace indicating failed measurement points...

Page 666: ...gram or moved to another diagram If Trace Colors per Diagram is enabled factory preset all diagrams use the same trace colors The first trace in each diagram gets trace color 1 the second trace color 2 etc cyclically In particular if a trace is removed from a diagram then all traces in this diagram that were created after the removed one will change their color And if this trace is moved to anothe...

Page 667: ...ry STORe CMAP MMEMory LOAD CMAP 6 16 3 3 Info Window The Info Window displays a configurable set of marker properties and Bandfilter Search results It automatically resizes the displayed text to fit the window height and width Access SYSTEM DISPLAY Config Info Window checkbox Use the Configuration button to open the Info Window Configuration Dialog and select the information items to be displayed ...

Page 668: ...n page 663 Content Selection The lower part of the Info Window Configuration dialog allows you to pick the con tents of the selected info field you want to display in the Info Window For marker info fields use the Add and Remove buttons to show hide the selected marker in the Info Window Figure 6 70 Content selection marker info fields For Bandfilter Search info fields simply pick the results to b...

Page 669: ...ote command SYSTem DISPlay BAR STATus STATe Hard Key Panel Toggles the visibility of the Hard Key Panel For background information see Chapter 4 3 2 6 Hardkey Panel on page 56 The Hard Key Panel can also be closed via the X button in its top right corner Remote command SYSTem DISPlay BAR HKEY STATe Title Bar Task Bar Toggles the visibility of the title bar of the VNA application window and the Win...

Page 670: ...s tab is not available on a R S ZNBT Enabled Lock Diagrams Lock Screen Enabled touchscreen control of the R S ZNB ZNBT fully enabled All control elements are active Lock diagrams drag and drop functions in the diagrams are disabled all other control elements e g the softtool panels are still active Lock screen all control elements are locked Pressing any front panel key on the analyzer or sending ...

Page 671: ...ice Function Dialog Language Selects the language of the graphical user interface A message box indicates that the vector network analyzer application needs to be restarted to activate a different lan guage English is the preinstalled language A setup file for additional languages Vector Net work Analyzer Translation Setup is available for download from the Rohde Schwarz Internet site see https ww...

Page 672: ...default UTF 8 Shift JIS Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate CODec 6 17 1 2 System Config Dialog The System Config dialog allows you to define global settings that are not affected by an instrument reset See Chapter 5 1 1 Global Persistent Settings on page 80 Access SYSTEM SETUP Setup System Config Presets Tab 672 Calibration Tab 674 User Interface Tab 676 Messages Tab 678 Channel Bits Tab 679 Advanc...

Page 673: ...e STATe Global Settings The two buttons reset all directory settings e g the directories for storing trace data limit lines calibration data and all settings in the Printer Setup dialog to default val ues See Chapter 6 14 4 Printer Setup Dialog on page 609 Remote command n a Preset Configuration Specifies whether the preset action performs a factory preset or restores a user preset file A user pre...

Page 674: ...evious shutdown Remote command SYSTem PRESet STARt Calibration Tab Provides general system error correction calibration settings Auto Power Reduction for Cal Unit Sets the source power at all test ports to 10 dBm while an automatic calibration is active Applying this source power to the ports of the calibration unit ensures best accuracy of the automatic calibration The source powers are reset to ...

Page 675: ...tion see Start Cal Sweep on page 439 Independent of the state of the Show Cal Kit Label flag cal kit labels are displayed in several other manual calibration dialogs Use Reduced Number of Through Enables or disables the Reduced Through logic for every port assignment of an auto matic calibration Note that for this to work the port assignments must have a star topology with a Common Port set using ...

Page 676: ... tests ripple tests and circle tests is not affec ted by this setting If enabled those beeps are generated even if Sounds is unchecked Note In contrast to the R S ZNB the R S ZNBT does not have a built in audio device and loudspeaker To hear these sounds connect a USB audio device to the R S ZNBT or operate it via remote desktop Remote command SYSTem SOUNd ALARm STATe SYSTem SOUNd STATus STATe Tra...

Page 677: ...s displayed and specified as conductance G i 1 R i Remote command SYSTem DISPlay CONDuctancesn a Restart Set all Traces to 0 Defines the behavior of the Restart Sweep function see Restart Sweep on page 413 If unchecked factory default the previous measurement data are preserved If checked they are deleted Remote command SYSTem TRESet STATe on page 1296 Number of Trace Colors Defines the maximum nu...

Page 678: ...mmand n a Messages Tab Defines which instrument events are indicated by an information popup Display of information popups can be globally disabled or limited to certain event types Show Instrument Messages Defines whether information popups are displayed at all Remote command SYSTem ERRor DISPlay STATe Show Info Messages Show Warning Messages Show Error Messages Selectively disables enables displ...

Page 679: ... lines 8 to 11 and 16 to 19 Setting the channel bits does not change the analyzer state Channel Bits Decimal Entry of the 8 bit decimal value 0 255 for the selected channel The channel bits control eight output signals at the USER PORT connector The signals are 3 3 V TTL signals which can be used to differentiate between up to 256 independent analyzer states For an application example refer to the...

Page 680: ...er frequency of the passband or stopband see Bandfilter Search on page 101 If Geometric Calculation of Bandfilter Center is checked the geometric mean of the lower band edge and upper band edge frequencies is used otherwise their arithmetic mean Remote command CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion BWIDth GMCenter Error Dump Type Determines the level of detail Minimal Normal Large Full and hence the size of th...

Page 681: ...columns are separated by tabs rather than spaces Remote command MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion TABS Trim Leading Whitespace Touchstone Export Options If checked whitespace at the beginning of each line is removed Remote command MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion TRIM Positive Number Prefix Touchstone Export Options Positive numbers can either be prefixed by blanks by plus signs or not at all Remote command MM...

Page 682: ...etting If enabled at sweep end the output power of the first measurement point is restored The config ured Settling Delay is not applied Reduce is intended for measurements on sensitive DUTs primarily power sweeps If enabled at sweep end the output power of the driving port is reduced as if the channel base power was set to its minimum possible value The config ured settling delay is applied Keep ...

Page 683: ... the actual measurement irrespective of the sweep type and whether the generator actually sweeps Factory default is 180 µs Remote command SOURce POWer GENerator SDELay Recovery Tab Provides a single function Boot into Recovery Screen that allows you reboot the instrument and launch the R S Recovery Environment From there you can restore the original system image including operating system and firm...

Page 684: ...d report file you can send in for fault diagnosis see Chapter 10 3 Collecting Information for Technical Sup port on page 1377 Remote command DIAGnostic DEVice STATe SYSTem DFPRint Setup Tab Displays the channel and trace settings of the active recall set and the main character istics of the instrument including its IP address Options Tab Shows the installed software and hardware options You can al...

Page 685: ...RODuct OPTion INFO Hardware Tab Gives an overview of the analyzer s hardware configuration and basic hardware related instrument settings Configured External Switch Matrices The Hardware tab also provides information about connected switch matrices In par ticular for mechanical matrices the current relay switch counts are reported if suppor ted by the matrix Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVi...

Page 686: ...n dialog gives access to the service functions of the instrument Access SETUP Setup Service Function Most of the service functions require a service level 0 that is protected by a pass word Those service functions should be used by a Rohde Schwarz service repre sentative only Refer to the service manual for more information Password Enter a password here to activate the required service level Remo...

Page 687: ...the rear of the instrument to synchronize other devices e g signal generators or a second R S ZNB ZNBT network analyzer External The analyzer synchronizes to an external reference clock via the REF IN connector at the rear of the instrument The external reference signal has to meet the specifications of the data sheet its frequency must be specified in the Ext Frequency field The internal referenc...

Page 688: ... corresponds to the commands reported in this documen tation see Chapter 8 3 SCPI Command Reference on page 751 The ZVABT language ensures compatibility with network analyzers of the R S ZVA B T family E g compared to the DEFAULT language the command set does not include INITiate CONTinuous ALL and INITiate IMMediate ALL The function of INITiate CONTinuous and INITiate IMMediate DUMMy is modified ...

Page 689: ... compatible ID and option strings are set Binary data is transferred in a device specific bit order however the bit order can be changed using HP xxxx specific commands The ID and option strings can be changed or reset to the R S factory ID string Remote command SYSTem IDENtify STRing SYSTem IDENtify FACTory SYSTem OPTions STRing SYSTem OPTions FACTory FORMat BORDer Advanced Opens a dialog that al...

Page 690: ... instrument messages as information popups in partic ular the display of remote control command errors 6 17 4 External Devices Tab Allows you to set up and configure external power meters generators and calibration units and to enable error logging for the current session Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 5 7 20 External Power Meters on page 237 Chapter 5 7 21 External...

Page 691: ...ernal Matrices Dialog on page 701 and Chapter 6 17 5 5 Switch Matrix RF Connections Dialog on page 706 Remote control via GPIB To control external devices via GPIB you have to use an Chapter 5 7 19 USB to IEC IEEE Adapter on page 237 Log Errors Enables the transfer of error messages for external devices e g connection errors to the error log The error log appears in the Info dialog see Chapter 6 1...

Page 692: ...he interface type and address The R S ZNB ZNBT can auto detect the instrument type driver and the serial number of the connected power meter To control external devices via GPIB the pre installed RS Visa library visa32 dll must be replaced by the NI Visa library Known Devices Table with all power sensors meters the analyzer detects to be on line i e connected and switched on Scan Instruments refre...

Page 693: ...be used There is a problem with the device This state can be caused by different problems General communication error In this case check whether the device is properly connected to the configured interface Self test error In this case enable error logging for external devices see Log Errors on page 691 and search the Error Log Tab for self test error codes of the device The device driver does not ...

Page 694: ...ISA library The former is applicable for devices connected to the GPIB Bus or LAN connectors on the rear panel of the analyzer respectively Other is used in particular for USB connections e g for auto detec ted R S NRP Zxx sensors Address contains the address for the current interface type GPIB addresses must be unique for all devices connected to the GPIB bus range 0 to 30 GPIB and IP addresses m...

Page 695: ...IpAddress PortNo SOCKET Use complete VISA resource string Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer Pmtr DEFine Auto Config Causes the analyzer to clear the lists of Known Devices and Configured Devices and to configure all R S NRPxxS SN power sensors detected at any of the USB ports automatically No manual configuration is required Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer CONFigure...

Page 696: ...Te 6 17 4 4 External Generators Dialog The External Generators dialog configures external generators so that they can be used for measurements and power calibrations Access SYSTEM SETUP External Devices Generators Background information Refer to section Chapter 5 7 21 External Generators on page 239 The configuration of a new external generator involves the following steps 1 Connect the generator ...

Page 697: ...n the Add External Generator dia log but configurable here Ext Ref switches the generator to either external box checked or internal fre quency reference The setting does not affect the frequency reference settings of the analyzer SYSTEM SETUP Freq Ref Make sure to establish consistent settings in your test setup one instrument is the master the others use external reference frequency See Referenc...

Page 698: ...he supported interfaces Note Unintentional switchover to remote control When using the NI VISA library ensure that the network analyzer itself is not listed as a network device in the Measurement Automation Explorer Otherwise Scan Instru ments will send an identification query IDN causing the analyzer to close the External Generators dialog without executing Scan Instruments and to activate the re...

Page 699: ...ected to the R S ZNB ZNBT the entries in the Driver for New Instrument panel can be auto detected for the specified interface type and address Identify sends an identification query IDN to the specified device address in order to identify the type and serial number of the connected generator and select an appropriate driver file Generator driver files gen are stored in the Resources ExtDev subdire...

Page 700: ...e VISA resource string Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator Gen DEFine 6 17 5 External Ports Tab Allows you to set up switch matrices and to redefine physical ports Background information Refer to Chapter 5 7 22 External Switch Matrices on page 241 Chapter 5 3 1 2 Redefined S Parameters on page 117 6 17 5 1 Controls on the External Ports Tab The buttons in the External Ports panel o...

Page 701: ... 2 Define Physical Ports Dialog Allows you to redefine the physical VNA ports see Chapter 5 3 1 2 Redefined S Parameters on page 117 Access SYSTEM SETUP External Ports Define Ports Redefining physical ports causes a factory reset The factory reset deletes all switch matrix RF connections a wave b wave Source Define a physical port by assigning its reference receiver measurement receiver and genera...

Page 702: ...r details the external switch matrix can also be registered manually 1 tap Add Device to open the Add External Switchmatrix dialog see figure below 2 In the Add External Switchmatrix dialog a specify the IP address or hostname of the switch matrix b tap Identify to auto detect the matrix type Driver of the remote switch matrix If the device cannot be identified e g because it is temporarily unavai...

Page 703: ...device is online connected switched on ready to be used There is a problem with the device This state can be caused by different problems General communication error In this case check whether the device is properly connected to the configured interface Self test error In this case enable error logging for external devices see Log Errors on page 691 and search the Error Log Tab for self test error...

Page 704: ...ng connections on UDP port 2473 If necessary add a corresponding inbound rule to your firewall settings Remote command n a Add Device Opens the Add External Switchmatrix dialog that allows manual registration of an external switch matrix In the Address of New Instrument part you can specify the required connection prop erties Interface selects the connection type currently only LAN is available Ad...

Page 705: ...ialog allows to read and modify the IP Configura tion of an external device that is equipped with a LAN interface Access External Matrices Dialog Configure Because the IP configuration is actually written to the device the device must be online for the settings to be applied Uncheck Manual Configuration if the device shall discover its host configuration via DHCP In this case only the device s Hos...

Page 706: ... to a DUT test port Every matrix that was added to the connection configuration must be connected to the VNA by at least one RF connection Every VNA port that is not connected to a matrix must be assigned to a test port The test ports must be numbered consecutively starting with 1 Configuration errors are displayed in balloon popups appearing at the lower left corner of the dialog A redefinition o...

Page 707: ...nused in case no such connection exists 3 For some matrix test ports and every VNA port that is not connected to a matrix assign a test port Add Opens the Add Switch Matrix dialog Select the required matrices and tap OK to add them to the RF connection configura tion or tap Cancel to quit the dialog without adding a switch matrix to the RF connec tion configuration Note This dialog is shown automa...

Page 708: ...cel to quit the dialog without removing a switch matrix Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix DELete Renumber Test Ports Applies a default test port assignment to the available matrix test ports and VNA ports You can use this function at any time to number the used test ports in ascending order e g after editing port connections Note however that in general this will not preserve any m...

Page 709: ...association Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr CONFigure MVNA SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr CONFigure MLVNa Edit Test Port Connection To edit a test port connection tap on the corresponding port symbol In the Edit dialog select the appropriate test port or tap Set Unused to delete the test port association Setup Softtool ...

Page 710: ... ing context sensitive help Access Help Contents Index About from the menu bar Contents Opens the help browser and activates its Contents tab The Contents tab displays the table of contents of the analyzer s online help Index Opens the help browser and activates its Index tab The Index tab displays the index keywords of the analyzer s online help About Opens the About Vna dialog The About Vna prov...

Page 711: ...ettings or of the active recall set depending on the settings in the Presets Tab of the System Config dialog A preset can be a factory preset or a user defined preset It does not affect global set tings and resources e g System Config settings calibration kits and calibration pool etc Tip If you perform a PRESET by mistake use UNDO to restore your previous instrument settings Remote command RST SY...

Page 712: ...ng icons are disabled grayed out if an undo or redo is not possible In general the undo and redo actions are disabled if the size of the active recall set file exceeds 1 MB Tip You can also use UNDO after a SYSTEM PRESET to restore your previous instrument settings Additional Function Keys ...

Page 713: ...n on the remote control PC is required GPIB With option R S ZNB ZNBT B10 the analyzer offers a GPIB bus interface accord ing to standard IEC 625 1 IEEE 488 1 If equipped the GPIB bus connector is on the rear panel of the instrument The R S ZNB ZNBT can be remote controlled via GPIB The network analyzer can itself act as a master and control external devices via LAN USB or GPIB A VISA installation ...

Page 714: ...turer ID of Rohde Schwarz is 0x0AAD the Device ID is model specific 2 port R S ZNB4 0x019C 4 port R S ZNB4 0x019D 2 port R S ZNB8 0x019E 4 port R S ZNB8 0x019F 2 port R S ZNB20 0x01A0 4 port R S ZNB20 0x01A1 2 port R S ZNB40 variant 72 0x01A2 2 port R S ZNB40 variant 82 0x01BF 2 port R S ZNB40 variant 83 0x0263 4 port R S ZNB40 variant 84 0x01C0 R S ZNBT8 0x01BE R S ZNBT20 0x01A7 R S ZNBT26 0x01F3...

Page 715: ... to learn the specific command set for each instrument In general program development is further simplified by a graphical program environment Rohde Schwarz offers various R S ZNB ZNBT driver types LabView LabWind ows CVI IVI VXIplug play for different programming languages The drivers are available free of charge on the product pages in the R S internet along with instal lation information 7 1 3 ...

Page 716: ...P Setup Info to look up the IP address information of your ana lyzer If you run the GPIB explorer on the analyzer the local host address loopback address is 127 0 0 1 After the connection is established the GPIB explorer displays a tree view of all com mands included in the current firmware version of the network analyzer The programs can be selected for execution by a single mouse click It remote...

Page 717: ...e Go to Local switches the instrument to local state Display switches the display on or off If a remote error message is displayed at the bottom of the remote screen you can use Clear Error Messages to delete it The remaining controls are for future extensions Display on and off states Switching on the display means that the analyzer shows the measurement screen with the current recall sets diagra...

Page 718: ... remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual state via the GUI or via remote control see Chapter 7 1 4 2 Returning to Manual Operation on page 719 You can also lock the remote touch screen using SYSTem TSLock SCReen A tooltip across the bottom of the remote screen indicates a remote command error You can switch off this tooltip using SYSTem ERRor DISPlay REMote OFF SCPI commands RE...

Page 719: ...ages on page 1385 The lockout prevents unintentional switch over i e return to manual control is possible via remote control only Returning to manual control via the front panel keys can be enabled again e g by deactivating the REN control line of the GPIB bus 7 1 5 Combining Manual and Remote Control Using a remote control script is the quickest and easiest way of performing complica ted tasks wh...

Page 720: ... on the instrument Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instrument or setting the output level to some value Queries cause data to be provided for output on the GPIB bus e g for identifi cation of the device or polling the active input 2 According to their definition in standard IEEE 488 2 Common commands have a function and syntax that is precisely defined in standard...

Page 721: ...ot automati cally adapted Therefore GPIB bus control programs should always define an initial device status e g with the command RST and then implement the required settings 7 2 2 1 Common Commands Common device independent commands consist of a header preceded by an aster isk and possibly one or more parameters Examples RST RESET resets the instrument ESE 253 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the bits of ...

Page 722: ...ines the trigger source external trigger The following command has the same effect TRIGger SOURce EXTernal Note The short form is marked by uppercase letters the long form corresponds to the complete word Uppercase and lowercase notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the manual the instrument itself is case insensitive Parameters Parameters must be separated from the header by a whit...

Page 723: ...ommon When abbreviating the command line the second command begins with the level below TRIG The colon after the semicolon is omitted The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows TRIG SOUR EXT TIM 0 1 However a new command line always begins with the complete path Example TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG THR LOW 7 2 2 4 Responses to Queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explici...

Page 724: ...so permissible K kilo M milli U micro and N nano If the unit is missing the default unit is used Example SOUR RFG FREQ 1 5GHz is equivalent to SOUR RFG FREQ 1 5E9 Special numeric values The texts MINimum MAXimum DEFault UP and DOWN are interpreted as special numeric values A query returns the associated numerical value Example Setting command SENSe FREQuency STARt MINimum The query SENSe FREQuency...

Page 725: ...trings Strings must always be entered within single or double quotation marks or Example CONFigure CHANnel NAME Channel 4 or CONFigure CHANnel NAME Channel 4 7 2 3 5 Block Data Format Block data is a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data A command using a block data parameter with definite length has the following structure Example HEADer HEADer 45168x...

Page 726: ... control Moreover all commands follow SCPI syntax rules and SCPI confirmed commands have been used whenever possible These principles largely simplify the development of remote control scripts The GUI and the remote control command set both aim at maximum operating conven ience In manual control this generally means that the control elements are easy to find and intuitive to handle and that the ef...

Page 727: ...ix 9 to it 7 3 2 Active Traces in Remote Control In manual control there is always exactly one active trace irrespective of the number of channels and traces defined The active channel contains the active trace see Chap ter 5 1 3 1 Trace Settings on page 82 In remote control each channel contains an active trace unless the channel contains no trace at all This principle actually simplifies the rem...

Page 728: ...xample CALC PAR SEL Trc1 CALC1 MARK ON Select the old default trace Trc1 as the active trace for remote control Create a new marker to verify that Trc1 is now the active trace in channel 1 In the SCPI command description the numeric suffix Ch is used for channel settings it denotes the configured channel whereas Chn is used for trace settings it refers to the active trace in the channel 7 3 3 Init...

Page 729: ...e following tables give an overview Table 7 1 Addressing channels Method Commands Example Channel number Ch as a numeric suffix CONFigure CHANnel Ch STATe ON Query all channel names CONFigure CHANnel CATalog returns the names of all channels Assign or query channel name of a channel num bered Ch CONFigure CHANnel Ch NAME ABCD CONFigure CHANnel Ch NAME returns ABCD Query channel number assigned to ...

Page 730: ...er for a trace referenced by its trace name CONFigure TRACe Trc CHANnel NAME ID ABCD returns the actual channel number for trace ABCD the trace suffix is ignored 7 4 Command Processing The block diagram below shows how commands are serviced in the instrument IEC IEEE bus Ethernet Input unit with input buffer Command recognition Instrument hardware Output unit with output buffer Instrument settings...

Page 731: ...settings Subsequently it is immediately prepared to process further commands This means that new commands can already be serviced while the hardware is still being set overlapping execution 7 4 3 Data Base and Instrument Hardware The expression instrument hardware denotes the part of the instrument fulfilling the actual instrument function signal generation measurement etc The controller is not in...

Page 732: ...m No data is sent on the GPIB bus or via the Ethernet the controller waits until it has reached its time limit This behavior is specified by SCPI 7 4 6 Command Sequence and Command Synchronization IEEE 488 2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands A sequential command is one which finishes executing before the next command starts executing Commands that are processed quick...

Page 733: ...diate DUMMy takes longer to execute than OPC sending the command sequence INIT OPC results in initiating a sweep and after some time setting the OPC bit in the ESR Sending the commands INIT OPC CLS still initiates a sweep Since the operation is still pending when the analyzer executes CLS forcing it into the Operation Complete Command Idle State OCIS OPC is effectively skipped The OPC bit is not s...

Page 734: ...ds Hierarchy of status registers As shown in section Overview of Status Registers the status information is of hierarch ical structure STB SRE The STatus Byte STB register and its associated mask register Service Request Enable SRE form the highest level of the status reporting system The STB pro vides a rough overview of the instrument status collecting the information of the lower level register...

Page 735: ...ace no 10 Limit trace no 9 Limit trace no 8 Limit trace no 7 Limit trace no 6 Limit trace no 5 Limit trace no 4 Limit trace no 3 Limit trace no 2 Limit trace no 1 LIMit2 summary 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 STATus QUEStionable LIMit2 Register not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used Limit trace no 16 Limit trace n...

Page 736: ...ition The CONDition part is permanently overwritten by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register Its contents always reflect the current instrument state This register part can only be read but not overwritten or cleared Reading the CONDi tion register is nondestructive PTRansition The two transition register parts define which state transition of the condition part none 0 to 1 1 to 0...

Page 737: ... contribute to the sum bit ENAB bit 1 If the associated EVENT bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well This part can be overwritten and read by the user at will Its contents are not affected by reading The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher order register The instru ment automatically genera...

Page 738: ...6 of the SRE is ignored because it corresponds to the summary bit of the STB The bits in the STB are defined as follows Bit No Meaning 2 Error Queue not empty If this bit is enabled by the SRE each entry of the error queue generates a Service Request SRQ Thus an error can be recognized and further pinned down by polling the error queue The poll provides an informative error message 3 QUEStionable ...

Page 739: ...re status infor mation in a single bit It can be queried by means of a Parallel Poll The Parallel Poll Enable PPE register determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag The bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE with bit 6 being used as well in contrast to the SRE The IST flag results from the ORing of all results Related common commands The IST flag is quer...

Page 740: ...r in greater detail is entered into the error queue 5 Command Error This bit is set if a command which is undefined or syntactically incorrect is received An error message with a number between 100 and 200 which describes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 6 User Request This bit is set when the instrument is switched over to manual control or when a user defined softkey i...

Page 741: ...g 0 LIMit2 register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus QUEStionable LIMit2 register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 1 Failed limit check for trace no 1 This bit is set if any point on trace no 1 fails the limit check 14 Failed limit check for trace no 14 This bit is set if any point on trace no 14 fails the limit check The bits in the STATus QUEStionable LIMit2 registe...

Page 742: ...No Meaning 2 HARDware register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware The STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware register can be queried using the commands STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware CONDition or STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware EVENt The bits i...

Page 743: ...on holes of the casing unobstructed 8 Oven cold This bit is set if the oven for the internal high precision clock option B4 is not at its operat ing temperature Wait until the oven has been heated up 9 Unstable level control This bit is set if the analyzer detects an excessive source level at one of the ports The signal is turned off and the sweep halted Check signal path for the received wave esp...

Page 744: ...lowing sections are used Service request SRQ initiated by the measuring device Serial poll of all devices in the bus system initiated by the controller to find out who sent a SRQ and why Parallel poll of all devices Query of a specific instrument status by means of commands Query of the error queue 7 5 4 1 Service Request The R S ZNB ZNBT can send a service request SRQ to the controller Usually th...

Page 745: ...rate an SRQ 1 STB query the contents of the status byte in decimal form If bit 3 QUEStionable summary bit is set then 2 STAT QUES EVENT query STATus QUEStionable register If bit 10 QUEStionable LIMit1 summary bit is set then 3 Query STAT QUES LIMit1 EVENT query STATus QUEStionable LIMit1 register If bit 1 is set then the first trace failed the limit check The SRQ is the only possibility for the in...

Page 746: ...ervice request To this effect SRE and PPE must be set to the same value 7 5 4 4 Query of an Instrument Status Each part of any status register can be read by means of queries There are two types of commands The common commands ESR IDN IST STB query the higher level registers The commands of the STATus system query the SCPI registers e g STATus OPERation All queries return a decimal number which re...

Page 747: ...mands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well 7 5 5 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System The table below indicates the effects of various commands upon the status reporting system of the R S ZNB ZNBT Event Switching on supply voltage Power On Status Clear DCL SDC Device Clear Selected Device Clear RST or SYS Tem PRE Set ALL STA Tus PRE Set CLS Effect 0 1 Clear STB E...

Page 748: ...l use of the R S ZNB ZNBT features but do not need R S ZVR compatibility you should use the commands listed in Chapter 8 3 SCPI Command Reference on page 751 8 1 Special Terms and Notation This section explains the meaning of special syntax elements used in the SCPI com mand reference sections The following information is provided in the reference sections Complete command syntax and parameter lis...

Page 749: ...included zero or more times 8 1 3 Parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters Parame ters either provide alternative options setting a or setting b or setting c see special character or they form a list separated by commas setting x y Parameter1 Parameter2 In the command tables and lists parameters are generally described by a name Parameter1 Parameter2 written...

Page 750: ...status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation register to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer and the tooltip error messages for remote control ESE Event Status Enable 0 255 Sets the event status enable register to the value indicated The query ESE returns the contents ...

Page 751: ...ut the contents of the power on status clear flag The response can be 0 or 1 RST Reset no query Sets the instrument to a defined default status The command is equivalent to SYSTem PRESet DUMMy The RST value of each command is reported in the reference description See also SYSTem PRESet SCOPe SRE Service Request Enable 0 255 Sets the service request enable register to the value indicated Bit 6 MSS ...

Page 752: ... to indicate whether or not a global composite limit check on several traces has failed Since V2 20 of the R S ZNB ZNBT FW the result is automatically recalculated when ever a relevant setting is changed i e a subsequent query will return the updated limit violation state Example RST CALC LIM CONT 1 GHZ 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz using de...

Page 753: ...ALCulate Chn DATA NSWeep COUNt 760 CALCulate Chn DATA NSWeep FIRSt 761 CALCulate Chn DATA STIMulus 762 CALCulate DATA ALL Format RecallSet Reads the current response values of all traces of the referenced recall set Query parameters Format FDATa SDATa MDATa Output format for the S parameter data see CALCulate Chn DATA RecallSet Recall set name if omitted the active recall set is used Return values...

Page 754: ...t for new data from the hardware Restart Sweep in sin gle sweep mode or switching to continuous sweep mode discards imported data and switches back the display to measured data Parameters TraceName String parameter containing the trace name Format FDATa SDATa MDATa NCData UCData Data format see Table 8 2 Data Trace data for FDATa SDATa import either in ASCII or block data format depending on the c...

Page 755: ... at Fixture Simulation Input data access point Data Trace data either in ASCII or block data format depending on the current FORMat DATA setting The column order must match the one used during export Example Suppose that a TOSM calibration for ports 1 and 2 is active in channel no 1 CALCulate DATA CALL CATalog Query the traces available for CALCulate Ch DATA CALL The response is S11 S12 S21 S22 CA...

Page 756: ...DATA CHANnel ALL to query data traces and memory traces Suffix Ch Channel number Query parameters Format FDATa SDATa MDATa Output format for the S parameter data see CALCulate Chn DATA Return values Data Trace data either in ASCII or block data format depending on the current FORMat DATA setting Usage Query only CALCulate Ch DATA MDATa INTerpolate Uses linear inter extrapolation to regrid all memo...

Page 757: ...te Ch PARameter SDEFine Unformatted trace data SDATa can only be imported to memory traces Formatted trace data FDATa can only be imported to live traces if the related channel is in single sweep mode INITiate Ch CONTinuous OFF Before the import the target trace must be prepared according to the settings used during export Any request for new data from the hardware Restart Sweep in sin gle sweep m...

Page 758: ...making the cre ated trace the active trace of channel 1 omitted optional mne monic SENSe1 TRAC COPY MemTrc1 Trc1 CALC PAR SEL MemTrc1 Copy the data trace to a memory trace and select the memory trace as an active trace CALC DATA SDAT 1 2 3 4 5 6 Write numbers 1 2 3 4 5 6 to the memory trace CALC DATA SDAT Query the memory trace The response is 1 2 3 4 5 6 FORM REAL 32 Change the data format to 4 b...

Page 759: ...ORRection DATA 1 and 2 S11 S12 S21 S22 SCORr13 Directivity 3 S33 SCORr14 Source match 3 S33 SCORr15 Reflection tracking 3 S33 SCORr16 Isolation 3 S31 SCORr17 Load match 3 S31 SCORr18 Transmission tracking 3 S13 SCORr19 Isolation 1 S13 SCORr20 Load match 1 S13 SCORr21 Transmission tracking 1 S13 SCORr22 Isolation 3 S32 SCORr23 Load match 3 S32 SCORr24 Transmission tracking 3 S32 SCORr25 Isolation 2...

Page 760: ...alues per trace point irrespective of the selected trace format RvCount Number of sweep to be read 1 denotes the last sweep acquired 2 denotes the second last and so forth Range 1 to sweep count defined via SENSe Ch SWEep COUNt Example SWE COUN 10 Define the number of sweeps 10 to be measured in single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF INIT OPC Activate single sweep mode and start a single sweep sequence i...

Page 761: ... first sweep acquired 2 denotes the second and so forth The sweep count in single sweep mode is defined via SENSe Ch SWEep COUNt Range 1 to sweep count FwCountEnd Number of last sweep to be read If this parameter is omitted it is implicitly set to FwCount a single sweep is read Range FwCount to sweep count Return values Data Response values either in ASCII or block data format depend ing on the cu...

Page 762: ...nes the position response value of the horizontal line Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Position See list of parameters below Default unit NN Example RST CALC DLIN 10 Define the position of the horizontal line in the default dB Mag diagram at 10 dB CALC DLIN STAT ON Display the defined horizontal line Manual operation See Response Value on page 362 CALCulate C...

Page 763: ...ic values Furthermore the inter pretation of the result values depends on the active trace s stim ulus axis CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME XAXis See the table below Note that the skew value is positive if at the defined position CALCulate Chn DTIMe POSition the active trace is to the right of the reference trace Usage Query only Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Extended Info on page 639...

Page 764: ...al operation See Skew Fail Beep on page 639 CALCulate Chn DTIMe LIMit LIMit arg0 Defines the limit value for the skew check Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters arg0 Limit value in seconds or meters depending on the format of the current trace s stimulus axis see CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME XAXis Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Skew Limit on page 63...

Page 765: ...e Chn FORMat REAL Time Domain is enabled CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME STATe ON the Low Pass Step time domain transform is used CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME TYPE LPASs and CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME STIMulus STEP The latter in turn requires the stimulus grid to be harmonic This can be achieved for example using SENSe Ch HARMonic AUTO ON Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace ...

Page 766: ...te Chn EYE INPut RTIMe DATA 772 CALCulate Chn EYE INPut RTIMe THReshold 773 CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer DIRac DELTa 773 CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer DIRac PROBability 774 CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer PERiodic FREQuency 774 CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer PERiodic MAGNitude 775 CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer PERiodic PHASe 775 CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer RANDom STDDeviation 775 CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer STATe 776 CALCulate Ch...

Page 767: ...89 CALCulate Chn EYE DUT MODE DUTMode Allows to temporarily switch between the measured DUT and an ideal one with flat frequency response in the related eye diagram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters DUTMode IDEal MEASured Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual ...

Page 768: ...s STATe Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Weight Weight relative to the Cursor tap RST 0 dB Default unit dB Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Cursor Settings on page 627 CALCulate Chn EYE EMPHasis STATe Boolean Activates deactivates pre emphasis in the calculation chain of the related eye diagram This command will raise an execution error if the act...

Page 769: ... an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram The equalizer can be enabled disabled using CALCulate Chn EYE EQUalization STATe Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace 1 2 1 2 Parameters CTLE Poles Default unit Hz Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See CTLE Equalizer on page 632 CALCulate Chn EYE EQUalization CTLE ZERO CTLE Zero Spe...

Page 770: ...eters Boolean RST OFF Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Active on page 631 CALCulate Chn EYE INPut BPATtern TYPE BitPattern Defines the type of bit stream to be simulated for the related eye diagram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters BitPatter...

Page 771: ...ory LOAD EYE BPATtern is repeated until the specified length is reached This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram Before executing this command the pattern type must be set to USER see CALCulate Chn EYE INPut BPATtern TYPE Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters BitLength Stream length specified with ...

Page 772: ...e trace Parameters PAMType NRZ PM4 PM8 PM16 NRZ PAM 4 PAM 8 or PAM 16 RST NRZ Manual operation See Modulation on page 622 CALCulate Chn EYE INPut OLEVel OneLevel CALCulate Chn EYE INPut ZLEVel VoltageLevel Defines the highest lowest nominal voltage level of the simulated digital signal gener ating the related eye diagram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selecte...

Page 773: ...e itself can be configured using CALCulate Chn EYE INPut RTIMe DATA This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters RiseThreshold T1_9 T2_8 T1_9 10 to 90 of the voltage amplitude between 1 level and 0 level This is the default threshold for eye diagrams T2_8 20 to 80 ...

Page 774: ...sed to identify the active trace Parameters DiracProbability Probability of the jitter occurring at each symbol period RST 0 5 Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Dirac on page 629 CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer PERiodic FREQuency PeriodicFrequency Defines the frequency of the periodic jitter in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram This command will raise an execution error if t...

Page 775: ...se Defines the phase of the periodic jitter in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram Periodic jitter insertion can be enabled using CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer TYPE PERiodic Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters PeriodicPhase RST 0 deg Default uni...

Page 776: ...ER This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean RST OFF Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Active on page 628 CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer TYPE DIRac Boolean Enables disables Dirac jitter insertion in the generator simulation of the related eye dia g...

Page 777: ...ess the jitter functionality is activated using CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer STATe Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean RST OFF Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Periodic on page 628 CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer TYPE RANDom Boolean Enables disables random jitter insertion in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram This command will raise an...

Page 778: ...er Specific on page 629 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK AUTO Automatically creates an eye mask based on the current eye measurement settings Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Usage Setting only Manual operation See Automatic Mask Generation on page 636 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK CENTer HORizontal HorizontalOffset Defines the horizontal center of the eye mask in the related eye diagram...

Page 779: ...t unit V Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Mask Center on page 635 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK DATA Returns the detailed results of the mask test in the related eye diagram i e the con tents of the corresponding result info field This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram or if CALCulate Chn EYE MASK STATe is OFF Use MMEMory ...

Page 780: ...ge 632 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK FAIL Returns Pass or Fail to indicate the result of the limit check in the related eye diagram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram if the eye test is not enabled CALCulate Chn EYE MASK STATe ON or if the mask is empty see CALCu late Chn EYE MASK SHAPe BOTTom TOP POLYgon STATe Tip Use CALCulate CL...

Page 781: ... CALCulate Chn EYE MASK FAIL CONDition FailCondition Defines whether the fail condition for the eye mask test of the related eye diagram is specified in absolute or relative terms This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters FailCondition SAMPles RATE SAMPles The e...

Page 782: ...tangle in the eye mask of the related eye dia gram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram Use CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe BOTTom STATe or CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe TOP STATe to activate or deactivate the area in the eye mask The eye mask test is enabled disabled using CALCulate Chn EYE MASK STATe Suffix Chn Channel number us...

Page 783: ... vate the area in the eye mask The eye mask test is enabled disabled using CALCulate Chn EYE MASK STATe Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters PolygonType OCTogon HEXagon RECTangle Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Polygon Setup on page 634 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHAPe POLYgon HORizontal Main Minor Defines the main and minor width of the center polygon i...

Page 784: ... STATe Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Main Default unit V Minor Default unit V Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Polygon Setup on page 634 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK SHOW Boolean Defines the visibility of the configured eye mask in the related eye diagram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an...

Page 785: ...ionRate Default unit percent Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Test Settings on page 636 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK VIOLation TOLerance ViolationTolerance Defines the violation tolerance i e the number of bad samples for the mask test in the related eye diagram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram This tolerance will o...

Page 786: ...generator signals CALCulate EYE MEASurement DATA returns something like Eye Measurements Eye Minimum 102 344 mV Eye Maximum 2 699 V Eye Base 277 189 µV Eye Top 2 597 V Eye Mean 1 298 V Eye Amplitude 2 596 V Eye Height 2 596 V Eye Width 10 000 ns Bit Period 10 000 ns Rise Time 115 000 ps Fall Time 115 000 ps Jitter Pk Pk 50 125 ps Jitter RMS 0 000 s Duty Cycle Dist 0 000 s Duty Cycle Pct 0 000 Cros...

Page 787: ... The thresholds can either be specified by enum constants for the standard 10 90 or 20 80 rise times or numerically Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters ThresholdEnum LowerThreshold T1_9 10 90 rise time T2_8 20 80 rise time integer Lower rise time threshold as integer percentage RST T1_9 UpperThreshold Upper rise time threshold as integer percentage Options R S ZN...

Page 788: ...ation See Active on page 630 CALCulate Chn EYE STATe Boolean Defines whether the active trace in the selected channel shall be represented as an eye diagram Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean Example RST switch trace to to S31 and switch on the eye diagram CALCulate1 PARameter MEASure Trc1 S31 CALCulate1 EYE STATe ON Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual opera...

Page 789: ...y the active trace Parameters Boolean RST OFF Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Low Pass on page 623 CALCulate Chn EYE STIMulus SCRambler Boolean Enables disables the scrambler in the bit stream simulation of the related eye diagram This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the...

Page 790: ...Culate FILTer GATE The CALCulate FILTer GATE commands define the properties of the time gate which is used to optimize the time domain response CALCulate FILTer GATE TIME AOFFset 790 CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME TYPE 791 CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME CENTer 791 CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME DCHebyshev 792 CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME SHAPe 792 CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME SHOW 793 CALCulat...

Page 791: ...e Adjust Time Gate on page 573 CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME TYPE TimeGateFilter Selects the time gate filter type defining what occurs to the data in the specific time region Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters TimeGateFilter BPASs NOTCh BPASs Band pass filter Pass all information in specified time region and reject everything else NOTCh Notch filter Reject all...

Page 792: ...ommand is only available if a Dolph Chebyshev time gate is active CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME WINDow DCHebyshev Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters SidebandSupp Sideband suppression Range 10 dB to 120 dB Increment 10 dB RST 32 dB Default unit dB Example RST CALC FILT TIME WIND DCH Reset the instrument and select a Dolph Chebyshev time gate for filtering the da...

Page 793: ...E SHOW Boolean Enables or disables permanent display of the gate limits Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean ON time gate permanently displayed OFF time gate hidden RST OFF Example See CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME CENTer Manual operation See Show Range Lines on page 317 CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME SPAN Span Defines the span of the time gate Suffix Chn...

Page 794: ...time gate permanently Manual operation See Axis Pair on page 317 Note If the start frequency entered is greater than the current stop frequency the stop frequency is set to the start frequency plus the minimum frequency span CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME SPAN If the stop frequency entered is smaller than the current start frequency the start fre quency is set to the stop frequency minus the minim...

Page 795: ...ng and Deembedding on page 198 In the current implementation the firmware assumes that balanced fixture modeling and dembedding is required whenever a balanced port is configured A mixture of single ended and balanced fixture modeling is not supported CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt ATTenuation BEHavior AttenuationBehavior Sets gets the linear_2x batch mode parameter of the ISD tool LINear parameter va...

Page 796: ...a Touchstone file Suffix Ph_pt This suffix is ignored Parameters String Path to the Touchstone file either absolute or relative to the cur rent directory see MMEMory CDIRectory Manual operation See Load File 1x Open Preset 1x Short Preset on page 585 CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt COUPon MEASure OPEN For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool and coupon type OPSHort1x see CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt COUP...

Page 797: ...ture modeling with the ISD tool and coupon type OPSHort1x see CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt COUPon TYPE this command loads the proper ties of the Short coupon from a Touchstone file Suffix Ph_pt This suffix is ignored Parameters String Path to the Touchstone file either absolute or relative to the cur rent directory see MMEMory CDIRectory Manual operation See Load File 1x Open Preset 1x Short Preset ...

Page 798: ...e set to ON if a recent version of the ISD tool from 2019 12 or later is used ON correspons to add_dc 1 in the tool s batch mode Suffix Ph_pt This suffix is ignored Parameters Boolean OFF 0 No DC data added i e the touchstone data reach down to the start frequency of the instrument sweep ON 1 The ISD tool adds extrapolated S parameter data for f 0 RST OFF 0 Manual operation See DC Extrapolation on...

Page 799: ...9 2 8 Fixture Modeling on page 1371 Manual operation See Active on page 587 CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt FTIMe DUT FltDutAndLeadIns If CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt FTIMe OVERride is set to TRUE this com mand allows to set the flight time for DUT Lead ins manually This is equivalent to setting the leadin_dut_time batch mode parameter of the ISD tool to a numeric value not auto Suffix Ph_pt This suffix ...

Page 800: ... cou pons and the test fixture Corresponds to the passive batch mode parameter of the ISD tool Suffix Ph_pt This suffix is ignored Parameters Boolean ON 0 enforce passivity and reciprocity OFF 0 do not enforce passivity and reciprocity Manual operation See Enforce Passitivity on page 591 CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt PORT ORDer PortOrder Defines how the ISD tool shall interpret the DUT Fixture data s...

Page 801: ...d when the tool is run LEFT skip the ports on the left according to the port order specified using CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt PORT ORDer NONE do not skip any ports RIGHt skip the ports on the right according to the port order specified using CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt PORT ORDer Equivalent to setting the ports_to_skip batch mode parameter of the ISD tool to 1 0 or 2 respectively Use CALCulate FMOD...

Page 802: ...mmand allows to specify the ports to which the deembedding files shall be assigned after the tool has run Suffix Ph_pt Physical port number for single ended deembedding logical port number for balanced deembedding Parameters Boolean 1 ON if a deembedding file shall be assinged to port Pt 0 OFF otherwise Example See Chapter 9 2 8 Fixture Modeling on page 1371 Manual operation See Apply on page 588 ...

Page 803: ...COUPling TraceCoupling Tells the ISD tool about coupling among lead in traces Corresponds to the coupling batch mode parameter of the ISD tool Suffix Ph_pt This suffix is ignored Parameters TraceCoupling NONE WEAK STRong NONE no coupling WEAK coupling will be extracted even if there are 2 ports enabled on the test coupon STRong if the test coupon is a 4 port file and there are two ports to be extr...

Page 804: ...ored Usage Event Manual operation See Measure Measure Open Measure Short on page 585 CALCulate FMODel SFD Ph_pt COUPon MEASure FILename String For a fixture modeling with the SFD tool this command loads the coupon properties from a Touchstone file The coupon type can be selected using CALCulate FMODel SFD Ph_pt COUPon TYPE Suffix Ph_pt This suffix is ignored Parameters String Path to the Touchston...

Page 805: ... the 2x Thru test coupon Suffix Ph_pt This suffix is ignored Parameters SFDPortConfig ODD NON ODD odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right NON ports 1 to N are on the left and ports N 1 to 2 N are on the right Manual operation See 2x Thru Port Ordering on page 592 CALCulate FMODel SFD Ph_pt DUT MEASure For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool this command allows to measure the DUT...

Page 806: ...lting Touchstone files are written to C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Embedding If result files with the same name already exist they will be overwritten Suffix Ph_pt Usage Event Manual operation See Run Fixture Modeling Tool on page 587 CALCulate FMODel SFD Ph_pt RUN STATe Boolean For a fixture modeling with the SFD tool this command allows to specify the ports to which the deembedding...

Page 807: ...splay formats are generally appropriate for an analysis of a particular mea sured quantity see Chapter 5 2 3 3 Measured Quantities and Trace Formats on page 115 Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Type MLINear MLOGarithmic PHASe UPHase POLar SMITh ISMith GDELay REAL IMAGinary SWR COMPlex MAGNitude LOGarithmic See list of parameters below RST MLOGarithmic Example ...

Page 808: ...GDELay For frequency sweeps only Calculates the group delay at the related sweep point and displays it in a Cartesian diagram REAL Calculates Re z x and displays it in a Cartesian diagram IMAGinary Calculates Im z y and displays it in a Cartesian diagram SWR Calculates the standing wave ratio 1 z 1 z and displays it in a Cartesian diagram LOGarithmic Displays z in a Cartesian diagram with logarith...

Page 809: ...ST 10 Example RST CALC FORM GDEL Select group delay calculation for the active trace CALC GDAP SCO 15 Select an aperture of 15 steps Manual operation See Aperture Points on page 289 8 3 1 10 CALCulate IAVerage CALCulate Chn IAVerage STATe Boolean Turns infinite averaging on or off The averaging mode can be selected using CALCulate Chn IAVerage MODE Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the ac...

Page 810: ... Chn LIMit CIRCle FAIL 813 CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle SOUNd STATe 813 CALCulate Chn LIMit CLEar 813 CALCulate Chn LIMit CONTrol DATA 814 CALCulate Chn LIMit CONTrol SHIFt 815 CALCulate Chn LIMit DATA 815 CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle STATe 816 CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle CLEar 816 CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle DATA 816 CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle DISPlay STATe 817 CALCulate Chn LIMit DELete ALL 817 CA...

Page 811: ...sed Usage Query only Manual operation See Limit Check on page 358 CALCulate LIMit FAIL ALL RecallSet Returns a 0 or 1 to indicate whether or not the limit line check has failed for at least one channel in the referenced recall set 0 represents pass and 1 represents fail Query parameters RecallSet Recall set name if omitted the active recall set is used Usage Query only Manual operation See Limit C...

Page 812: ... 360 CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle DATA CenterX CenterY Radius Defines a circle limit lines by its center coordinates and its radius Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters CenterX Range Virtually no restriction for center coordinates RST 0 Default unit NN CenterY Range Virtually no restriction for center coordinates RST 0 Default unit NN Radius Range Virtually no restr...

Page 813: ...LIMits FAIL to perform a composite global limit check Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example See CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle STATe Usage Query only Manual operation See Limit Check on page 358 CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle SOUNd STATe Boolean Switches the acoustic signal fail beep on or off The fail beep is generated each time the analyzer detects an exceeded circle limit ...

Page 814: ... DATA Note The generated segments are upper or lower limit line segments depending on the CALCulate Chn LIMit SEGMent Seg TYPE setting CALCulate Ch LIMit CONTrol DATA does not overwrite the type setting Tip To define additional new limit line segments without overwriting the old segments use CALCulate Chn LIMit DATA Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters StartStim S...

Page 815: ...dified limit line segment ranges from 1000000001 Hz to 2000000001 Hz Usage Setting only Manual operation See Shift Lines on page 348 CALCulate Chn LIMit DATA Type StartStim StopStim StartResp StopResp Defines the limit line type the stimulus and response values for a limit line with an arbi trary number of limit line segments See Chapter 5 4 1 1 Rules for Limit Line Defini tion on page 135 Note In...

Page 816: ...gram Manual operation See Segment List on page 349 CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle STATe Boolean Sets queries the state of the display circle for the active trace of channel Chn The display circle is defined using CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle DATA Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean If set to ON only trace points within the display circle are shown at the GUI ...

Page 817: ... is displayed in complex format Manual operation See Show Border on page 361 CALCulate Chn LIMit DELete ALL Deletes all limit line segments Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example RST CALC LIM CONT 1 GHZ 1 5 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 1 5 GHz using default response values CALC LIM DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 2 3 Defin...

Page 818: ...trace Example RST CALC LIM CONT 1 GHZ 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz using default response values CALC LIM STAT ON FAIL Switch the limit check on and query the result CALC LIM STAT AREA LEFT TOP For a subsequent check at the GUI or a hardcopy move the pass fail message to the top left position Usage Query only Manual operation See Limit Chec...

Page 819: ... limit line segments 2k 1 2s updates odd limit line segments 1 3 2s 1 with type upper and the given response values creates upper limit line segments 2s 1 2s 3 2k 1 with type upper and the given response values creates missing lower limit line segments 2s 2 2s 4 2k with type lower and default response values If s 0 newly created lower upper limit line segments inherit their start and stop stimuli ...

Page 820: ...trace TraceName is specified Setting parameters StimulusOffset Stimulus offset value used to shift all imported limit line seg ments in horizontal direction Default unit NN ResponseOffset Response offset value used to shift all imported limit line seg ments in vertical direction Default unit dB TraceName Name of the selected trace as used e g in CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine If no trace name is s...

Page 821: ...LIMit SEGMent Seg AMPLitude STARt Response CALCulate Chn LIMit SEGMent Seg AMPLitude STOP Response These commands change the start or the stop response values i e the response val ues assigned to the start or stop stimulus values of a limit line segment A segment must be created first to enable the commands e g CALCulate Chn LIMit DATA See also Chapter 5 4 1 1 Rules for Limit Line Definition on pa...

Page 822: ...segments including enabled and disabled segments Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example CALC LIM DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 2 3 Define an upper limit line segment segment no 1 in the stimu lus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning response val ues of 2 dB and 3 dB CALC LIM SEGM COUNT Query the number of segments The response is 1 Usage Query only Manual operation...

Page 823: ...a custom formula for a segment use CALCulate Chn LIMit CONTrol DATA to create it Parameters State OFF 0 The line segment is a straight line connecting the endpoints specified in the segment definition ON 1 The line segment is defined by a custom formula Use CALCulate Chn LIMit SEGMent Seg FORMula to spec ify the formula RST OFF Example See CALCulate Chn LIMit SEGMent Seg FORMula on page 822 Manual...

Page 824: ... and s for time sweeps For CW mode sweeps stimulus values are dimensionless Default unit NN Example CALC LIM DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 2 3 Define an upper limit line segment segment no 1 in the stimu lus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning response val ues of 2 dB and 3 dB CALC LIM SEGM STIM STAR 1GHZ STOP 2 GHZ CALC LIM SEGM TYPE LMIN Change the segment to a lower limit line segment with...

Page 825: ...LCulate Chn LIMit SOUNd STATe Boolean Switches the acoustic signal fail beep on or off The fail beep is generated each time the analyzer detects an exceeded limit Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean ON OFF Fail beep on or off RST OFF Example CALC LIM STAT ON SOUN ON Switch the limit check on and activate the fail beep Manual operation See Limit Fail Beep ...

Page 826: ...ion Example See CALCulate Chn LIMit FAIL Manual operation See Limit Check on page 345 CALCulate Chn LIMit TTLout Pt STATe Boolean Switches the TTL pass fail signals on or off The signals are applied to the USER PORT as long as the active trace Chn is within limits including the ripple limits See Chapter 11 3 1 1 USER PORT on page 1381 Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Pt ...

Page 827: ... CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion BWIDth MODE 836 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion CENTer 836 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain USER RANGe 837 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain USER SHOW 837 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain USER STARt 838 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain USER STOP 838 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute 838 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion RESult 839...

Page 828: ...ivate mark ers 1 and 2 for it The default position for both markers is the center of the sweep range INSTrument NSELect 2 Make channel 2 the active channel CALCulate MARKer COUPled TYPE ALL Select coupling type All recall set wide coupling CALC MARK COUP ON Activate marker coupling to Trc2 the active trace of the active channel Automatically creates markers no 1 and 2 on Trc1 and couples them to t...

Page 829: ...HorizontalPos VerticalPos Moves the marker info field for the active trace Chn to one of nine predefined posi tions in the active diagram Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters HorizontalPos LEFT MID RIGHt Horizontal position VerticalPos TOP MID BOTTom Vertical position Example See CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk Y Manual operation See Mkr 1 Mkr 10 on page 364 CALCulate Chn...

Page 830: ...anual operation See Dflt Marker Frmt on page 290 SCPI GUI MLINear Lin Mag MLOGarithmic MDB for R S ZVR compatibility dB Mag PHASe Phase POLar COMPlex for R S ZVR compatibility Real Imag GDELay Delay REAL Real IMAGinary Imag SWR SWR LINPhase MLPhase for R S ZVR compatibility Lin Mag Phase LOGPhase MDPhase for R S ZVR compatibility dB Mag Phase IMPedance R j X ADMittance G j B MIMPedance IMP Mag CAL...

Page 831: ...on Settings on page 374 CALCulate Chn MARKer MPEak THReshold Value Defines a threshold value for multiple peak searches Use CALCulate Chn MARKer MPEak THReshold STATe to activate it Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Value Threshold value The unit is derived from the active trace format and cannot be modified Changing the trace format resets the threshold to a f...

Page 832: ...arch info field for the active trace Chn to one of nine prede fined positions in the active diagram Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters HorizontalPos LEFT MID RIGHt Horizontal position VerticalPos TOP MID BOTTom Vertical position Example See CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk BWIDth Manual operation See Bandpass Ref to Max on page 378 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk AOFF Removes al...

Page 833: ... the bandpass bandstop region the stimulus value of marker M4 QualityFactor 3 dB quality factor i e the ratio between the center frequency and the 3 dB bandwidth Loss loss at the center of the bandpass bandstop region the response value of marker M4 at the time of the bandfilter search LowerEdge lower band edge UpperEdge upper band edge Tip To obtain the Quality Factor BW result from the bandfilte...

Page 834: ...ATe Boolean Switches the delta mode for marker Mk on trace no Chn on or off The marker must be created before using CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk STATe ON If the active trace contains no reference marker the command also creates a reference marker Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number Parameters Boolean ON OFF Enables or disables the delta mode RST OFF Example Supp...

Page 835: ...ters Active Boolean Manual operation See Excursion Settings on page 372 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FORMat OutFormat Sets queries the output format for the complex value of the related marker Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number Parameters OutFormat DEFault MLINear MLOGarithmic MDB PHASe POLar COMPlex GDELay REAL IMAGinary SWR LINPhase MLPHase LOGPhase MDPHase I...

Page 836: ...o Max BPRMarker Bandpass Search Ref to Marker BSRMarker Bandstop Search Ref to Marker BPABsolute Bandpass Absolute Level BSABsolute Bandstop Absolute Level NONE deactivate bandfilter search result off RST NONE Example See CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk BWIDth Manual operation See Bandpass Ref to Max on page 378 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion CENTer Sets the center of the sweep range equal to the stimul...

Page 837: ... full span search range Example CALC1 MARK1 FUNC DOM USER 2 Select the search range no 2 assigned to marker no 1 and trace no 1 CALC MARK FUNC DOM USER STARt 1GHz Set the start frequency of the search range to 1 GHz CALC MARK FUNC DOM USER STOP 1 2GHz Set the stop frequency of the search range to 1 2 GHz Manual operation See Search Range on page 370 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain USER SHO...

Page 838: ...h mode for marker no Mk and initiates the search The marker must be created before using CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk STATe ON exception bandfilter search Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number For a bandfilter search BFILter this numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the band filter search functions always use markers M1 to M4 Setting param...

Page 839: ...Chn MARKer Mk BWIDth MMAXimum or MMINimum Multiple peak search SPRogress Sweep progress CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion RESult Returns the result stimulus and response value of a search started by means of CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute The search must be execu ted before the command is enabled Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk This numeric suffix is ignored...

Page 840: ... of the sweep range equal to the stimulus value of the marker Mk on trace no Chn Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number Example RST CALC MARK ON Create marker 1 in the center of the current sweep range and assign it to trace no 1 CALC MARK FUNC STAR Divide the sweep range in half starting at the current marker position As an alternative CALC MARK FUNC STOP Div...

Page 841: ...no Mk The marker doesn t have to be created before CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk STATe ON the name can be assigned in advance Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number Parameters MarkerName Marker name string parameter RST M1 for marker no 1 etc Example Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK NAME 1 CALC MARK ON Create marker 1 named ...

Page 842: ...e IMPedance ADMittance MIMPedance DEFault means the reference marker is formatted according the related trace s default marker format see CALCulate Chn MARKer DEFault FORMat For the other marker formats see CALCulate Chn MARKer DEFault FORMat and the description in Marker Format on page 98 RST DEFault Manual operation See Marker Format on page 366 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence MODE Mode Sets t...

Page 843: ...trace Mk This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value Parameters MarkerName Marker name string parameter RST R Example See CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk NAME Manual operation See Marker Name on page 366 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence TYPE Mode Sets the marker mode of the related reference marker The marker must be created before using CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence STATe ON Suffix Ch...

Page 844: ...m for power sweeps 0 s to 127500 s for time sweeps and 1 to 100001 for CW mode Setting parameters Seg For a segmented frequency sweep with overlapping segments you can assign the reference marker to a particular segment If specified the Seg number must be valid and the Stimulus Value must be inside the segment Point For a segmented frequency sweep with overlapping segments or with segments that ha...

Page 845: ...MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute It enables or disables tracking which causes the search logic of the related marker s to be repeated after each sweep Tip If the current search mode is a bandfilter or multiple peak search this command enables or disables the corresponding tracking Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Number of an existing marker If a bandfilter search or a mult...

Page 846: ... of z in dB Mag z 20 log z dB PHASe Phase of z φ z arctan y x UPHase Unwrapped phase of z comprising the complete number of 360 phase rotations Ф z φ z 2k 360 REAL Real part of z Re z x IMAGinary Imaginary part of z Im z y SWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio SWR 1 z 1 z DEFault Identical to trace format Note the Smith and Polar traces use Lin Mag as the default for mat for target value Suffix Chn Chan...

Page 847: ...te1 MARKer1 FUNCtion EXECute Execute the target search for marker 1 CALCulate1 MARKer1 FUNCtion RESult Query for the results Manual operation See Target Format on page 375 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk STATe Boolean Creates the marker numbered Mk and assigns it to trace no Chn Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 Param...

Page 848: ...lue Defines a marker specific threshold value for single peak searches Use CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk THReshold STATe to activate it Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number Parameters Value Threshold value The unit is derived from the active trace format and cannot be modified Changing the trace format resets the threshold to a format specific default value Manual...

Page 849: ...subsequent sweeps Tracking is disabled Stimulus and response value are stored with the marker they are not adjusted to subsequent sweeps and trace format changes The marker stimulus can be set using CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk X but the response value remains fixed ARBitrary freezes the marker at the position determined by the current stimulus and response value Tracking is disabled The marker stores ...

Page 850: ...rwise 9 9E 11 Hz to 9 9E 11 Hz for frequency sweeps 999 dBm to 999 dBm for power sweeps 0 s to 127500 s for time sweeps and 1 to 100001 for CW mode Setting parameters Seg For a segmented frequency sweep with overlapping segments you can assign the marker to a particular segment If specified the Seg number must be valid and the Stimulus Value must be inside the segment Point For a segmented frequen...

Page 851: ...tween trace format and marker format requires a concrete stimulus value Default unit NN Example Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK ON Create marker no 1 and display it in the center of the sweep range CALC MARK Y Query the measurement value at the marker position CALC MARK STAT AREA LEFT TOP For a subsequent check at the GUI or a hardcopy move the info field...

Page 852: ...ST CALC MATH MEM Copy the current state of the default trace Trc1 to a memory trace named Mem2 Trc1 The memory trace is not dis played CALC MATH SDEF Trc1 Mem2 Trc1 Define a mathematical trace dividing the raw complex data trace by the stored memory trace The mathematical trace is not displayed CALC MATH STAT ON Display the mathematical trace instead of the active data trace Manual operation See E...

Page 853: ...ate Chn MATH FORMatted EXPRession SDEFine to define general math traces Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Mode NORMal ADD SUBTract MULTiply DIVide NORMal Math trace active data trace ADD Math trace data memory SUBTract Math trace data memory MULTiply Math trace data memory DIVide Math trace data memory When set to NORMal the corresponding mathematical mode is t...

Page 854: ...MemTraceName DataTraceName To copy an active mathematical trace use TRACe COPY MATH MemTraceName DataTraceName Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example RST CALC MATH MEM Copy the current state of the default trace Trc1 to a memory trace named Mem2 Trc1 The memory trace is not dis played DISP WIND TRAC2 FEED Mem2 Trc1 Display the created memory trace in the active diagram...

Page 855: ...assumes that the result of the mathematical expression represents a volt age OFF Result is Wave Quantity disabled the analyzer assumes that the result of the mathematical expression is dimensionless RST OFF Example RST SWE TYPE POW CALC PAR SDEF Trc1 a1 Reset the instrument activate a power sweep and select a wave quantity a1 for the trace Trc1 DISP WIND TRAC FEED Trc1 Display the generated trace ...

Page 856: ...t including the default trace Trc1 in channel 1 The manual control screen shows No Trace Example See CALCulate Ch PARameter DELete Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Trace on page 298 CALCulate PARameter DELete MEMory Deletes all memory traces in all channels Usage Event Manual operation See Delete All Mem on page 305 CALCulate Ch PARameter CATalog Returns the trace names and measurement para...

Page 857: ...ort2 Creates the traces for all S parameters associated with a group of logical ports S parameter group The traces can be queried using CALCulate Ch DATA SGRoup Traces must be selected to become active traces see CALCulate Ch PARameter SELect Note Each channel can contain a single S parameter group only Defining a new S parameter group deletes the previous one Use CALCulate Ch PARameter DELete SGR...

Page 858: ...race names are important for referencing the generated traces see program example below LogicalPort2 Example CALC2 PAR DEF SGR 1 2 Create channel 2 and four traces to measure the two port S parameters S11 S12 S21 S22 The traces are not displayed DISP WIND TRAC2 FEED Ch2_SG_S11 DISP WIND TRAC3 FEED Ch2_SG_S12 DISP WIND TRAC4 FEED Ch2_SG_S21 DISP WIND TRAC5 FEED Ch2_SG_S22 Display the four traces in...

Page 859: ...arameters CALCulate4 PARameter DELete CH4TR1 Delete the first created trace CALCulate4 PARameter DELete CALL Delete the remaining three traces in channel 4 CALCulate PARameter DELete ALL Delete all traces including the default trace Trc1 in channel 1 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Delete Trace on page 298 CALCulate Ch PARameter DELete CALL Deletes all traces in channel no Ch Suffix Ch Cha...

Page 860: ...all defined traces You can open the Trace Manager dialog to obtain an overview of all channels and traces including the traces that are not displayed Suffix Ch Channel number of an existing channel containing the refer enced trace Parameters TraceName Trace name string variable e g Trc4 See Rules for trace names in Table Area on page 299 Trace names must be unique across all channels and diagrams ...

Page 861: ...ace TraceName This is only relevant for Shunt thru Measurements Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters ProbeTip Probe tip impedance RST 0 Default unit Ohm Parameters for setting and query TraceName Trace name Manual operation See Shunt S21 Probe Tip on page 272 CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine TraceName Result Creates a trace and assigns a channel number a name and a measurement parame ter to it The tr...

Page 862: ...AT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram area no 2 Usage Setting only Manual operation See S Parameter selector on page 252 Table 8 4 String identifiers for measurement results Note All port numbers in a result identifier refer to logical DUT ports to avoid ambiguities they must be represented by the same number of digits e g S21 or S0201 Th...

Page 863: ...ded to the wave quantities denote a nor mal sample SAM AVG Real Imag AVG or AVG Mag Phase AMP detector B2D1 A1D1 B02D01 A01D01 B2D1 A1D1SAM B2D1 A1D1AVG B2D1 A1D1AMP Ratios of wave quantities with drive ports The strings SAM AVG AMP appended to the wave quantities denote a nor mal sample SAM AVG Real Imag AVG or AVG Mag Phase AMP detector B2G1 A1G1 B02G01 A01G01 B2G1 A1G1SAM B2G1 A1G1AVG B2G1 A1G1...

Page 864: ...raceName Result Creates a trace and assigns a channel number a name and a measurement parame ter to it The trace becomes the active trace in the channel but is not displayed Similar to CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine but in presence of balanced ports this command distinguishes between single ended S parameters for logical ports SSS Li Lj raw single ended S parameters referring to physical ports S P...

Page 865: ...ion CALCulate Chn PHOLd HoldFunc Enables disables or restarts the max hold and the min hold functions Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters HoldFunc MIN MAX OFF MIN Enable the min hold function MAX enable the max hold function OFF disable the max hold or min hold function RST OFF Example RST CALC PHOL MAX Reset the instrument and enable the max hold function CALC P...

Page 866: ...tive recall set Parameters Enable ON Info fields are displayed for all traces for which a limit check is enabled OFF Only the info field for the active trace is displayed if the ripple check is enabled for this trace RST OFF Manual operation See Show Results All Traces on page 354 CALCulate RIPPle FAIL ALL RecallSet Returns a 0 or 1 to indicate whether or not the global ripple limit check has fail...

Page 867: ...ower sweep CALC RIPP CONT DOM PLIN Delete all existing ripple limit ranges and select level units for the domain of the active trace CALC RIPP DATA 1 10 5 3 Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 10 dBm and 5 dBm assigning a ripple limit of 3 dB Usage Setting only Manual operation See Add Insert Delete Delete All Align All on page 356 CALCulate Chn RIPPle DATA RippleL...

Page 868: ...00000000 2000000000 3 1 2000000000 3000000000 5 Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning a ripple limit of 3 dB Define and enable a second ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 2 GHz and 3 GHz assigning a ripple limit of 5 dB CALC RIPP DISP ON Show the ripple limits in the active diagram Manual operation See Add Insert Delete Delet...

Page 869: ...check has failed Tip Use CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent Seg RESult to query the result for a single ripple limit range Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example RST CALC RIPP DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 3 Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning a ripple limit of 3 dB CALC RIPP STAT ON FAIL Switch the limit check on a...

Page 870: ...t Usage Setting only CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent COUNt Queries the number of ripple limit ranges The response is an integer number Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example RST CALC RIPP DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 3 1 2000000000 3000000000 5 Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning a ripple limit of 3 dB Define an...

Page 871: ...fix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Seg Number of the ripple limit range Parameters Limit Ripple limit in the range The unit is adjusted to the format of the active trace CALCulate Chn FORMat Range Virtually no restriction for ripple limit ranges RST n a no ripple limit line defined after a reset Default unit See above Example See CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent Seg STIMulus STAR...

Page 872: ...cond ripple limit range with disabled limit check no limit check results are displayed in the diagram area CALC RIPP SEGM2 RES Query the result for the second range Possible response 0 1 149071925 Usage Query only Manual operation See Ripple Check on page 353 CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent Seg STIMulus STARt FreqPowTime CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent Seg STIMulus STOP StimValue These commands change t...

Page 873: ... limit Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean ON OFF fail beep on or off RST OFF Example CALC RIPP STAT ON SOUN ON Switch the limit check on and activate the fail beep Manual operation See Ripple Fail Beep on page 354 CALCulate Chn RIPPle STATe Boolean Switches the ripple limit check for the active trace on or off Tip Use CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent Seg STA...

Page 874: ...for trace no Chn Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean ON OFF smoothing on or off RST OFF Example See CALCulate Chn SMOothing APERture Manual operation See Smoothing on page 333 CALCulate Chn SMOothing APERture SmoothAperture Defines how many measurement points are averaged to smooth the trace Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Para...

Page 875: ...Culate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RDOMain USER 879 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RDOMain USER SHOW 879 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RDOMain USER STARt 880 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RDOMain USER STOP 880 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP REFerence 880 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RESult 881 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RLEVel 881 CALCulate Chn STA...

Page 876: ...nual operation See Min Max Peak Peak Mean Std Dev RMS on page 327 CALCulate Chn STATistics STATe AREA HorizontalPos VerticalPos Moves the statistics info field for the active trace Chn to one of nine predefined posi tions in the active diagram Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters HorizontalPos LEFT MID RIGHt Horizontal position VerticalPos TOP MID BOTTom Vertical ...

Page 877: ...R SHOW Boolean Displays or hides range limit lines for the evaluation range selected via CALCulate Chn STATistics DOMain USER Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean ON OFF range limit lines on or off RST OFF Example See CALCulate Chn STATistics DOMain USER Manual operation See Range Limit Lines On on page 332 CALCulate Chn STATistics DOMain USER STARt Start ...

Page 878: ...mat For complex valued traces Smith Polar this determines how the MEAN STDDev MAX MIN RMS and PTPeak statistics are calculated see CALCulate Chn STATistics RESult Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Format ZVAB IMPedance ADMittance ZVAB The results are based on unformatted wave quantities voltages IMPedance The results are based on resistance values ADMittance Th...

Page 879: ...ser defined ranges as the reference range for compression point calculation Only applies if CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP REFerence is set to RANGe The selected range can then be configured with the CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RDOMain USER STARt CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RDOMain USER STOP and CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RDOMain USER SHOW commands Suffix Chn ...

Page 880: ...ffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Stop Stop value of the related range Manual operation See Ref Range on page 331 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP REFerence ReferenceValue Defines how the reference value small signal value for the compression point calcu lation is calculated Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters ReferenceValu...

Page 881: ... phase formatted traces the response value at the compression point Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example RST SWE TYPE POW Select a power sweep with default CW frequency and sweep range CALC STAT NLIN COMP LEV 2 Define a compression value of 2 dB CALC STAT NLIN COMP RES Query the compression point results Cmp In Cmp Out An execution error message error no 200 is retur...

Page 882: ...nored Manual operation See Selected Marker on page 331 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RPHase Phase Manually defines the reference phase for compression point calculation on phase for matted traces Only applies if CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP REFerence is set to DVALue For dB formatted traces the reference level can be set using CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RLEVel Suffix Ch...

Page 883: ... Chn STATistics RESult Result Returns a single statistical parameter of the trace no Chn or all parameters It is not necessary to display the info field CALCulate Chn STATistics STATe ON before using this command Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Query parameters Result MEAN STDDev MAX MIN RMS PTPeak PEAK2p ELENgth PDELay GAIN SLOPe FLATness ALL MEAN return arithmetic mea...

Page 884: ...owing an S parameter on a dB Mag scale CALC FORM POL STAT RES MAX Display the trace in a polar diagram and re calculate the maxi mum The result corresponds to the previous result but is con verted to a unitless linear value Usage Query only Manual operation See Min Max Peak Peak Mean Std Dev RMS on page 327 CALCulate Chn STATistics RMS STATe Boolean CALCulate Chn STATistics SFLatness STATe Boolean...

Page 885: ...CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPASs DCSParam EXTRapolate 889 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPFRequency 890 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME RESolution EFACtor 890 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME SPAN 890 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME STARt 891 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME STATe 891 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME STIMulus 892 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME STOP 892 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME WINDow 892 CALCula...

Page 886: ...antities and S parameters Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Model TWAVes PWAVes TWAVes travelling waves PWAVes power waves RST TWAVes Example See SENSe Ch PORT PhyPt ZREFerence Manual operation See Renormalization According to Theory of on page 261 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME TYPE TransformType Selects the time domain transformation type Suffix Chn Channel num...

Page 887: ...99 s to 99 99999999999 s Increment 0 1 ns RST 1 5E 009 s Default unit s Example RST CALC TRAN TIME STAT ON Reset the instrument activating a frequency sweep and enable the time domain transformation for the default trace CALC TRAN TIME CENT 0 SPAN 5ns Set the center time to 0 ns and the time span to 5 ns Manual operation See Time Start Time Stop Time Center Time Span on page 388 Note If the x axis...

Page 888: ... number used to identify the active trace Parameters Algorithm KFSTop KDFRequency KSDFrequency KFSTop keep stop frequency and number of points KDFRequency keep frequency gap and number of points KSDfrequency keep stop frequency and approximate fre quency gap Example See CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME TYPE Manual operation See Set Harmonic Grid and Keep on page 315 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPASs ...

Page 889: ... assume the extrapolation to be more trustworthy CALC TRAN TIME RES EFAC 3 Select a resolution enhancement factor of 3 in order to improve the resolution in time domain Manual operation See DC Value on page 315 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPASs DCSParam CONTinuous Boolean Determines whether continuous extrapolation for the DC value is enabled Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active ...

Page 890: ... CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME RESolution EFACtor REfactor Defines the resolution enhancement factor for the time domain transform Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters REfactor Resolution enhancement factor Range 1 to 10 Increment 0 1 RST 1 no resolution enhancement Example See CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPASs DCSParam Manual operation See Resolution Enh on page ...

Page 891: ...in transformation for the default trace CALC TRAN TIME STAR 0 STOP 10 ns Set the start time to 0 ns and the stop time to 10 ns Manual operation See Time Start Time Stop Time Center Time Span on page 388 Note If the x axis is scaled in distance units CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME XAXis DISTance then the start value is entered in m the range and default value changes accordingly CALCulate Chn TRANsfo...

Page 892: ...e diagram in time domain Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters StopTime Stop time of the diagram Range 99 999999999998 s to 100 s Increment 0 1 ns RST 4E 009 s Default unit s Example See CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME STARt Manual operation See Time Start Time Stop Time Center Time Span on page 388 Note If the x axis is scaled in distance units CALCulate Chn TRANsfor...

Page 893: ...me domain transformation for the default trace CALC TRAN TIME XAX DIST Convert the x axis scaling to distance units Manual operation See Time Distance on page 389 8 3 1 21 CALCulate TRANsform DTFault The CALCulate TRANsform DTFault commands set up and control a distance to fault measurement with option R S ZNB ZNBT K3 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault DEFine 894 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault DELet...

Page 894: ...permittivity εr of the cable type CblAtt i Attenuation value i in the frequency dependent attenuation table of the cable type Default unit dB m CblFreq i Frequency i in the frequency dependent attenuation table of the cable type Default unit Hz Example CALCulate TRANsform DTFault DEFine My cable type 1 1 0 01 1GHz 0 015 2GHz 0 012 3GHz Defines a new cable type My cable type with relative permittiv...

Page 895: ...Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters DtfSelectCable Name of the cable type Example CALCulate1 TRANsform DTFault SELect 5088 HFLR Selects cable type 5088 HFLR Manual operation See Cable Type on page 321 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault CENTer Center CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault SPAN Span Defines the distance window of the Distance to Fault measurement using its center and s...

Page 896: ...tF limit violation FaultNo FaultNo must be between 1 and CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK COUNt The peak data are returned as value pair distance response value Peaks are numbered according to their distance fault no 1 has the smallest distance Use CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK STATe to enable DtF limit checking and CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK THReshold to set the fault limit S...

Page 897: ... CALCulate1 TRANsform DTFault STATe ON makes the active trace of channel 1 a DtF trace CALCulate1 TRANsform DTFault PEAK THReshold 30 sets the DtF limit to 30 dB Options R S ZNB ZNBT K3 Manual operation See Fault Limit on page 322 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault POINts If the active trace of channel Chn is a Distance to Fault DtF trace this command starts the Auto Number of Points calculation see ...

Page 898: ... Defines the window of the Distance to Fault measurement using its start and stop dis tance See also CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault CENTer and CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault SPAN Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Start Stop Start stop distance Default unit m Example CALCulate1 TRANsform DTFault STARt 1 STOP 3 Defines the DtF distance window of the active trac...

Page 899: ... ended and balanced port de embedding and activate the de embedding function The circuit models are referenced by means of predefined character data parameters They are different for single ended and balanced port de embedding Table 8 6 Circuit models for balanced port and port pair de embedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import generic 4 port s4p no circuit model STSL Serial T...

Page 900: ... 9163 02 53 Parameter Circuit model Pictogram CSSL Serial Cs shunt L LSSC Serial Ls shunt C CSSC Serial Cs shunt C LSSL Serial Ls shunt L SLCS Shunt L serial Cs SCLS Shunt C serial Ls SCCS Shunt C serial Cs SLLS Shunt L serial Ls SCPI Command Reference ...

Page 901: ...eter Circuit model Pictogram STSG Serial Touchstone s2p data shunt C SGST Shunt C serial Touchstone s2p data GSSL Serial Cs shunt L LSSG Serial Ls shunt C GSSG Serial Cs shunt C SLGS Shunt L serial Cs SGLS Shunt C serial Ls SGGS Shunt C serial Cs SCPI Command Reference ...

Page 902: ...ingle ended port embedding deembedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import generic 2 port no circuit model CSL Serial C shunt L LSC Serial L shunt C CSC Serial C shunt C LSL Serial L shunt L SLC Shunt L serial C SCL Shunt C serial L SCC Shunt C serial C SCPI Command Reference ...

Page 903: ...ual 1173 9163 02 53 Parameter Circuit model Pictogram SLL Shunt L serial L SHLC Shunt L shunt C GSL Serial C shunt L LSG Serial L shunt C GSG Serial C shunt C SGL Shunt C serial L SLG Shunt L serial C SGG Shunt C serial C SCPI Command Reference ...

Page 904: ...rential match embedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import generic 2 port no circuit model SHLC Shunt L shunt C CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt STATe 906 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters C Cmp 907 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters DATA Port 908 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks ...

Page 905: ...s DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt PARameters R Cmp 919 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt TNDefinition 919 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding group STATe 920 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding group PARameters C 920 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding group PARameters G 921 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding gro...

Page 906: ...Mbedding PhyPt STATe 938 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters DATA 938 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters C Cmp 939 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters G Cmp 940 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters L Cmp 941 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PA...

Page 907: ...del Capacitance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters C Cmp CircuitModel Specifies the capacitance value C Cmp in the different circuit models for balanced port deembedding In the query form the Capacitance parameter must be omitted The command returns the capacitance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number balanced ...

Page 908: ... port network but no addi tional port assignment Use CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt TNDefinition to select the adequate circuit model before executing this command MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt to load circuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R S ZNB ZNBT s file system Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number Port Port assignm...

Page 909: ...Logical port number balanced port Cmp Number of conductance in circuit model The total number of conductances depends on the selected circuit model Parameters Conductance Conductance G Cmp for the specified circuit model Range 1kS to 1 kS Increment 1 nS 1E 9 S RST 0 S Default unit Siemens SI unit symbol S Parameters for setting and query CircuitModel STSG SGST GSSL LSSG GSSG SLGS SGLS SGGS Possibl...

Page 910: ...ry the default inductance L1 for the Serial Cs shunt L circuit model The response is 1E 009 1 nH CALC TRAN VNET BAL DEEM PAR L1 CSSL 2 2E 9 Increase the inductance to 2 2 nH Manual operation See Network on page 596 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters R Cmp CiruitModel Resistance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters R Cmp CiruitMo...

Page 911: ...0000 10000000000 0 CALC TRAN VNET BAL DEEM PAR R3 CSSL 2 2E 3 Increase the resistance R3 to 2 2 kΩ Manual operation See Network on page 596 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt TNDefinition CircuitModel Selects the circuit model for balanced port deembedding Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number balanced port Parameters CircuitModel FIMPort STSL STSC SLST SCST C...

Page 912: ...citance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt PARameters C Cmp CiruitModel Specifies the capacitance value C Cmp in the different circuit models for balanced port embedding In the query form the Capacitance parameter must be omitted The command returns the capacitance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number balanced port Cmp Numb...

Page 913: ...rk but no additional port assignment Use CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt TNDefinition to select the adequate circuit model before executing this com mand MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch BALanced EMBedding LogPt to load cir cuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R S ZNB ZNBT s file system Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number Port Port assignment for two 2 ...

Page 914: ...gical port number balanced port Cmp Number of conductance in circuit model The total number of conductances depends on the selected circuit model Parameters Conductance Conductance G Cmp for the specified circuit model Range 1kS to 1 kS Increment 1 pS 1E 12 S RST 0 S Default unit Siemens SI unit symbol S Parameters for setting and query CircuitModel STSG SGST GSSL LSSG GSSG SLGS SGLS SGGS Possible...

Page 915: ...ry the default inductance L1 for the Serial Cs shunt L circuit model The response is 1E 009 1 nH CALC TRAN VNET BAL EMB PAR L1 CSSL 2 2E 9 Increase the inductance to 2 2 nH Manual operation See Network on page 596 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt PARameters R Cmp CircuitModel Resistance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt PARameters R Cmp CircuitModel...

Page 916: ... L circuit model The response is 10000000000 10000000000 0 CALC TRAN VNET BAL EMB PAR R3 CSSL 2 2E 3 Increase the resistance R3 to 2 2 kΩ Manual operation See Network on page 596 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt TNDefinition CircuitModel Selects the circuit model for balanced port embedding Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number balanced port Parameters Circuit...

Page 917: ...d port Cmp Must be omitted or set to 1 Parameters CircuitModel SHLC Currently only the Shunt L Shunt C lumped element model is supported Capacitance Range 1mF to 1 mF Increment 1 fF 1E 15 F RST 1 pF 1E 12 F Default unit F Manual operation See Network on page 602 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt PARameters DATA Interchange SParamTrcs Defines a Differential Match Embeddi...

Page 918: ...ing In the query form the Conductance parameter must be omitted Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number balanced port Cmp Must be omitted or set to 1 Parameters CircuitModel SHLC Currently only the Shunt L Shunt C lumped element model is supported Conductance Range 10 MS to 10 MS Increment 1 μS 1E 6 F RST 0 S Default unit S iemens Manual operation See Network on page 602 CALCulate Ch TR...

Page 919: ...ter must be omitted Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number balanced port Cmp Must be omitted or set to 1 Parameters CircuitModel SHLC Currently only the Shunt L Shunt C lumped element model is supported Resistance Range 10 MΩ to 10 MΩ Increment 1 mΩ 1E 3 Ω RST 0 Ω Default unit Ohm Manual operation See Network on page 602 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt TND...

Page 920: ... deembedding CALC TRAN VNET GLO DEEM PAR R SL 2 2E 3 CALC TRAN VNET GLO DEEM ON Increase the resistance for the Shunt L circuit model to 2 2 kΩ and enable deembedding Manual operation See Active on page 569 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding group PARameters C CircuitModel Capacitance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding group PARameters C CircuitModel Specifies the c...

Page 921: ...und loop embedding Suffix Ch Channel number group Port group DUT number If multiple port groups are configured see SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORts and CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop GROup is ON then each port group can have its own de embedding models Parameters Conductance Conductance G for the specified circuit model Range 1kS to 1 kS Increment 1 nS 1E 9 S RST 0 S Default unit Siemens SI unit...

Page 922: ...L SL 2 2E 9 Increase the inductance to 2 2 nH Manual operation See Network on page 599 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding group PARameters R CircuitModel Resistance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding group PARameters R CircuitModel Specifies the resistance value R in the different circuit models for ground loop deem bedding Suffix Ch Channel number group Port group ...

Page 923: ...e Ch GROup Grp PPORts and CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop GROup is ON then each port group can have its own de embedding models Parameters CircuitModel FIMPort SL SC SG Possible circuit models character data see Circuit models for ground loop port embedding deembedding Example See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding group STATe on page 920 Manual operation See Network on page...

Page 924: ...value C in the different circuit models for ground loop embedding Suffix Ch Channel number group Port group DUT number If multiple port groups are configured see SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORts and CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop GROup is ON then each port group can have its own de embedding models Parameters Capacitance Capacitance C for ground loop embedding Range 1mF to 1 mF Increment 1 fF 1E...

Page 925: ...uctance G for the specified circuit model Range 1kS to 1 kS Increment 1 pS 1E 12 S RST 0 S Default unit Siemens SI unit symbol S Parameters for setting and query CircuitModel SG Possible circuit models character data see Table 8 8 Manual operation See Network on page 599 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding group PARameters L CircuitModel Inductance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLO...

Page 926: ...uitModel Resistance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding group PARameters R CircuitModel Specifies the resistance value R in the different circuit models for ground loop embed ding Suffix Ch Channel number group Port group DUT number If multiple port groups are configured see SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORts and CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop GROup is ON then each port group can have...

Page 927: ...ve its own de embedding models Parameters CircuitModel FIMPort SL SC SG Possible circuit models character data see Circuit models for ground loop port embedding deembedding RST FIMPort Example See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding group STATe on page 923 Manual operation See Network on page 599 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop GROup Boolean If set to ON 1 each port group defin...

Page 928: ...tion See Add Delete on page 566 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId STATe arg0 Enables or disables the deembedding function for port set or port pair ListId It is allowed to change the deembedding network while embedding is enabled Suffix Ch Channel number ListId Index of the affected port set Parameters arg0 OFF 0 Deembedding inactive ON 1 Deembedding active RST OFF 0 Exampl...

Page 929: ...r to be created Parameters PP_First PP_Second PP_First Sequence of port pairs each one consisting of two different ports The port pairs don t have to be disjoint Example See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId STATe Usage Setting only Manual operation See Add Delete on page 566 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId PARameters C 1 2 3 CircuitModel Capacitan...

Page 930: ...Model Specifies the conductance value G i in the different lumped circuit models for port pair deembedding In the query form the Conductance parameter must be omitted The command returns the conductance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number ListId Index of the affected port pair see CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId DEFine 1 2 3 1 2 3 Index i of the...

Page 931: ... the numeric suffix is set to 1 Parameters Inductance Inductance L i Range 1 H to 1 H Increment 1 pH 1E 12 H RST 1 nH 1E 9 H Default unit H Parameters for setting and query CircuitModel STSL SLST CSSL LSSC LSSL SLCS SCLS SLLS GSSL LSSG SLGS SGLS Circuit model whose inductance L i shall be set see Table 8 6 Example See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId STATe Manual operation...

Page 932: ...edding ListId STATe Manual operation See Network on page 594 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId TNDefinition arg0 Selects the circuit model for port pair deembedding Suffix Ch Channel number ListId Index of the affected port pair see CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId DEFine Parameters arg0 FIMPort STSL STSC SLST SCST CSSL LSSC CSSC LSSL SLCS SCLS SCCS...

Page 933: ...Culate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId DEFine PP_First PP_Second PP_First Creates one or more port pairs for port set embedding The command can be used repeatedly to extend or partially overwrite the list of port sets for embedding See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PSET EMBedding ListId DEFine for general port set definition Suffix Ch Channel number ListId Index of the defined por...

Page 934: ...el Specifies the capacitance value C i in the different lumped circuit models for port pair embedding In the query form the Capacitance parameter must be omitted The command returns the capacitance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number ListId Index of the affected port pair see CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId DEFine 1 2 3 1 2 3 Index i of the capa...

Page 935: ...te Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId DEFine 1 2 3 1 2 3 Index i of the inductance L i in the related lumped circuit model If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 Parameters Inductance Inductance L i Range 1 H to 1 H Increment 1 pH 1E 12 H RST 1 nH 1E 9 H Default unit H Parameters for setting and query arg0 STSL SLST CSSL LSSC LSSL SLCS SCLS SLLS GSSL LSSG SLGS SGLS Circuit mode...

Page 936: ...rg0 STSL STSC SLST SCST CSSL LSSC CSSC LSSL SLCS SCLS SCCS SLLS GSSL LSSG SLGS SGLS Circuit model whose resistance R i shall be set see Table 8 6 Example See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId STATe Manual operation See Network on page 594 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId PARameters G 1 2 3 arg0 Conductance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBeddin...

Page 937: ...te Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId DEFine Parameters CircuitModel FIMPort STSL STSC SLST SCST CSSL LSSC CSSC LSSL SLCS SCLS SCCS SLLS STSG SGST GSSL LSSG GSSG SLGS SGLS SGGS Circuit model to be used for the addressed port pair see Table 8 6 Example See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId STATe Manual operation See Network on page 594 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETwor...

Page 938: ...ile deembedding is enabled Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Parameters Boolean ON deembedding active OFF deembedding inactive RST OFF Example CALC TRAN VNET SEND DEEM TND CSL Select the Serial C shunt L circuit model for deembedding CALC TRAN VNET SEND DEEM PAR R2 CSL 2 2E 3 CALC TRAN VNET SEND DEEM ON Increase the resistance R2 for the Serial C shunt L circuit model to 2 2 kΩ a...

Page 939: ...orks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters C Cmp CircuitModel Specifies the capacitance value C Cmp in the different circuit models for single ended port embedding In the query form the Capacitance parameter must be omitted The command returns the capacitance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Cmp Number of capacitance in circuit model The total...

Page 940: ...deembedding In the query form the Conductance parameter must be omitted Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Cmp Number of the conductance component in the circuit model The total number of conductances depends on the selected circuit model Parameters Conductance Conductance G Cmp for the specified circuit model Range 1kS to 1 kS Increment 1 nS 1E 9 S RST 0 S Default unit Siemens SI...

Page 941: ... pH 1E 12 H RST 1 nH 1E 9 H Default unit H Parameters for setting and query CircuitModel CSL LSC LSL SLC SCL SLL SHLC GSL LSG SLG SGL Possible circuit models character data see Table 8 7 Example RST CALC TRAN VNET SEND DEEM PAR L1 SLL Query the default inductance L1 for the Shunt L serial L circuit model The response is 1E 009 1 nH CALC TRAN VNET SEND DEEM PAR L1 SLL 2 2E 9 Increase the inductance...

Page 942: ...rial C shunt L circuit model The response is 10000000 0 CALC TRAN VNET SEND DEEM PAR R2 CSL 2 2E 3 Increase the resistance R2 to 2 2 kΩ Manual operation See Network on page 580 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt TNDefinition CircuitModel Selects the circuit model for single ended port deembedding Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Parameters CircuitModel FIM...

Page 943: ...nes a dembedding network for a single ended port based on the given S Parame ter traces Use CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt TNDefinition to select the adequate circuit model before executing this com mand MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch SENDed EMBedding PhyPt to load circuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R S ZNB ZNBT s file system Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physi...

Page 944: ...F 1E 15 F RST 1 pF 1E 12 F Default unit F Parameters for setting and query CircuitModel CSL LSC CSC SLC SCL SCC SHLC GSL LSG GSG SLG SGL SGG Possible circuit models character data see Table 8 7 Example RST CALC TRAN VNET SEND EMB PAR C2 CSC Query the default capacitance C2 for the Serial C shunt C cir cuit model The response is 1E 012 1 pF CALC TRAN VNET SEND EMB PAR C2 CSC 2 2E 12 Increase the ca...

Page 945: ...ET SEND EMB PAR G SHLC 1 Increase the conductance G to 1 Siemens Manual operation See Network on page 580 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters L Cmp CircuitModel Inductance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters L Cmp CircuitModel Specifies the inductance value L Cmp in the different circuit models for single ended port embedding In the que...

Page 946: ...istance parameter must be omitted The command returns the resistance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Cmp Number of resistance in circuit model The total number of resis tances depends on the selected circuit model Parameters Resistance Resistance R Cmp for the specified circuit model Range 10 MΩ to 10 MΩ Increment 1 mΩ 1E 3 Ω RST 0 Ω for al...

Page 947: ...TTIMe DATA Data Queries the results of the rise time measurement Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Query parameters Data ALL If omitted a single numeric value is returned If ALL is specified the result consists of 6 numeric values Furthermore the inter pretation of the result values depends on the current trace s stimulus axis CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME XAXis See the ta...

Page 948: ... time measurement disabled RST OFF Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Rise Time on page 637 CALCulate Chn TTIMe THReshold ThresholdEnum LowerThreshold UpperThreshold Defines the lower upper threshold for the rise time measurement The thresholds can either be specified by enum constants for the standard 10 90 or 20 80 rise times or as integer percentages Suffix Chn Channel number used to...

Page 949: ...ining a comma separated list of channel numbers and names see example below If all channels have been deleted the response is an empty string Example RST CONF CHAN2 STAT ON NAME New Channel Create channel 2 and assign the channel name New Channel CONF CHAN CAT Query all channels and their names As a default channel no 1 is created on RST the response is 1 Ch1 2 New_Channel CONF CHAN NAME ID New Ch...

Page 950: ... but selected as the active channel OFF delete channel no Ch RST ON for channel no 1 created on RST OFF for all other channels Example See CONFigure CHANnel CATalog Manual operation See New Channel on page 504 CONFigure CHANnel Ch MEASure STATe Boolean Enables or disables the sweep in channel no Ch This command can be used to restrict the measurement in a subset of channels in order to optimize th...

Page 951: ...ONFigure CHANnel Ch NAME ID ChannelName Queries the channel number numeric suffix of a channel with known channel name A channel name must be assigned before CONFigure CHANnel Ch NAME ChannelName CONFigure CHANnel CATalog returns a list of all defined channels with their names Suffix Ch Channel number This suffix is not relevant and may be omitted the command returns the actual channel number Quer...

Page 952: ... in channel no Ch The response is a string containing a comma separated list of trace numbers and names see example If all traces have been deleted the response is an empty string Tip Use CONFigure TRACe CATalog to query the traces in all channels of the active recall set Suffix Ch Channel number Example See CONFigure TRACe CATalog Usage Query only Manual operation See Table Area on page 299 CONFi...

Page 953: ... Ch2Trc2 The response is 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Table Area on page 299 CONFigure TRACe WINDow TraceName Returns the trace number within a diagram which is assigned to the trace TraceName is assigned to A zero is returned when the trace is not assigned displayed The trace number is equal to the WndTr suffix in DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED and similiar commands see example Qu...

Page 954: ...ration See Table Area on page 299 CONFigure TRACe Trc CHANnel NAME TraceName Queries the channel name for an existing trace named TraceName Suffix Trc Trace number This suffix is ignored the trace is referenced by its name Query parameters TraceName Trace name e g Ch2Trc2 Example See CONFigure TRACe CATalog Usage Query only Manual operation See New Channel on page 504 CONFigure TRACe Trc CHANnel N...

Page 955: ...rns a list of all traces in the active recall set with their names Suffix Trc Trace number This suffix is not relevant and may be omitted the command returns the actual trace number Query parameters TraceName Trace name e g Ch2Trc2 Example See CONFigure TRACe CATalog Usage Query only CONFigure TRACe Trc REName OldTraceName NewTraceName Assigns a new name to a trace The trace does not have to be th...

Page 956: ...E DATA 963 CONTrol HANDler F DATA 963 CONTrol HANDler G DATA 963 CONTrol HANDler H DATA 963 CONTrol HANDler A MODE 964 CONTrol HANDler B MODE 964 CONTrol HANDler C MODE 964 CONTrol HANDler D MODE 964 CONTrol HANDler EXTension INDex STATe 964 CONTrol HANDler EXTension RTRigger STATe 965 CONTrol HANDler INPut 965 CONTrol HANDler LOGic 965 CONTrol HANDler OUTPut Pt USER 966 CONTrol HANDler OUTPut Pt ...

Page 957: ...DATA 977 CONTrol Ch SEQuence CLEar ALL 978 CONTrol Ch SEQuence COUNt 978 CONTrol Ch SEQuence Nr DELay 978 CONTrol Ch SEQuence Nr GPIO Port VOLTage 979 CONTrol Ch SEQuence Nr RFFE Bus COMMand DATA 979 CONTrol AUXiliary C DATA DecValue Sets or queries a channel dependent eight bit decimal value to control eight independ ent output signals at the USER PORT connector lines 8 9 10 11 and lines 16 17 18...

Page 958: ...t bit value for an arbitrary channel Ch in binary representation Parameters DecValue Decimal value The values correspond to the following states of the USER PORT connector 0 no signal at any of the no signal at any of the eight pins 8 9 10 11 16 17 18 19 1 output signal at pin 8 2 output signal at pin 9 3 output signal at pins 8 and 9 255 output signal at pins 8 9 10 11 16 17 18 19 Range 0 to 255 ...

Page 959: ...t measurement on the related GPIO pin or ALL GPIO pins Suffix Port 1 10 GPIO port number If ALL currents are queried this suffix is ignored Query parameters ALL ALL Use ALL to measure the currents at all GPIO pins Return values Results Measured currents either a single value or a comma separated list Default unit A Usage Query only Options R S ZN B15 Z15 Var 03 Manual operation See Voltage Current...

Page 960: ...Var 03 Manual operation See Meas on page 515 CONTrol Ch GPIO TIME MeasTime Sets the measurement time for the voltage current measurements on the RFFE and GPIO pins Same functionality as CONTrol Ch RFFE TEST TIME Suffix Ch Channel number This suffix is ignored and can be omitted the measurement time is valid for all channels Parameters MeasTime Measurement sampling averaging time Range 95 μs to 100...

Page 961: ...tive GPIO pin The analyzer firmware automatically selects a suitable shunt resistance which can be queried using CONTrol Ch GPIO Port SHUNt Suffix Ch Channel number Port GPIO port number 1 10 Parameters Current Range Ports 1 to 8 2 10n μA n 1 5 Ports 9 and 10 0 mA 100 mA Note The high resistance configuration of pins 9 and 10 requires FPGA version 6 1 0 or higher For older versions of the R S ZN B...

Page 962: ...e the same current range as pins 1 to 8 Suffix Ch Channel number Port GPIO port 1 10 Example CONTrol1 GPIO1 RANGe 20mA CONTrol1 GPIO1 SHUNt Returns 10 Ω CONTrol1 GPIO1 RANGe 2mA CONTrol GPIO1 TEST CLOCk SHUNt Returns 100 Ω CONTrol1 GPIO1 RANGe 200uA CONTrol GPIO1 SHUNt Returns 1000 Ω CONTrol1 GPIO9 RANGe 0 CONTrol GPIO9 SHUNt Returns 100000000 Ω CONTrol1 GPIO9 RANGe 100mA CONTrol GPIO9 SHUNt Retur...

Page 963: ...nes have negative logic A 0 at a pin corresponds to a high signal a 1 to a low signal The logic can be changed using CONTrol HANDler LOGic POSitive When writing to port G port C must be configured as an output port When writing to port H port C and port D must be configured as output ports see CONTrol HANDler D MODE The queries read data from ports A B C D E F G H If the port is an output port the...

Page 964: ...ther ports Parameters Mode INPut OUTPut INPut Input of data at the port OUTPut Output of data at the port Note RST or Preset do not change the configuration of the Universal Interface Use CONTrol HANDler RESet to restore default values RST n a default Port A and B OUTPut also valid for port F port C and D INPut also valid for port E Ports G and H have mixed default modes Example See CONTrol HANDle...

Page 965: ...Example See CONTrol HANDler EXTension INDex STATe CONTrol HANDler INPut Queries whether a high to low transition occurred at the INPUT 1 line pin 2 of the Universal Interface since the last CONTrol HANDler INPut query The query resets the counter to zero A negative pulse fed to this line also causes the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 lines pins 3 and 4 to change to low Return values NumberOfTrans 0 if no t...

Page 966: ...in 4 The parameters MIN MAX DEF are not supported Note RST or Preset do not change the configuration of the Universal Interface Use CONTrol HANDler RESet to restore default values Parameters BinValue 0 high 1 low RST n a default 0 Example See CONTrol HANDler OUTPut Pt DATA CONTrol HANDler OUTPut Pt DATA BinValue Writes a 0 or 1 to the output ports pin 3 or 4 of the Universal Interface connector Th...

Page 967: ... a default POSitive Example See CONTrol HANDler PASSfail MODE CONTrol HANDler PASSfail MODE Mode Specifies the default logical pass fail state and the timing of the PASS FAIL line pin 33 The PASS FAIL STROBE pin 36 is set after the PASS FAIL line see Chap ter 11 3 4 4 Timing of Control Signals on page 1394 If the mode is PASS or FAIL the PASS FAIL line is returned to its default state when the ana...

Page 968: ...the global pass fail status CONTrol HANDler PASSfail STATus on page 969 is calculated Parameters Policy ALLTests ALLMeas ALLTests the status is PASS if all limit checks in all measure ments traces pass ALLMeas the status is PASS if a limit check is defined for all measurements traces and all limit checks pass It is FAIL if one or more traces have no associated limit check or if at least one limit ...

Page 969: ...gle sweep mode on hold have been swept at least one limit check failed according to the specified pass fail policy CONTrol HANDler PASSfail POLicy NONE no pass fail status available e g because the measure ment is in progress or because no limit check has been defined RST n a Example Preparations Configure and enable a limit check Start a mea surement and wait until the sweep is complete CONTrol H...

Page 970: ...OLTage OUTPut Suffix Ch Channel number Usage Event Options R S ZN B15 Z15 Var 03 Manual operation See Set on page 512 CONTrol Ch RFFE TEST TIME MeasTime Sets the measurement time for the voltage current measurements on the RFFE and GPIO pins Same functionality as CONTrol Ch GPIO TIME Suffix Ch Channel number This suffix is ignored and can be omitted the measurement time is valid for all channels P...

Page 971: ...s 2 and 3 specify the command number and the remaining digits represent the data part with up to 17 bytes 0 2 32 or 34 hex digits Manual operation See RFFE Command on page 510 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus COMMand SEND CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus COMMand SEND BytesToRead Sends the RFFE command for channel Ch and RFFE bus interface Bus In its set form it is a pure write command In its query form the command attempts...

Page 972: ...q on page 510 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus SETTings FREQuency ClockFrequency Sets gets the clock frequency for channel Ch and RFFE bus Bus Suffix Ch Channel number Bus 1 or 2 RFFE bus number Parameters ClockFrequency Clock rate Possible values are 52 1664 MHz 52 1663 MHz 52 2 MHz Range 31 25 kHz to 26 MHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See CLK VIO VLow VHigh on page 510 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus SETTings VOLTa...

Page 973: ...al their values cannot be set independently The output voltages are applied using CONTrol Ch RFFE TEST OUTPut the volt age current measurements are started using CONTrol Ch RFFE TEST SENSe TRIGger Suffix Ch Channel number Bus RFFE bus interface 1 or 2 Parameters OutputVoltage Range 0 V to 2 5 V Increment 1 mV RST 0 V Default unit V Example CONTrol RFFE1 TEST DATA 1V CONTrol RFFE1 TEST CLOC DATA an...

Page 974: ...s R S ZN B15 Z15 Var 03 Manual operation See Range Shunt on page 512 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk SHUNt CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST DATA SHUNt CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST VIO SHUNt Returns the shunt resistance in Ω selected by the analyzer firmware for the config ured current range see CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST VIO RANGe The dependency between current range and shunt resistance is displayed in the tabl...

Page 975: ...E Bus TEST DATA CURRent CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk CURRent CONTrol RFFE Bus TEST VIO CURRent Returns the results of the current measurement on the related RFFE pin Suffix Bus RFFE bus Return values Measured Measured current Usage Query only Options R S ZN B15 Z15 Var 03 Manual operation See Voltage Current on page 513 CONTrol Ch SEGMent Nr SEQuence COUNt For segmented sweeps this command queries ...

Page 976: ...witch sequences are defined using CONTrol Ch SEGMent Nr SEQuence Nr RFFE Bus COMMand DATA and CONTrol Ch SEGMent Nr SEQuence Nr GPIO Port VOLTage Suffix Ch Channel number Nr Segment number Nr Sequence number defining the order in which the commands shall be executed For every channel segment and RFFE interface the sequence numbers must be consecutive starting at 1 reusing a sequence number overwri...

Page 977: ...RFFE command s to be executed at the start of each segment Command execution on an RFFE interface can be enabled disabled using CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus SETTings STATe Complementary GPIO switches can be defined using CONTrol Ch SEGMent Nr SEQuence Nr GPIO Port VOLTage Suffix Ch Channel number Nr Segment number Nr Sequence number defining the order in which the commands switches shall be executed For ev...

Page 978: ...s COMMand DATA Suffix Ch Channel number Usage Query only Manual operation See Range on page 516 CONTrol Ch SEQuence Nr DELay Delay For unsegmented sweeps this command allows to introduce delays between subse quent sequence steps and between the final sequence step and the sweep segment start The command switch sequences are defined using CONTrol Ch SEQuence Nr RFFE Bus COMMand DATA and CONTrol Ch ...

Page 979: ...ol Ch SEQuence Nr DELay Port GPIO port number Parameters Voltage Range 6 to 12 V Increment 0 005 V Default unit V Manual operation See GPIO columns sweep sequencer table on page 517 CONTrol Ch SEQuence Nr RFFE Bus COMMand DATA Command For unsegmented sweeps this command allows to define the RFFE command s to be executed at the start of each sweep Command execution on an RFFE interface can be enabl...

Page 980: ...STATe 980 DIAGnostic DUMP SIZE 980 DIAGnostic PRODuct OPTion INFO 981 DIAGnostic SERVice RFPower 981 DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction 981 DIAGnostic DEVice STATe Filename Generates a system report and writes it to the specified file See Chapter 10 3 Col lecting Information for Technical Support on page 1377 Setting parameters Filename String parameter containing the file name If no path is specified t...

Page 981: ...DESC On a R S ZNB this returns Time Domain Analysis if installed Usage Query only Manual operation See Software Option Info on page 685 DIAGnostic SERVice RFPower Boolean Turns the internal source power at all ports and the power of all external generators on or off This command is equivalent to OUTPut Ch STATe Parameters Boolean ON OFF switch the power on or off RST ON Example DIAG SERV RFP OFF T...

Page 982: ...ified by the numeric suffix Wnd and the trace name is not needed Units for DISPlay commands The DISPlay subsystem contains commands to define particular points in the dia gram e g to set the scale or a reference value Some settings require a numeric value and a physical unit depending on the related parameter type The following table lists the physical units accepted by the analyzer Parameter type...

Page 983: ...DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y OFFSet 996 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr ZOOM STATe 997 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr ZOOM STARt 998 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr ZOOM STOP 998 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr ZOOM BOTTom 998 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr ZOOM TOP 998 DISPlay ANNotation CHANnel STATe 999 DISPlay ANNotation TRACe STATe 999 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency STATe 999 DISPlay CMAP LIMi...

Page 984: ...r LOWer LOSS QFACtor QFA3 HEADer Bandfilter search result see Display Elements of a Diagram Manual operation See Content Selection on page 668 DISPlay IWINdow MARKer Mk STATe TraceName Boolean Defines the markers to be displayed in the Info Window Suffix Mk Marker number Parameters Boolean 0 Marker Mk of trace TraceName is displayed 1 Marker Mk of trace TraceName is hidden Setting parameters Trace...

Page 985: ... suffix is ignored the command returns a list of all diagrams Example RST DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram no 2 DISP WIND2 NAME S11 Test Diagram Assign a name to the new diagram DISP CAT Query all diagrams and their names As a default diagram no 1 is created upon RST the response is 1 1 2 S11 Test Diagram The first diagram is not named its default name is equal to the diagram number CALC PAR SDEF...

Page 986: ...operation See Maximize Diagram on page 658 DISPlay WINDow Wnd OVERview STATe Boolean Enables the zoom function with an additional overview window for the diagram no Wnd or removes the overview window from a diagram Suffix Wnd Number of the zoomed diagram area Parameters Boolean ON activate the zoom window with overview window OFF remove the overview window RST OFF Example See DISPlay WINDow Wnd TR...

Page 987: ...d but should be kept short enough to be displayed in the diagrams Example RST DISP WIND TITL DATA S21 Test Diagram Define a title for the default diagram area The title is displayed below the top of the diagram area DISP WIND TITL OFF TITL DATA Hide the title The title is no longer displayed but still defined so it can be displayed again Manual operation See Title on page 658 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TR...

Page 988: ...trace in diagram area no 2 assigning the trace number 9 to it DISP WIND2 TRAC9 DELete Release the assignment between trace no 9 and window no 2 The trace can still be referenced with its trace name Ch4Tr1 Usage Event DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr EFEed TraceName Assigns an existing trace CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine TraceName to a diagram area Wnd and displays the trace Use DISPlay WINDow Wnd T...

Page 989: ...H4TR1 after executing the program example below an error message 114 Header suffix out of range is generated You can open the Trace Manager dialog to obtain an overview of all channels and traces including the traces that are not displayed Suffix Wnd Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe ON WndTr Trace number used to distinguish the traces of the same dia ...

Page 990: ...m area This suffix is ignored the command affects traces in all diagram areas WndTr Trace number This suffix is ignored the trace is referenced by its name Parameters TraceName DALL all data traces MALL all memory traces string single trace identified by its trace name string param eter e g Trc4 Boolean ON OFF display or hide traces Example RST DISP TRAC SHOW Trc1 Reset the analyzer creating the d...

Page 991: ...tion See Stimulus on page 335 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe AUTO Activate TraceName Displays the entire trace in the diagram area leaving an appropriate display margin The trace can be referenced either by its number WndTr or by its name TraceName Suffix Wnd Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe ON This suffix is ignored if the optional TraceName ...

Page 992: ...se commands define the lower bottom and upper top edge of the diagram area Wnd Suffix Wnd Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe ON This suffix is ignored if the optional TraceName parameter is used WndTr Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED This suffix is ignored if the optional TraceName parameter is used Paramete...

Page 993: ... When a new PDIVision value is entered the current RLEVel is kept the same while the top and bottom scaling is adjusted for the new PDIVision value Suffix Wnd Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe ON This suffix is ignored if the optional TraceName parameter is used WndTr Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED This s...

Page 994: ...ffect the value of PDIVision The trace can be refer enced either by its number WndTr or by its name TraceName Suffix Wnd Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe ON This suffix is ignored if the optional TraceName parameter is used WndTr Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED This suffix is ignored if the optional Trace...

Page 995: ...s The reference position is the point on the y axis which should equal the RLEVel Suffix Wnd Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe ON This suffix is ignored if the optional TraceName parameter is used WndTr Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED This suffix is ignored if the optional TraceName parameter is used Param...

Page 996: ... ImaginaryPart Modifies all points of the trace WndTr by means of an added and or a multiplied complex constant The response values M of the trace are transformed according to Suffix Wnd Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe ON WndTr Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED Parameters MagnitudeFactor Multiplied magnitu...

Page 997: ...ed if the optional TraceName parameter is used Parameters Boolean Enable or disable the zoom OFF also restores the original dia gram size after a zoom function was applied OFF TraceName Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present both numeric suffixes are ignored trace names must be unique across different channels and win dows Example RST DISPlay WI...

Page 998: ...t or right border of the zoom window Range See description above RST Start or stop of the analyzer s sweep range Default unit NN TraceName Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present both numeric suffixes are ignored trace names must be unique across different channels and win dows Example See DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr ZOOM STATe Manual operatio...

Page 999: ...hide information element s RST ON Example RST DISP ANN TRAC OFF CHAN ON FREQ OFF Create diagram area no 1 with default trace and hide the trace list Keep the channel list but hide the swept frequency range Manual operation See Trace Info on page 663 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency STATe Boolean Unmasks or masks all stimulus values in the VNA GUI for the active recall set Parameters Boolean ON OFF unm...

Page 1000: ...ine colors are defined via DISPlay CMAP DispEl RGB where DispEl 9 12 The limit line colors are independent of the trace colors OFF all limit lines have the color of the associated trace RST n a a RST does not affect the setting In the fac tory configuration OFF is preset Example DISP CMAP LIMit OFF Use the trace colors for all limit lines associated with each trace Subsequent limit line color defi...

Page 1001: ...fix DispEl Number of the display element as described in the table below Parameters Red Red content of the defined color Range 0 zero intensity corresponding to a 0 in the 24 bit color model to 1 full intensity corresponding to 255 in the 24 bit color model Green Green content of the defined color Range 0 zero intensity corresponding to a 0 in the 24 bit color model to 1 full intensity correspondi...

Page 1002: ...r The marker color depends on the set tings made in previous sessions it is not reset A possible response is 0 0 0 for black markers DISP CMAP MARK OFF Change the marker colors M1 turns red M2 turns green Manual operation See Element on page 665 The numeric suffixes DispEl denote the following display elements DispEl Display Element 1 Background 2 Text 3 Selected Text 4 Grid 5 Reference Line 6 Sam...

Page 1003: ...C3 FEED Trc3 Create a new trace named Trc3 and display the trace in a new diagram area no 3 The new trace is not red Manual operation See General Trace Colors per Diagram on page 666 DISPlay CMAP TRACe RGB TraceName Red Green Blue TraceStyle TraceWidth Defines the color style and width of a trace referenced by its name based on the Red Green Blue color model Use the generalized command DISPlay CMA...

Page 1004: ...the diagrams are arranged one on top of the other HORizontal the diagrams are arranged in horizontal rows VERTical the diagrams are arranged in vertical rows GRID the diagrams are arranged as a rectangular matrix The number of rows and columns is as defined with command DISPlay LAYout GRID Example See DISPlay LAYout GRID Manual operation See Split Type on page 661 DISPlay LAYout APPLy LayoutId Sel...

Page 1005: ... or DISPlay LAYout EXECute to create more compli cated nested layouts Note The maximum number of diagrams in a layout is 256 Parameters LayoutFormatMode HORizontal VERTical Horizontal or vertical layout see above LayoutData String parameter defining the number of diagrams and their position easy format see above Parameters for setting and query LayoutId Integer value 1 2 Current number used by oth...

Page 1006: ... 256 Parameters LayoutData String parameter defining the number of diagrams and their position executable format see above Example See Creating Diagrams Manual operation See Additional Functionality SCPI Commands on page 661 DISPlay LAYout GRID Rows Columns Defines the number of rows and columns if DISPlay LAYout GRID is set Parameters Rows Range 1 to 16 RST 1 Columns Range 1 to 16 RST 1 Example D...

Page 1007: ...lay MENU KEY EXECute to open one of the dialogs Usage Query only DISPlay MENU KEY EXECute MenuKey Opens the dialog identified by MenuKey Use DISPlay MENU KEY ACTion CATalog to display the available opener IDs Note that no error is generated if a valid MenuKey is specified but the dialog cannot be opended for any other reason Setting parameters MenuKey Identifier of a dialog opener Example RST DISP...

Page 1008: ...ble softtool tabs as a comma separated list of strings Use DISPlay MENU KEY SELect to activate one of the tabs Usage Query only DISPlay RFSize RelFontSize Defines the size of the fonts in the diagram on a relative scale Parameters RelFontSize Relative font size Range 80 to 170 RST 100 Default unit percent Example RST DISP RFS 80 Use smaller fonts to gain more space for the traces in the dia gram M...

Page 1009: ...ptional Length parameter is needed for REAL format only It defines the length of the floating point numbers in bits Valid values are 32 and 64 RST ASCII The default length of REAL data is 32 bits single precision Example FORM REAL 32 Select real data format SYST COMM GPIB RTER EOI Set the terminator to EOI During a calibration CORR CDAT REFLTRACK 1 0 Query a system error correction term The data i...

Page 1010: ...ate Initializes the print according to the current HCOPy configuration Example HCOP DEST Printer_name Select the printer for the output of screen data HCOP Start printing Usage Event Manual operation See Print on page 609 HCOPy DESTination PrinterName Selects a printer name or file as destination for the screen output Parameters PrinterName String variable containing the printer name One of the pr...

Page 1011: ...VG scalable vector graphics format XML based RST n a RST does not affect the printer configuration Example HCOP DEV LANG BMP Select Windows bitmap format for printer files MMEM NAME C Screenshots PLOT1 BMP Define a printer file name and specify an existing directory with out creating the file HCOP DEST MMEM HCOP Select Print to file and create the printer file specified before HCOPy ITEM ALL Selec...

Page 1012: ... list in the printed output and start printing HCOPy ITEM TIME STATe Boolean Qualifies whether or not the printed output contains the current date and time Parameters Boolean ON OFF date and time is included or excluded RST n a RST does not affect the printer configuration Example HCOP ITEM ALL Select the complete information to be printed HCOP ITEM TIME ON HCOP Include the data and time in the pr...

Page 1013: ...E COL UDEF Select the user defined color scheme Manual operation See Print Options on page 611 HCOPy PAGE MARGin BOTTom LowMargin Defines the distance between the bottom of the page and the bottom of the printed information Parameters LowMargin Lower margin Range 0 01 mm to 10000 mm RST n a RST does not affect the printer configuration Example HCOP PAGE MARG BOTT 10 TOP 10 Set an upper and a lower...

Page 1014: ...er and a lower margin of 1 cm HCOPy PAGE ORIentation Orientation Defines the orientation of the printed page Switching between LANDscape and PORTrait rotates the hardcopy result by 90 degrees No other settings are changed Parameters Orientation LANDscape PORTrait LANDscape long edge of the paper is the top of the page PORTrait short edge of the paper is the top of the page RST n a RST does not aff...

Page 1015: ...s Sweeps can be read using CALCulate Chn DATA NSWeep FIRSt SDATa count This command is not supported in the ZVR or ZVABT compatibility modes Note In contrast to all other commands of the analyzer the INITiate Ch IMMediate commands have been implemented for overlap ped execution see Chapter 7 4 Command Processing on page 730 Example See INITiate Ch CONTinuous Usage Event Manual operation See Restar...

Page 1016: ...umber If the channel number does not exist the ana lyzer returns an error message If the ZVR or ZVABT compat ibility mode is active and INITiate Ch IMMediate SCOPe ALL is selected this suffix is ignored Example See INITiate Ch CONTinuous Usage Event Manual operation See Restart Sweep on page 413 INITiate Ch IMMediate SCOPe Scope Selects the scope of the single sweep sequence The setting is applied...

Page 1017: ... current sweep Chan nel no 2 is still measured continuously INIT1 Activate a new single sweep in channel no 1 Channel no 2 is still measured continuously INIT CONT ALL OFF Activate single sweep mode for all channels The measurement in channel no 2 is also stopped after the current sweep INIT ALL Re start a single sweep in both channels Example Alternative settings using the R S ZVAB compatibility ...

Page 1018: ...ry only INSTrument SMATrix Boolean In set direction this command perfoms a default setup or clear of the switch matrix RF connections in get direction it queries whether at least one RF connection to a switch matrix is configured Parameters Boolean ON 1 setting adds all registered switch matrices to the RF configuration performing a default assignment of VNA ports and test ports OFF 0 setting remo...

Page 1019: ...19 MEMory DELete NAME 1020 MEMory DELete ALL 1020 MEMory SELect 1020 MEMory CATalog Returns the names of all loaded recall sets Example RST MEM DEF SET_2 Create a recall set named Set_2 and make it the active recall set MEM CAT Query all recall sets The response is Set1 SET_2 MMEM STOR STAT 1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna RecallSets Set_2 znx MEM DEL Set_2 znx Store the active recall ...

Page 1020: ...all sets The query MEM CAT returns an empty string The local screen shows no recall set Usage Event MEMory SELect RecallSet Selects a recall set as the active recall set or returns the name of the active recall set Parameters RecallSet String parameter to specify the recall set Example RST MEM DEF SET_2 Create a recall set named SET_2 and make it the active recall set MEM SEL Set1 Activate the def...

Page 1021: ...lus the special characters _ and Reserved file names are CON AUX COM1 COM4 LPT1 LPT3 NUL and PRN The use of wildcards and is not allowed Public folders in Windows and default file locations To achieve maximum system security most of the folders on the internal hard disk are read only folders Only the following folders can be changed C Users Public C Users Instrument The public and instrument folde...

Page 1022: ...OAD VNETworks Ch PPAir DEEMbedding ListId 1045 MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch PPAir EMBedding ListId 1047 MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt 1048 MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch SENDed EMBedding PhyPt 1049 MMEMory MDIRectory 1049 MMEMory MOVE 1050 MMEMory MSIS 1050 MMEMory NAME 1051 MMEMory RDIRectory 1051 MMEMory STORe CABLe 1051 MMEMory STORe CKIT 1052 MMEMory STORe CKIT WLABel 1052 MMEMory...

Page 1023: ...USER CONVersion Directory CalKitFile Converts an arbitrary e g user defined set of calibration data of the standards in the active calibration unit SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess to Touch stone format and copies it to the specified directory Setting parameters Directory String parameter to specify the directory CalKitFile Name and possibly directory of the cal kit file to be used for the ...

Page 1024: ...ace in bytes used by the listed files excluding subdirectories FreeDiskSpace available free disk space in bytes FileEntry file name blank file size in bytes DirectoryEntry directory name Dir blank Tip Use MMEMory CATalog ALL to query the contents of the current directory and all subdirectories Query parameters Directory String parameter to specify the directory If the directory is omit ted the com...

Page 1025: ...cify the directory If DEFault is used the analyzer selects the default directory C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Example MMEMory CDIRectory C temp sets the current directory to C temp MMEMory CATalog somedir lists the content of C temp somedir See also MMEMory MSIS and the condensed programming example in section Path Independent RC Programs MMEMory CKIT INFO CalKitFile Detail Queries c...

Page 1026: ...rs Filename String parameter to specify the name of the file DataBlock block_data Data in IEEE488 2 block data format The delimiter EOI must be selected to achieve correct data transfer Example MMEM DATA C Users Public TEST01 HCP Query the block data contained in file TEST01 HCP MMEMory DELete File Force Removes a file from the specified directory Setting parameters File Mandatory string parameter...

Page 1027: ...e FavId RecallSetFile Manages the list of favorite recall sets Suffix FavId Position in the favorites list Setting parameters RecallSetFile File path either absolute or relative to the current directory see MMEMory CDIRectory The empty string represents an empty position in the favorites list Note that when a non empty favorite is set the target recall set must exist Example MMEMory CDIRectory DEF...

Page 1028: ...KIT CalKitFile Loads cal kit data from the specified cal kit file Setting parameters CalKitFile String parameter to specify name and directory of the loaded cal kit file If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory Example MMEM LOAD CKIT C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Kits New_kit calkit Load the previously create...

Page 1029: ...e used for one port standards a s2p file for two port standards If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc tory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory RST FirstPort First port number sufficient for one port standards If the port numbers are omitted the cal kit data is valid for all ports SecondPort Second port number for two port standards If the port numbers are omitted the ca...

Page 1030: ...MTCh FMTCh MSMatch FSMatch Standard types for a description refer to table Standard types and their parameters StandardLabel String parameter addressing a particular calibration standard by its label An empty string means that no label is defined TouchstoneFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the Touch stone file to be loaded A s1p file must be used for one port standards a s...

Page 1031: ...ed separately MMEMory MDIRectory An empty string means that no cal kit files will be loaded Example MMEM LOAD CKIT UDIR C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Kits Autoload Specifiy the directory for additionally available cal kits MMEM MDIR C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Kits Autoload Create the specified Autoload directory MMEM STOR CKIT New Kit 1 C Users ...

Page 1032: ... an existing channel ALL applies the selected data set to all channels CalGroupFile String parameter to specify the name of the cal group file to be loaded Cal group files must have the extension cal The directory path must not be specified the analyzer always uses the default cal pool directory C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Data Example MMEM STOR CORR 1 Calgroup1 cal Copy...

Page 1033: ...efault path C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna CALibration DATA Example SENS1 CORR COLL METH DEF Test FRTRans 1 3 Select a bidirectional transmission normalization between ports 1 and 3 as a calibration type for channel 1 CORR COLL SAVE SEL DEF MMEM STOR CORR 1 P1 P3 cal Create a default calibration data set for the selected calibration type and store the data to a cal group file SENS1 COR...

Page 1034: ...ents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Data If there is no link between Ch and the specified file the command has no effect If no file is specified the command resolves any link between Ch and an arbitrary cal group file Example See MMEMory LOAD CORRection Usage Setting only Manual operation See Resolve Pool Link Remove Pool Link on page 502 MMEMory LOAD CORRection TCOefficient Ch TraceFile Trace Load...

Page 1035: ...ALCulate Chn EYE INPut LENGth BITS on page 771 Loading a pattern from file implicitly sets the type of bit stream to USER see CALCulate Chn EYE INPut BPATtern TYPE Setting parameters TraceName Name of the related eye diagram TraceFile String parameter containing the path and file name of the bit pat tern file If the path is omitted the current directory is used see MMEMory CDIRectory Usage Setting...

Page 1036: ...from Touchstone files s n p where n denotes the number of ports The optional parameters TouchstoneFile StimulusOffset ResponseOffset LimLineType are only relevant for Touchstone files For limit files no optional parameters can be set Setting parameters TraceName Name of an existing trace in the active recall set string parame ter The imported limit line is assigned to this trace irrespective of th...

Page 1037: ...s named Trc1 and Trc2 respectively and that limit lines have been defined for Trc1 MMEM STOR LIM TRC1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna LIMitLines Lim_Trc1 limit Store the limit line definition of Trc1 to a limit line file MMEM LOAD LIM TRC2 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna LIMitLines Lim_Trc1 limit Load the previously created limit line file and assign the limit lines to Trc2 M...

Page 1038: ...ly and that ripple limits have been defined for Trc1 MMEM STOR RIPP TRC1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna LIMitLines Lim_Trc1 limit Store the ripple limit definition of Trc1 to a ripple limit file MMEM LOAD RIPP TRC2 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna LIMitLines Lim_Trc1 limit Load the previously created ripple limit file and assign the limits to Trc2 CALC RIPP DISPlay ON Show th...

Page 1039: ...responding instrument state Setting parameters Compatibility 1 this value is used for compatibility with the SCPI standard but is ignored RecallSetFile String parameter to specify the absolute or relative path of the recall set file to be loaded Relative paths are evaluated relative to the current directory see MMEMory CDIRectory Example MMEM STOR STAT 1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna ...

Page 1040: ...arameter is omit ted the first trace in the specified file is imported Example Assume that the current recall set contains a trace named Trc1 MMEM STOR TRAC TRC1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Traces Trc1 s1p Store the current trace data of Trc1 to a trace file MMEM LOAD TRAC TRC1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Traces Trc1 s1p Load the previously created trace file and crea...

Page 1041: ...ferent ports PMAin and PSECondary the FIMPort model requires a single 4 port s4p file but no additional port assignment Use CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt TNDefinition to select the adequate circuit model before executing this command CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters DATA Port to load circuit data from the remote client The query r...

Page 1042: ... Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna VNET Test s2p PMA Load a Touchstone file and assign it to logical port no 2 Manual operation See File Name i Swap Gates on page 568 MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch BALanced EMBedding LogPt TouchstoneFile Interchange Loads data from the specified Touchstone file defining a balanced port circuit model for embedding The balanced port circuit models STSL STSC SLST SCST require t...

Page 1043: ...ence low port num bers towards VNA high port numbers towards DUT SGATes Swapped gates even port numbers towards VNA odd port numbers towards DUT SINCreasing Swapped increasing port sequence high port numbers towards VNA low port numbers towards DUT Example RST SOUR LPOR1 1 2 LPOR2 3 4 Define a balanced port configuration CALC TRAN VNET BAL EMB TND STSL Select the Serial s2p data shunt L circuit mo...

Page 1044: ...chstone file Manual operation See File Name 1 on page 571 MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch GLOop DEEMbedding group TouchstoneFile Loads data from a specified one port s1p Touchstone file defining a ground loop circuit model for deembedding The query returns the name of the loaded file Suffix Ch Channel number group Port group DUT number If multiple port groups are configured see SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORt...

Page 1045: ...of the loaded Touchstone file If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc tory which can be set and queried using MMEMory CDIRectory Example CALC TRAN VNET SEND GLO TND FIMP Select the 1 Port Data s1p circuit model MMEM LOAD VNET GLO EMB C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Embedding Test s1p Load a Touchstone file Manual operation See File Name 1 on page 569 MMEMory LOAD...

Page 1046: ... ted otherwise Interchange FPORts IPORts SGATes SINCreasing FPORts or omitted Standard port sequence odd port numbers towards VNA even port numbers towards DUT IPORts Two port networks inverted port sequence network port 2 towards VNA network port 1 towards DUT 2m port networks m 1 increasing port sequence low port numbers towards VNA high port numbers towards DUT SGATes Swapped gates even port nu...

Page 1047: ...notes the size of the port set but no additional port assignment If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc tory which can be set and queried using MMEMory CDIRectory Port PMAin PSECondary Port assignment for port pairs PMAin Main port first port in port pair PSECondary Secondary port Must be specified for embedding networks that are defined using two s2p files STSL STSC SLST ...

Page 1048: ... this com mand CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters DATA to load circuit data from the remote client The query returns the name of the loaded file Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Parameters TouchstoneFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the loaded Touchstone file If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current dire...

Page 1049: ...o path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc tory which can be set and queried using MMEMory CDIRectory Interchange FPORts IPORts SGATes FPORts or omitted Standard port sequence network port 1 towards VNA network port 2 towards DUT IPORts SGATes Inverted port sequence network port 2 towards VNA network port 1 towards DUT Example CALC TRAN VNET SEND EMB TND FIMP Select the Serial s2p...

Page 1050: ...ile without mov ing it Setting parameters SourceFile NewFile String parameters to specify the name and the path of the file to be copied and the name and the path of the new file Example MMEM MOVE C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna RecallSets SET1 znx D Move file Set1 znx in directory C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna RecallSets to an external storage medium mapped to drive D Usag...

Page 1051: ...e specified directory must exist otherwise no file can be generated If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory RST Hardcopy Example MMEM NAME C Users Public Screenshots PLOT1 BMP Define a printer file name to be stored in the existing directory C Users Public Screenshots without creating the file HCOP DEST MMEM HCOP Select Print to file an...

Page 1052: ...l kits CalKitFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the cal kit file to be created The file is a network analyzer specific cal kit file with the extension calkit If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc tory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory Example MMEM LOAD CKIT C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Kits New Kit 1 calkit Load the pr...

Page 1053: ...or scheme file to be created If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory The default extension manual control for color scheme files is ColorScheme although other extensions are allowed Example See MMEMory LOAD CMAP Usage Setting only Manual operation See Recall Save on page 667 MMEMory STORe CORRection Channel CalGroupFile Copies the corre...

Page 1054: ... Usage Setting only Manual operation See Recall Save on page 497 MMEMory STORe EYE MASK TraceName TraceFile Stores a user defined eye mask to a 7bit ASCII file Setting parameters TraceName Name of the related eye diagram TraceFile String parameter containing the path and file name of the eye mask file If the path is omitted the current directory is used see MMEMory CDIRectory Usage Setting only Op...

Page 1055: ...rent if both are set to comma actually a semicolon will be used as field separator Setting parameters TraceName The name of the eye diagram whose results shall be exported TraceFile Mandatory string parameter containing the path and file name of the file If the path is omitted the current directory is used see MMEMory CDIRectory DecSeparator POINt COMMa Decimal separator RST COMMa FieldSeparator S...

Page 1056: ...ns are allowed If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc tory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory Example RST Reset the analyzer creating the default trace no 1 in channel no 1 CALC MARK ON MARK X 1GHz Create marker no 1 and place it to 1 GHz CALC MARK2 ON MARK2 X 2GHz Create a second marker and place it to 2 GHz MMEM STOR MARK Marker txt Store the marker values to an ASCII...

Page 1057: ...n manual control for sweep segment files is SegList although other exten sions are allowed If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc tory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory Example See MMEMory LOAD SEGMent Usage Setting only Manual operation See Import Export on page 404 MMEMory STORe STATe Compatibility RecallSetFile Stores the configuration data of the current recall set...

Page 1058: ...d trace file Several file formats for trace files are supported The file extensions s n p csv and dat for Touch stone ASCII and Matlab files are mandatory To generate a multiport Touchstone file s2p s3p the channel must contain traces for the full set of S parameters the trc_name is ignored If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory Format...

Page 1059: ...s created for each channel in the active recall set TraceFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the cre ated trace file Several file formats for trace files are supported The file extensions s n p csvc and dat for Touch stone ASCII and Matlab files are mandatory To generate a multiport Touchstone file s2p s3p the channel must contain traces for the full set of S parameters If n...

Page 1060: ... Chn1 csv Store all trace data of channel 1 to a trace file MMEM STOR TRAC CHAN 1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Traces Chn1 s2p Store the four S parameter traces to a two port Touchstone file The Touchstone file will not contain the default trace Trc1 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Save on page 341 MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion COMMent Comment Defines a comment to be added to th...

Page 1061: ...defines whitespace insertion during Touchstone file export If set to ON columns are separated by tabs rather than spaces Parameters Boolean Manual operation See Use TAB instead of blanks on page 681 MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion TRIM Boolean This command defines whitespace insertion during Touchstone file export If set to ON whitespace at the beginning of each line is removed Parameters Boolean Manua...

Page 1062: ...target impedance from options line this is the default if the parameter is ommitted PIMPedance normalize to the individual port reference impe dances see Renormalization of S parameters on page 144 Port Port Physical port numbers Example Suppose that a full two port calibration for ports 1 and 2 and channel 1 has been performed and that a DUT with two bal anced ports is connected The analyzer meas...

Page 1063: ... all ports and the power of all external generators on or off Suffix Ch Channel number This suffix is ignored the setting is valid for all channels Parameters Boolean ON OFF switch the power on or off RST ON Example OUTP OFF Turn off the RF source power Manual operation See RF Off All Channels on page 387 OUTPut Ch UPORt SEGMent Seg STATe Boolean Enables or disables segment bits for the sweep segm...

Page 1064: ... VALue is assigned to segment no Seg in channel no Ch The signals at the USER CONTROL connector reflect the segments bits of the cur rently measured segment The signals are switched on as soon as a measurement in a segment with non zero segment bits is started They are changed whenever a segment with different segment bits is measured The signals at the USER PORT connector are maintained after the...

Page 1065: ...nd segment the output signal changes from pin 16 to pin 17 Manual operation See Optional Columns on page 406 OUTPut Ch UPORt VALue BinValue Sets or queries a channel dependent eight bit binary value to control eight independent output signals at the USER PORT connector lines 8 9 10 11 and lines 16 17 18 19 The output signals are 3 3 V TTL signals which can be used to differentiate between up to 25...

Page 1066: ...cimal representation Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters BinValue Binary value The values correspond to the following states of the USER PORT connector B00000000 no signal at any of the eight pins 8 9 10 11 16 17 18 19 B00000001 output signal at pin 8 B00000010 output signal at pin 9 B00000011 output signal at pins 8 and 9 B11111111 output signal at pins 8 9 10 11 16 17 18 19 Range B00000000 to B1...

Page 1067: ...ommand error Tip Executing batch files command prompt When executing batch scripts or other DOS applications the analyzer does not display any DOS windows the screen is left for the vector network analyzer VNA application The same applies to the Windows NT command prompt cmd exe To access the command prompt proceed as follows Create a batch file e g Start_cmd bat containing the command line start ...

Page 1068: ...be used to establish a simple file based two way communication mechanism to an external application launched by PROGram SELected EXECute see example Parameters IniFile Name and path of the ini file The ini extension may be omitted as it is created automatically by the command The specified path directory must exist If the ini file does not exist it is created SendValue Value for the fixed key Send...

Page 1069: ...arameter is supplied it has to be enclosed in single or double quotes Example PROG INIP c preferences myapp myparameter myvalue startf 123 05 Write two key value pairs into the file c preferences myapp ini The contents of the file look like PARAMETER myparameter myvalue startf 123 05 PROG INIP c preferences myapp myparameter Query the value of the key myparameter in the ini file The response is my...

Page 1070: ... the return value of the executed program PROGram SELected RETVal Example See PROGram SELected EXECute 8 3 14 SENSe Commands The SENSe commands affect the receiver settings of the R S ZNB ZNBT 8 3 14 1 SENSe AVERage The SENSe AVERage commands set sweep averaging parameters The sweep average is a noise reduction technique which consists of calculating each measure ment point as an average of the sa...

Page 1071: ...mple SENS1 AVER COUN 15 AVER ON Set the average factor for channel 1 to 15 the mnemonic SENS1 can be omitted and enable the sweep average AVER COUN 5 CLE Reduce the average factor and restart the average Usage Event Manual operation See Factor On Reset on page 392 SENSe Ch AVERage COUNt AverageFactor Defines the number of consecutive sweeps to be combined for the sweep average Factor Suffix Ch Cha...

Page 1072: ... set the bandwidth of the IF filter measure ment bandwidth The forms BANDwidth and BWIDth are equivalent SENSe Ch BANDwidth RESolution 1072 SENSe Ch BWIDth RESolution 1072 SENSe Ch BANDwidth RESolution SELect 1073 SENSe Ch BWIDth RESolution SELect 1073 SENSe Ch BANDwidth RESolution ResBandw SENSe Ch BWIDth RESolution IF Bandwidth Defines the IF bandwidth of the analyzer measurement bandwidth Value...

Page 1073: ...ion CDATa The SENSe CORRection CDATa commands read or write system error correc tion data SENSe Ch CORRection CDATa ErrorTerm SourcePort LoadPort CorrectionData SENSe Ch CORRection CDATa PORT PhyPt ErrorTerm SourcePort LoadPort CorrectionData Writes or reads system error correction data for a specific channel Ch calibration method SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine and port combi nation Sou...

Page 1074: ...t port j ref j test j 22 21 12 11 j j m m H H H H b a In the two equations above a and b denote the waves at the calibrated reference plane i and j e g the input and output of the 2 port DUT The m waves are the raw measured waves of test port i and j The subscripts ref and test refer to the refer ence and test receivers respectively During the calibration the network analyzer acquires ratios of wa...

Page 1075: ...ort number LoadPort Load port number If the error term is not related to the load port a dummy number can be used e g CORR CDAT REFLTRACK 1 0 CorrectionData Correction data set one complex number per sweep point to be transferred to the analyzer either in ASCII or block data format depending on the current FORMat DATA setting The correc tion data set is assigned to the specified channel error term...

Page 1076: ...ctionData SENSe Ch CORRection SMATrix CDATa PORT PhyPt ErrorTerm SourceTestPort LoadTestPort SourceVNAPort LoadVNAPort CorrectionData Writes or reads system error correction data in the presence of switching matrices Same command structure and logic as for SENSe CORRection CDATa commands except for additional parameters SourceVNAPort and LoadVNAPort that restrict the returned correction data to th...

Page 1077: ...079 SENSe CORRection CKIT ConnType SELect 1080 SENSe CORRection CKIT StandardType 1081 SENSe CORRection CKIT CATalog ConnectorType Returns a list of all cal kits for a given connector type or for all connector types Query parameters ConnectorType Name of the connector type optional Use SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection CATalog to query connector names If omitted the command returns the list of all ca...

Page 1078: ...e calibration kit See Cal kit naming conventions under SENSe CORRection CKIT ConnType LSELect KitLabel String parameter containing the label of the calibration kit usu ally the serial number Setting parameters arg3 DELay ELENgth DELay Agilent modelling ELENgth ZVR compatible modelling Manual operation See Add Copy Delete Standards on page 482 SENSe CORRection CKIT LABel CalKitName KitLabel Assigns...

Page 1079: ...ew Kit 1 calkit from the default cal kit directory CORR CKIT SEL N 50 Ohm New Kit 1 Assign the imported kit to the N 50 Ω connector type assuming that the cal kit name stored in New Kit 1 calkit reads New Kit 1 Manual operation See Cal Kit on page 436 SENSe CORRection CKIT STANdard CATalog CalKitName Returns a list of all standards in a given calibration kit Query parameters CalKitName Name of the...

Page 1080: ...y Agilent modelling Port1 Port2 Optional port restriction one port number for one port standards two port numbers for two port standards Usage Query only SENSe CORRection CKIT ConnType SELect CalKitName Selects the calibration kit to be used for a specified connector type ConnType The kit is identified by its name Tip For connector types with arbitrary user defined names you can use the command SE...

Page 1081: ...h Resistance Port1 Port2 SENSe CORRection CKIT StandardType ConnType CalKitName Port1 Port2 Defines the parameters of a possibly non ideal 1 port or 2 port calibration standard StandardType within a particular cal kit Depending on the standard type only a subset of the parameters may be used see Table 8 12 Suffix StandardType string Standard type For one port standards the first character denotes ...

Page 1082: ...dard Example CORR CKIT FOP N 50 Ohm New Kit 1 0 4000000000 0 0 50 99 2 3 0 22 0 0 0 0 0 Define the properties of the Open f standard for a N 50 Ω con nector type in cal kit New Kit 1 CORR CKIT FOP N 50 Ohm Query the properties of the Open f standard for a N 50 Ω con nector type in the active cal kit CORR CKIT FOP N 50 Ohm New Kit 1 Query the properties of the Open f standard for a N 50 Ω con necto...

Page 1083: ...rameter CalKitName Name of the calibration kit Use SENSe CORRection CKIT CATalog to query cal kit names String parameter CalKitLabel Label e g the serial number of the calibration kit for WLABel com mand only String parameter StandardLa bel Label e g the serial number of the standard String parameter MinFreq MaxFreq Min max frequency for which the circuit model is valid Default unit is Hz DelayPar...

Page 1084: ...llowing parameters Port restrictions are indicated in brackets Table 8 14 Standard types and their parameters std_type Maning MOPen FOPen Open male m or female f MSHort FSHort Short m or f OSHort 1 2 3 MOSHort 1 2 3 FOSHort 1 2 3 Offset short sexless m or f three standards each For user defined connector types only Suffix 1 can be omitted MMTCh FMTCh Match m or f MSMatch FSMatch Sliding match m or...

Page 1085: ...bels Example See SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection CATalog Usage Query only SENSe CORRection CKIT LDELete CalKitName KitLabel Deletes an imported or user defined cal kit which is identified by its cal kit name and label Note It is not possible to modify or store predefined or ideal kits Setting parameters CalKitName String parameter containing an imported or user defined calibra tion kit available on...

Page 1086: ...ta for the labelled cal kit to the cal kit file New Kit 1 2012 05 25 calkit CORR CKIT LDEL New Kit 1 2012 05 25 Delete the kit from the internal memory MMEMory LOAD CKIT C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Kits New Kit 1 2012 05 25 calkit Re load the kit SENSe CORRection CKIT LSELect ConnectorType CalKitName KitLabel Selects the calibration kit to be used specifying its connecto...

Page 1087: ... CKIT ConnType LSELect CalKitName Label Selects the calibration kit to be used for a specified connector type ConnType The kit is identified by its name and label Tip For connector types with arbitrary user defined names and labels you can use the command SENSe CORRection CKIT LSELect Suffix ConnType Connector type one of the following identifiers N50 N75 N 50 Ω or N 75 Ω connectors PC7 PC35 PC292...

Page 1088: ...of a non ideal 1 port or 2 port calibration standard StandardType where a particular cal kit can be addressed by name and label Apart from the additional CalKitLabel parameter the syntax and semantics of this command is identical to Standard types and their parameters Example CORR CKIT FOP WLAB N 50 Ohm New Kit 1 123456 0 4000000000 0 0 50 99 2 3 0 22 0 0 0 0 0 Define the properties of the Open f ...

Page 1089: ...al kit standard previously loaded from Touchstone file using MMEMory LOAD CKIT SDATa or MMEMory LOAD CKIT SDATa WLABel The cal kit is identified by its name and label Query parameters TwoPortStandard MMTHrough MFTHrough FFTHrough MMLine MMLine1 MMLine2 MMLine3 MFLine MFLine1 MFLine2 MFLine3 FFLine FFLine1 FFLine2 FFLine3 MMATten MFATten FFATten MMSNetwork MFSNetwork FFSNetwork Standard type For mo...

Page 1090: ... COLLect CKIT LOAD 1109 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT PORT PhyPt 1110 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection PhyPt 1110 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection GENDers 1111 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection PORTs 1111 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect DELete 1112 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect DISCard 1112 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure ACQuire 1113 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure EXPort 11...

Page 1091: ...ction COLLect AUTO ASSignment DELete ALL 1140 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg ACQuire 1140 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine 1140 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine TPORt 1142 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO SAVE 1142 SENSe Chn CORRection PSTate 1142 SENSe Chn CORRection SSTate 1143 SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT Characterization Genera...

Page 1092: ...Lect AUTO CKIT PASSword Password Enters a password to enable a single password protected action in the automatic cali bration or in the characterization wizard If password protection has been activated manually in the Characterize Cal Unit dialog the password is required for any single execution of one the following commands provided that a cal kit characterization file different from the active c...

Page 1093: ...ss The cal kit file can be saved to a directory on the analyzer to the calibration unit s internal flash memory or to an SD card inserted at the calibration unit if available Similar logic as SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT but with flexible port assignment Setting parameters Characterization Location of the created characterization cal kit file string parameter extension calkit If a path is sp...

Page 1094: ...stPort1 Number of first test port CalUnitPort1 Number of the calibration unit port to whom test port Test Port1 is assigned TestPort2 Number of the second test port Example Prerequisite SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess MyCalU Sets MyCalU as the active calibration unit SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL PORTs abc Queries the ports of characterization abc returns something like 3 N 50 Ohm MALE 4...

Page 1095: ...y con nected according to the previous command the response is 1 2 2 4 3 0 4 1 A zero means that the corresponding analyzer port is not connected to any port of the calibration unit Usage Query only Manual operation See Detect Port Assignment on page 424 SENSe CORRection COLLect AVERage Average Activates automatic averaging which means that the VNA may perform multiple cali bration sweeps and appl...

Page 1096: ...s you to calibrate a subset of the available channels using channel specific ports and calibration types see Chap ter 5 5 8 Parallel Calibration of Multiple Channels on page 182 Enable the MCTYpes mode before defining the calibrations to be performed using SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine Disable the MCTYpes mode after the calibrations were saved using SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE SEL...

Page 1097: ...ration in channel 1 Then connect the Open standard to port 2 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 2 Acquire calibration data for the open on port 2 needed for cali bration in channel 2 Then connect the Short standard to port 2 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected SHORt 2 Acquire calibration data for short on port 2 needed for calibra tions in channel 1 and 2 Then connect the Match s...

Page 1098: ...ORRection COLLect FIXTure ACQuire Manual operation See Auto Length Auto Length and Loss on page 575 SENSe CORRection COLLect PMETer ID PowerMeter TestPort Selects an external power meter for the SMARTerCal and assigns it to an analyzer port Note The command cannot be used unless a power meter is connected via GPIB bus USB or LAN interface and configured in the External Power Meters dialog Paramete...

Page 1099: ...s The standards are reflection or transmission standards and can be connected to arbitrary analyzer ports Note The calibration measurement has a variable timeout Timeout Sweep time Number of sweep points 3 0 1 s The timeout may be reached e g while the measurement waits for the specified trigger event It is used for all standard measurements including power calibration sweeps For a sliding match t...

Page 1100: ...nsmission standard or an adapter that is used as a through this parameter specifies the second test port For reflection measurements with an adapter connected between port and standard set it to ON Otherwise set it to OFF or simply omit it Dispersion Optional status parameter for UTHRough standard OFF unknown through standard is non dispersive ON unknown through standard is dispersive RST OFF Dela...

Page 1101: ...NSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO Characterization TestPort TestPort Selects and initiates an automatic calibration for the specified test ports using a single auto detected port assignment Tip If the test setup contains a high attenuation the analyzer may fail to detect the cal unit ports connected to each of its ports In this case use the extended command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs Use ...

Page 1102: ...fault calibration kit file and arbitrary test ports of the cal unit Usage Setting only Manual operation See Apply Cancel on page 427 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO CONFigure CalType Characterization Selects a calibration type and a cal unit characterization cal kit file for an automatic calibration Suffix Ch Channel number of the calibrated channel Parameters CalType FNPort TOSM FOPort OPTPort F...

Page 1103: ...rnal memory of the active cal ibration unit A VNA cal kit file name without path but prefixed with SD refers to a specific cal kit file stored on the SD card inserted at the active calibration unit A VNA cal kit file name calkit with path refers to a spe cific cal kit file stored in an arbitrary directory on the analyzer Example SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AUTO CONFigure FNPort Sets the automatic ca...

Page 1104: ...libration string parameter If an empty string is specified the factory cal kit file stored in the active calibration unit is used A VNA cal kit file name calkit without path refers to a specific cal kit file stored in the internal memory of the active cal ibration unit A VNA cal kit file name without path but prefixed with SD refers to a specific cal kit file stored on the SD card inserted at the ...

Page 1105: ...SM FOPort OPTPort FRTRans FTRans RTRans REFL RSHort PFNPort Calibration Type FNPort Full n port UOSM calibration TOSM Full n port calibration with characterized Through If the selected cal unit characterization does not contain a Through characterization the command silently falls back to a FNPort UOSM calibration FOPort Full one port Refl OSM calibration OPTPort One Path Two Ports calibration If ...

Page 1106: ...ily consecutive port numbers must be specified For a one path two port calibration OPTPort the first port no denotes the source port fully calibrated port CalUnitPort1 Port numbers of the cal unit For an n port automatic calibration n arbitrary not necessarily consecutive port numbers must be specified It is possible to combine arbitrary not necessarily matching pairs of analyzer and cal unit port...

Page 1107: ... COLLect AUTO POWer 2 Perform an additional receiver power calibration at Port 2 This completes the Usage Setting only Manual operation See Start Cal Sweep Abort Sweep on page 459 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO TYPE CalType Characterization TestPort1 TestPort2 Selects and initiates an automatic calibration at arbitrary analyzer and cal unit ports This command also selects the calibration type A ...

Page 1108: ...on Open RSHort Reflection normalization Short PFNPort Full n port FNPort calibration with additional power flatness calibration for SMARTerCal Setting parameters Characterization Location of the characterization cal kit file to be used for the automatic calibration string parameter The empty string refers to the factory calibration of and stored on the active calibration unit A VNA cal kit file na...

Page 1109: ...al kit files Suffix Ch Channel number Setting parameters CalKitFile Path to the cal kit file either absolute or relative to the current directory see MMEMory CDIRectory Gender MALE FEMale NGENder Ports Either a comma separated list of port numbers or ALL optional Usage Setting only SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT LOAD CalKitName KitLabel Gender Ports Allows you to load cal kit data by name label ...

Page 1110: ...s of the analyzer Note If the analyzer is set to use the same connectors at all ports SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection PORTs ALL then a change of a connector type is valid for all ports The gender of the connectors can still be different Parameters ConnectorType N50Female N50Male N75Female N75Male PC7 SMAFemale SMAMale PC35female PC35male PC292female PC292male PC24female PC24male PC185female...

Page 1111: ...ort is changed the connector type at all other ports is changed accordingly SINGle independent possibly non uniform genders at the ports RST SINGle Example See SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection PORTs Manual operation See Same Connector All Ports Same Gender All Ports on page 436 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection PORTs ConnectorType Qualifies whether the connector types at the test ports ...

Page 1112: ...ibration type SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine ALL the analyzer deletes all calibrations If nothing is specified the analyzer deletes the last system error correction stored by means of SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected DUMMy RST Example CORR COLL METH DEF Test RSHort 1 Select a one port normalization at port 1 with a short standard as calibration type CORR COLL SEL SHOR 1 Measure...

Page 1113: ...ect ACQuire SELected MATCh 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect DISCard Usage Event SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure ACQuire StandardType TestPort1 TestPort2 Starts a fixture compensation sweep in order to acquire measurement data for a test fixture that has its inner conductor terminated with the selected standards Suffix Ch Channel number of the corrected channel Setting parameters StandardType OPEN S...

Page 1114: ...COLL FIXT STAR Prepare a fixture compensation measurement for channel 2 The channel 1 data is not affected SENS2 CORR COLL FIXT ACQ SHOR 1 3 Repeat the previous fixture compensation sweep for channel 2 SENS1 CORR COLL FIXT SAVE SENS2 CORR COLL FIXT SAVE Save and apply the compensation data for both channels SENS1 CORR OFFS3 DFC SENS2 CORR OFFS3 DFC Query whether the analyzer uses Direct Compensati...

Page 1115: ... be specified Example RST SENSe1 CORR COLL FIXT LMP OFF Activate Direct Compensation SENSe1 CORR COLL FIXT EXP Traces p12_short csv SHOR 1 2 Acquire Direct Compensation data for ports 1 and 2 whose inner connectors have to be terminated with a Short and save the acquired data to file In a subsequent measurement session you can load and apply these data as follows RST SENSe1 CORR COLL FIXT LMP OFF ...

Page 1116: ...tion COLLect ACQuire SELected in order to simplify and speed up the new calibration procedure The channel settings for loa ded and new calibrations e g the number of sweep points must be identical Note The analyzer performs a consistency check for the loaded data If the loaded file is incompatible with the channel settings of channel Ch or if it does not contain data for the specified standard and...

Page 1117: ...n standard or an adapter used as a through this parameter specifies the second test port For reflection measurements with an adapter connected between port and standard set it to ON Otherwise set it to OFF or simply omit it Example Suppose that the cal pool contains a file Calgroup3 cal with a valid through calibration for the active channel no 1 which you want to include in a new TOSM calibration...

Page 1118: ...are ignored Entering less than n numbers causes an error message For a one path two port calibration OPTPort the first port no denotes the node port fully calibrated port TestPort2 Second calibrated port number TestPort3 or AdapterCalKit Either the third calibrated port number or for Adapter Removal calibrations only the file path relative to the current directory where the analyzer shall store th...

Page 1119: ...anual operation See Remove all Cal Data on page 499 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected DEFault Generates a set of default system error correction data for the selected ports and cali bration type The default data set corresponds to a test setup which does not introduce any systematic errors none of the measurement results acquired previously SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected is t...

Page 1120: ...de Usage Event Manual operation See Apply on page 440 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected DUMMy Calculates the system error correction data from the acquired measurement results SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected stores it and applies it to the calibrated channel s To avoid incompatibilities older system error cor rection data is deleted unless it has been transferred into a cal po...

Page 1121: ...aming conventions under SENSe CORRection CKIT ConnType SELect RST N 50 Ohm FEM for all ports Gender MALE FEMale Gender of the connectors The gender designation is not neces sary and ignored for sexless connector types Example RST CORR COLL SCON1 N 75 Ohm MALE SCON4 Change the connector type at port 1 from N 50 Ohm FEM to N 75 Ohm MALE The connector type at the other ports is also changed to N 75 O...

Page 1122: ...ency 0 Hz to 1000 GHz RST Example CORR CONN USERCON TEM GEND 1 00000 50 Define a TEM type connector type named USERCON CORR CONN USERCON Query the properties of the configured connector type CORR CONN DEL USERCON Delete the configured connector type Manual operation See Connector Gender on page 436 SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection CATalog Returns a list of the connector types of all calibration kits...

Page 1123: ...t 1 2012 05 25 A sequence of two commas means that the preceding cal kit has no label assigned CORRection CKIT STANdard CATalog 85032B E Query standards in cal kit named 85032B E Possible response MOP FOP MSH FSH MMMT FMMT MFTH CORRection CKIT STANdard LCATalog New Kit 1 2012 05 25 Query standards in user cal kit named New Kit 1 labelled 2012 05 25 Possible response MOP FOP MSH P1 FSH MMMT FMMT MS...

Page 1124: ...h option R S ZNB ZNBT K4 Query parameters SfkSettingType ACAL STARt STOP POINts SPOWer STYPe BANDwidth PDLY RATTenuation TYPE PORTs SPORt THRoughs TSTamp LTSTamp TVNA MVNA MTESt CKIT FSMode The requested setting If no SfkSettingType is specified the values for STARt STOP POINts SPOWer and STYPe are returned ACAL 1 for automatic calibrations 0 for manual calibrations STARt Start frequency or CW fre...

Page 1125: ...switch matrices this indicates the mapping between matrix ports and VNA ports for matrix Index Returns a comma separated list of port pairs MatrixVnaPort VnaPort MTESt For calibrations involving switch matrices this indicates the mapping between matrix physical test ports and test ports for matrix Index Returns a comma separated list of port pairs MatrixTestPort TestPort CKIT If created with FW ve...

Page 1126: ...enuation Query receiver attenuations Result looks like this 1 0 000000 2 0 000000 Usage Query only Manual operation See Apply on page 440 SENSe Ch CORRection DATA PARameter COUNt Gets the number of active system error corrections for channel Ch This number can be 1 in case the enhanced multi calibration wizard was used see SYSTem DISPlay DIALogs SETup MCAL STATe on page 1284 to collect the calibra...

Page 1127: ...ration status The analyzer returns CAL OFF because the performed one port calibration is not sufficient for the measured transmission S parameter S21 Usage Query only Manual operation See Apply on page 440 SENSe Ch CORRection EDELay PhyPt AUTO Activate Defines the offset parameter for the active test port such that the residual delay of the active trace defined as the negative derivative of the ph...

Page 1128: ...he offset parameter for test port PhyPt as a mechanical length Suffix Ch Channel number of the offset corrected channel PhyPt Port number of the analyzer Parameters MechLength Mechanical length Range 3 402823466E 038 m to 3 4028234664E 038 m RST 0 m Default unit m Example See SENSe Ch CORRection EDELay PhyPt ELENgth Manual operation See Delay Electrical Length Mech Length on page 572 SENSe Ch CORR...

Page 1129: ... loss parameters at port 2 Manual operation See Delay Electrical Length Mech Length on page 572 SENSe Ch CORRection EDELay PhyPt TIME Delay Defines the offset parameter for test port PhyPt as a delay time Suffix Ch Channel number of the offset corrected channel PhyPt Port number of the analyzer Parameters Delay Delay Range 3 40282346638529E 038 s to 3 40282346638529E 038 s RST 0 s Default unit s E...

Page 1130: ...ation See Loss at DC Loss at Freq Freq for Loss on page 578 SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt AUTO Activate Defines the offset parameters for the active test port such that the residual delay of the active trace defined as the negative derivative of the phase response is minimized and the measured loss is reproduced as far as possible across the entire sweep range Auto Length and Loss Suffix Ch Chann...

Page 1131: ...et loss Suffix Ch Channel number of the offset corrected channel PhyPt Port number of the analyzer Parameters OffsetLoss Frequency independent part of the offset loss Range 200 dB to 200 dB Increment 0 001 dB RST 0 dB Default unit dB Example See SENSe Ch CORRection EDELay PhyPt ELENgth Manual operation See Loss at DC Loss at Freq Freq for Loss on page 578 SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet PhyPt STATe Boo...

Page 1132: ... PhyPt Physical port number Parameters Boolean ON 1 compensation active OFF 0 compensation inactive Manual operation See Active on page 564 SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet PhyPt DFComp STATe Returns whether a direct fixture compensation has been carried out at port no PhyPt A direct fixture compensation resets the offset parameters to zero the ana lyzer uses calculated transmission factors instead Suff...

Page 1133: ... SENSe Ch CORRection POWer DATA Wave CorrData SENSe Ch CORRection POWer DATA PORT PhyPt Wave CorrData Reads or writes receiver power correction data sets A power correction data set con tains n real values where Each value corresponds to the ratio of the actual power at the receiver input value provided by the used source to the uncalibrated power in dB The number n is equal to the number of sweep...

Page 1134: ... received waves b PhyPt The setting command is disabled unless the received waves have been power calibrated SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt ACQuire BWAVe The query always returns a result Suffix Ch Calibrated channel number PhyPt Calibrated port number Parameters Boolean Enables ON or disables OFF the receiver power calibration for the received waves b PhyPt RST OFF Example RST CORR POW ACQ BWAVe...

Page 1135: ...on is included in the source power calibration of each port BWAVe calibration of received wave b1 b2 The port num ber CalPort the used SourceType and the SourcePort number must be specified in addition Alternative Parameters B1 and B2 B1 B2 direct wave and cal port setting for received waves b1 b2 The parameters B1 and B2 are ZVR compatible No additional parameters need to be specified The source ...

Page 1136: ...w on page 447 SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt AWAVe STATe Boolean Enables or disables the receiver power calibration for channel Ch and for the refer ence waves an The setting command is disabled unless the reference waves have been power calibrated SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt ACQuire on page 1135 AWAVe The query always returns a result This command extends the functionality of manual control ...

Page 1137: ...TIMulus SENSe Ch CORRection STIMulus PORT PhyPt Queries the stimulus values of the active calibration A calibration must be selected before the command is executed see example Suffix Ch Channel number of the calibrated channel PhyPt Physical port number used to select a specific frequency axis in arbitrary mode with option R S ZNB ZNBT K4 Example RST CORR COLL METH DEF Test RSHort 1 Select a one p...

Page 1138: ...TO ASSignment DEFine DEFault See Chapter 5 5 5 4 Multiple Port Assignments on page 172 for background infor mation Note In MultiCal scenarios use SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment ALL COUNt to get the number of port assignments of all calibrations Suffix Ch Channel number Example See SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine on page 1140 Usage Query only Manual operation See...

Page 1139: ...40 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Default Port Assignment on page 424 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment DEFine TPORt DEFault TestPort1 TestPort2 Similar logic as SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment DEFine DEFault but initially defines the default port assignments only by their underlying test port set s the connected calibration unit ports are auto detected at the start ...

Page 1140: ...e Event Manual operation See Start Cal Sweep Abort Sweep on page 426 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine TestPort1 CalUnitPort1 TestPort2 Manually defines port assignment no Asg for channel no Ch With manual configuration a non minimal set of port assignments can be created which may increase measurement accuracy On the other hand it is up to the user to ensure that the created ...

Page 1141: ...erization SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment1 DEFine 2 1 3 2 Creates port assignment 1 explicitely no auto detection SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment2 DEFine TPORt 3 4 Creates port assignment 2 implicitely auto detection Before starting the calibration sweep for port assignment 1 ensure test port 2 is connected to cal unit port 1 and test port 3 to cal unit port 2 SENSe1 CORRection...

Page 1142: ...arameters TestPort1 First test port number TestPort2 Second test port number Example See SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine on page 1140 Manual operation See Port Assignment manual on page 423 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO SAVE Calculates the system error correction for automatic calibrations with Multiple Port Assignments saves the data and applies the calibration to the ac...

Page 1143: ...al operation See Apply on page 440 8 3 14 8 SENSe COUPle The SENSe COUPle commands select the sweep mode SENSe Ch COUPle Order Determines the order of partial measurements and sweeps Suffix Ch Channel number This suffix is ignored the sweep mode applies to all channels in the active recall set Parameters Order ALL AUTO NONE AUTO optimized display update fast sweeps are performed in alternated mode...

Page 1144: ...s 3 Manual operation See Ranges on page 282 8 3 14 10 SENSe FREQuency The SENSe commands set frequency related parameters especially the mea surement and display ranges for the different sweep types The frequency ranges for the different instrument models are listed below for more details refer to the data sheet Table 8 16 Frequency ranges of R S ZNB ZNBT analyzers Frequency settings Start Stop Ce...

Page 1145: ... FREQuency CONVersion MIXer STAGes 1153 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer TFRequency Stg 1153 SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation CONVersion 1154 SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation LTONe 1154 SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation ORDer Im STATe 1155 SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation RECeiver 1156 SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation SPECtrum MORDer 1156 SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation SPECtrum STATe 1156 SENSe Ch FREQuen...

Page 1146: ...n page 386 SENSe Ch FREQuency CENTer CenterFreq Defines the center of the measurement and display range for a frequency sweep sweep range The default center frequency is the center of the analyzer s maximum frequency range fMIN fMAX 2 The range depends on the instrument model see Table 8 16 Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters CenterFreq Center frequency of the sweep Increment 0 1 kHz Default unit ...

Page 1147: ...Quency IMODulation commands RST FUNDamental Example See SOURce Ch FREQuency PhyPt CONVersion ARBitrary IFRequency Manual operation See Reset on page 526 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion ARBitrary Numerator Denominator Offset SweepType Unused command The R S ZNB ZNBT doesn t allow to set a separate receiver frequency for Frequency Conversion Measurements Use SOURce Ch FREQuency PhyPt CONVersion ARBitr...

Page 1148: ... frequency is outside the allowed range Suffix Ch Channel number Pmtr Power meter number Parameters Numerator RST 1 Denominator RST 1 Offset RST 0 Default unit Hz SweepType CW FIXed SWEep SWEep the full formula is applied For frequency sweeps the command defines a sweep range CW FIXed the reduced formula with fb 0 is applied the com mand defines a fixed frequency RST SWEep Example RST FREQ STAR 1E...

Page 1149: ... frequency defined via SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer MFFixed Suffix Ch Channel number Stg Counter for fixed signal 1 if only one mixer stage is used 1 or 2 for 2 mixer stages Parameters InputOutput RF LO LO1 LO2 IF RF mixer input signal LO LO1 LO2 local oscillator signal 1 or 2 for 2 stage mixer measurements see SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer STAGes IF mixer output signal mixing product...

Page 1150: ...fix Ch Channel number Parameters PortNumber Range 1 to number of test ports RST 2 Example See SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer MFFixed Manual operation See Port selection on page 556 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer LOMultiplier Stg Numerator Denominator Selects the frequency conversion factors for the LO signal The conversion factor is a ratio of two positive integers numerator and denomina...

Page 1151: ...external generator RST NONE SourceNumber Number of analyzer port or generator Example See SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer MFFixed Manual operation See Port selection on page 556 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer MFFixed InputOutput FixedFrequency Assigns a fixed frequency to the RF LO 1 LO 2 or to the IF signal The fixed fre quency setting becomes active if the port is selected as a port wit...

Page 1152: ...STOP 2 GHZ Select a sweep range between 1 and 2 GHz FREQ CONV MIX FIXed1 LO1 FIXed2 LO2 Assign fixed frequency settings to the two LO signals FREQ CONV MIX FUNDamental RF MFFixed LO1 10 MHz MFFixed LO2 10 MHz Assign the channel base frequency sweep range to the RF sig nal fixed frequencies of 10 MHz to both LO signals FREQ CONV MIX TFRequency1 DCUP TFRequency2 UCON Select down conversion USB at th...

Page 1153: ...ge 1 to number of test ports RST 1 Example See SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer MFFixed Manual operation See Port selection on page 556 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer STAGes Stages Selects the number of mixer stages for scalar mixer measurements Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters Stages Number of mixer stages Range 1 2 RST 1 Example See SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer MFFixed Manual o...

Page 1154: ...nd 4 GHz to be assigned to the RF signal FREQ CONV MIX TFR DCL Select down conversion to the lower sideband corresponding to an IF frequency range between 2 GHz and 1 GHz Manual operation See Conversion on page 558 SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation CONVersion OFF Disables the intermodulation measurement and switches back to normal mode no fre quency conversion Suffix Ch Channel number Setting paramet...

Page 1155: ... port for the intermodulation mea surement FREQ IMOD TDIS 2E6 Select a tone distance of 2 MHz FREQ IMOD ORD3 ON ORD5 ON ORD7 OFF ORD9 OFF Enable the measurement of the intermodulation products up to the 5th order Perform intermodulation measurement evaluate results FREQ IMOD CONV OFF Disable intermodulation measurement switch back to normal non frequency converting mode Manual operation See Lower ...

Page 1156: ...nes the maximum order of intermodulation products for the intermodulation spec trum measurement Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters IMOrder Maximum order of IM products Range 3 5 7 9 RST 3 Example See SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation SPECtrum STATe Manual operation See CW Mode Spectrum on page 540 SENSe Ch FREQuency IMODulation SPECtrum STATe Boolean Enables or disables the measurement of the interm...

Page 1157: ...am Example Intermodulation spectrum measurement in a new channel RST FREQ IMOD LTON PORT 1 UTON GEN 1 Reset the instrument to create the default channel no 1 Select port 1 as a source port for the lower tone a previously config ured external generator no 1 as a source port for the upper tone FREQ STAR 1GHZ STOP 2GHz Define a suitable sweep range to ensure that the analyzer can measure all intermod...

Page 1158: ...hannel number Parameters SourceType PORT GENerator NONE Upper tone source NONE no source selected for query only PORT internal second source at port arg1 GENerator configured external generator no arg1 RST NONE arg1 Analyzer port number or generator number Range 1 to number of ports of the analyzer or number of configured external generators RST n a no analyzer or generator port selected Example S...

Page 1159: ...response is LIN linear frequency sweep and AUTO automatic setting of the LO frequency Manual operation See Image Suppr on page 535 SENSe Ch FREQuency SEGMent AXIS Scale Selects either frequency based or point based x axis for segmented sweeps Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters Scale POINt FREQuency Example SENSe SEGMent INSert 1MHZ 1 1MHZ 101 21DBM 0 5S 0 10KHZ SENSe SEGMent INSert 2MHZ 3MHZ 101 ...

Page 1160: ...ncy is adjusted to fMIN Span 2 or fMAX Span 2 SENSe Ch FREQuency STARt StartFreq SENSe Ch FREQuency STOP StopFreq These commands defines the start and stop frequency for a frequency sweep The val ues also define the display range in a Cartesian diagram The default start and stop frequencies equal to the minimum and maximum frequency of the analyzer The ranges depend on the instrument model see Tab...

Page 1161: ...A 1163 SENSe Ch HARMonic RTIMe THReshold 1163 SENSe Ch HARMonic VELocity DATA 1163 SENSe Ch HARMonic Queries whether the current frequency grid is harmonic Suffix Ch Channel number Return values arg0 Usage Query only Manual operation See Is the Current Grid Harmonic on page 315 SENSe Ch HARMonic AUTO arg0 Turns the Automatic Harmonic Grid function ON or OFF Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters arg0...

Page 1162: ...DUT Measure Delay Max El Length Max Mech Length on page 616 SENSe Ch HARMonic MLENgth DATA DUTMLength Sets gets the expected maximum mechanical length of the DUT The set command automatically activates the Automatic Harmonic Grid function i e it sets SENSe Ch HARMonic AUTO to ON Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters DUTMLength Default unit m Options R S ZNB ZNBT K20 Manual operation See Max DUT Meas...

Page 1163: ...Rise Time on page 617 SENSe Ch HARMonic RTIMe THReshold DUTRiseThreshold Defines how the rise time that is set using SENSe Ch HARMonic RTIMe DATA shall be interpreted Allows to select between rise time definitions 20 80 default and 10 90 The set command automatically activates the Automatic Harmonic Grid function i e it sets SENSe Ch HARMonic AUTO to ON Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters DUTRiseT...

Page 1164: ...omplex common mode and differential mode reference impedances for the balanced logical port numbered LogPt Use SENSe Ch LPORt LogPt ZDEFault STATe to toggle between config ured and default reference impedances Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number The logical ports must be defined using SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt PhysicalPort1 PhysicalPort2 An n port analyzer supports a maximum of n 2 n ev...

Page 1165: ...Pt Logical port number Parameters arg0 ON 1 Use default impedance s OFF 0 Use the redefined impedances defined via SENSe Ch PORT PhyPt ZREFerence for single ended or via SENSe Ch LPORt LogPt ZCOMmon and SENSe Ch LPORt LogPt ZDIFferent for balanced logical ports Manual operation See Use Default on page 260 8 3 14 13 SENSe PAE The SENSe PAE commands configure the measurement of the Power Added Effic...

Page 1166: ...hannel number Parameters Input DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 Rear panel connectors DC INPUT 1 4 RST DC2 Example See SENSe Ch PAE TYPE Manual operation See Um Um1 Um2 on page 283 SENSe Ch PAE PARameters I Current Defines the constant DC supply current I0 for the PAE measurement measurement type Constant Current Source see example Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters Current RST 0 A Default unit A Example See SENS...

Page 1167: ... Voltage Source see example Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters Voltage RST 0 V Default unit V Example See SENSe Ch PAE TYPE Manual operation See Formula on page 283 SENSe Ch PAE TYPE Type Selects the measurement type for the Power Added Efficiency PAE measurement The three measurement types involve different test setups input parameters and DC voltage measurements Suffix Ch Channel number Paramet...

Page 1168: ...For all measurement types CALCulate1 PARameter SDEFine Trc1 PAE21 DISPlay WINDow1 TRACe FEED Trc1 Select a PAE measurement with port 1 as a source port port 2 as a receive port Manual operation See Measurement Type on page 283 8 3 14 14 SENSe PORT The SENSe PORT commands define the reference impedances at the physical ports SENSe Ch PORT PhyPt ZREFerence RealPart ImaginaryPart Specifies the comple...

Page 1169: ... 5 7 17 Receiver Step Attenuators on page 233 and the AGC of the R S ZNB ZNBT See also SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer GAINcontrol on page 1187 SENSe Ch POWer AGCMode ACQuire 1169 SENSe Ch POWer AGCMode SAVE 1170 SENSe Ch POWer AGCMode PhyPt MEASure 1170 SENSe Ch POWer IFGain PhyPt MEASure 1170 SENSe Ch POWer ATTenuation 1171 SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol 1171 SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol ALL 1172 SENSe Ch ...

Page 1170: ...eference channel a waves is set automatically if not otherwise defined using SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol Note These commands are replaced by SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol and SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol GLOBal They are supported for compatibility with FW versions 1 5 Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Test port number of the analyzer Parameters AGCMode AUTO LDIStortion LNOise AUTO automatic adaptive gain c...

Page 1171: ...e Range 0 dB 10 dB 20 dB 30 dB The analyzer rounds any entered value below the maximum attenuation to the closest step RST 0 dB Default unit dB Example POW ATT AREC 10 Set an attenuation factor of 10 dB for the waves received at test port 1 and channel no 1 The other test ports and channels are not affected Manual operation See Step Attenuators on page 387 SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol ReceiverName M...

Page 1172: ...Set the GC mode for the waves a2 b2 and b3 to Low Noise The setting applies while port 2 is the drive port SENSe POWer GAINcontrol B1D2 Query the GC setting for the wave b1 while port 2 is the drive port The response is 1 LDIS default setting Manual operation See Drive port specific settings on page 538 SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol ALL Mode Applies the same manual gain control GC Mode to all a and b...

Page 1173: ...nfigures the gain control GC in all receive paths measurement receivers b waves for all analyzer ports or enables port specific gain control configuration Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters GCModesGlobal LNOise LDIStortion AUTO MANual AUTO automatic adaptive gain control AGC according to the RF input level LDIStortion fixed small IF gain for high input levels LNOise fixed large IF gain for low in...

Page 1174: ...of the external reference clock signal Range See the data sheet of your analyzer RST 10 MHz Default unit Hz Example ROSC EXT Select the external reference clock as clock source ROSC EXT FREQ 10MHz Specify the frequency of the external reference clock ROSC EXT FREQ Query the frequency of the external reference oscillator The response is 10000000 Hz Manual operation See Ext Frequency on page 687 8 3...

Page 1175: ...ent Seg PORT PortId STATe 1187 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer GAINcontrol 1187 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer GAINcontrol ALL 1188 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer GAINcontrol CONTrol 1189 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer LEVel CONTrol 1190 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep DWELl 1191 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep DWELl CONTrol 1191 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep GENeration 1192 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep POINts 1193 SENSe Ch SEGM...

Page 1176: ...fault channel settings Insert New Segment The added segment covers the frequency interval between the maximum frequency of the existing sweep segments and the stop frequency of the entire sweep range Tip Use SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg INSert to create a segment with specific channel settings Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number Segment numbers must be sequential If n segments exist already ...

Page 1177: ...number Parameters ResBandwidth IF bandwidth Range See above Increment 1 1 5 2 3 5 7 steps RST 10 kHz Default unit Hz Example See SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg BWIDth RESolution CONTrol Manual operation See Optional Columns on page 406 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg BWIDth RESolution CONTrol Boolean Selects common or independent Meas Bandwidth settings for the sweep segments Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment...

Page 1178: ... selectivity settings for all sweep segments SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg BWIDth RESolution SELect CONTrol ON Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number Parameters Selectivity NORMal MEDium HIGH NORMal IF filter with normal selectivity and shortest settling time MEDium IF filter with steeper edges and longer settling time HIGH IF filter with highest selectivity but longest settling time Example See...

Page 1179: ...all segments and reset the selectivity in segment no 1 to the unsegmented value NORMal Manual operation See Optional Columns on page 406 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg DEFine StartFreq StopFreq Points Power SegmentTime MeasDelay Unused MeasBandwidth LO Selectivity FreqSweepMode Creates or re defines a sweep segment no Seg with specific channel settings Entry of the first seven numeric parameters is mandator...

Page 1180: ...ti vates automatic sweep time setting in the segment which is equivalent to the minimum sweep time possible Default unit s MeasDelay Delay for each partial measurement in the segment See SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep DWELl In the setting SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg INSert SELect SWTime this parameter is replaced by SegmentTime Unused Ignored parameter for compatibility with R S ZVR analyzers Should be set t...

Page 1181: ...ment Time or as a measurement delay Meas Delay Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number Parameters TimeRef SWTime DWELl SWTime use segment sweep time DWELl use measurement delay Example SEGM1 DEF SEL DWEL Select the measurement delay to determine the sweep time in a new sweep segment no 1 SEGM1 DEF 1MHZ 1 5MHZ 111 21DBM 0 01S 0 10KHZ Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1 0 M...

Page 1182: ...fault settings SEGM DEL Delete the created segment Manual operation See Add Insert Delete Delete All on page 404 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg FREQuency CENTer SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg FREQuency SPAN These commands return the center frequency and the span width of sweep segment no Seg Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number Example SEGM INS 1MHZ 1 5MHZ 111 21DBM 0 5S 0 10KHZ Create a sweep segment wi...

Page 1183: ...n See Table Columns on page 403 Note If the start frequency entered is greater than the current stop frequency the stop frequency is set to the start frequency If the stop frequency entered is smaller than the current start frequency the start frequency is set to the stop frequency SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg INSert StartFreq StopFreq Points Power SegmentTime MeasDelay Unused MeasBandwidth LO Selectivity...

Page 1184: ... Points Number of sweep points in the segment See SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep POINts Power Internal source power in the segment See SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer LEVel Default unit dBm SegmentTime Duration of the sweep in the segment See SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep TIME In the setting SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg INSert SELect DWELl this parameter is replaced by MeasDelay Range Depending on other channel setti...

Page 1185: ...BM 0 5S 0 10KHZ Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1 0 MHz and 1 5 MHz SEGM2 ADD Create a second sweep segment The frequency range of the second segment will be between 1 5 MHz and the maximum fre quency of the analyzer Manual operation See Add Insert Delete Delete All on page 404 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg INSert SELect TimeRef Defines whether the sweep time of a new segment i e numeric ...

Page 1186: ...h SEGMent Seg POWer LEVel CONTrol Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number Parameters IntSourcePow Internal source power Range 300 dBm to 200 dBm The usable power range is frequency dependent refer to the data sheet RST 10 dBm Default unit dBm Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings and thus 10 dBm internal source power SEGM POW 20 Decrease ...

Page 1187: ...d ON 1 The port specific power level SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg PORT PortId POWer LEVel is used for port PortId in segment Seg of channel Ch RST OFF Manual operation See Optional Columns on page 406 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer GAINcontrol ReceiverName Mode SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer GAINcontrol ReceiverName Defines port and segment specific IF gain settings These settings apply if and only if segmented g...

Page 1188: ... SENSe SEGMent1 POWer GAINcontrol CONTrol ON Enable segmented GC SENSe SEGMent1 POWer GAINcontrol B2D1 LNO Set the ACG for the received wave b2 port 2 in sweep segment no 1 to Low Noise The setting applies while port 1 is the drive port SENSe SEGMent1 POWer GAINcontrol A2B2B3D2 LNO Set the ACG for the waves a2 b2 and b3 in sweep segment no 1 to Low Noise The setting applies while port 2 is the dri...

Page 1189: ... input level LDIStortion fixed small IF gain for high input levels LNOise fixed large IF gain for low input levels RST LDIStortion Example RST SENSe POWer GAINcontrol GLOBal MANual Enable the manual configuration of independent GC settings for each drive port SENSe SEGMent1 ADD SENSe SWEep TYPE SEGMent Create a new sweep segment no 1 and activate segmented sweep type SENSe SEGMent1 POWer GAINcontr...

Page 1190: ... Channel number Seg Sweep segment number This suffix is ignored the setting con trols the whole segmented sweep Parameters Boolean ON use independent power settings to be defined via SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer LEVel OFF reset the power in all sweep segments to the power for unsegmented sweeps defined via SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude ON will not restore the previous values The pa...

Page 1191: ...the sweep SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep TIME Range 0 s to 2500 s RST 0 s Default unit s Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings SEGM SWE DWEL 1 MS Set the meas delay in segment no 1 to 1 ms SEGM DEF Response 300000 8000000000 51 300 0 056559 0 10000 POS NORM Query the channel parameters for sweep segment 1 The response value for the segment sweep time o...

Page 1192: ...d reset the delay in segment no 1 to the initial value of 0 s Manual operation See Optional Columns on page 406 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep GENeration arg0 Sets gets the segment specific sweep modes for segmented linear frequency sweeps Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Number of an existing sweep segment Parameters arg0 STEPped ANALog Stepped mode or swept mode ANALog Example RST SEGM INS 1MHZ 1 5MHZ 1...

Page 1193: ...eep segment no Seg Segment Time At the same time the command activates separate sweep time setting in all sweep segments SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep TIME CONTrol ON Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number Parameters SegSweepTime Segment time The minimum segment time depends on the other channel settings in particular on the number of points SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep POINts the IF bandwid...

Page 1194: ...eset the segment sweep time in all sweep segments to the segment sweep time for unsegmented sweeps defined via SENSe Ch SWEep TIME ON will not restore the previous values The parameter is automatically switched to ON when a segment sweep time is entered using SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep TIME or if the channel settings in a sweep segment require a sweep time larger than the unsegmented sweep time RS...

Page 1195: ...ANALog CONDition 1199 SENSe Ch SWEep POINts 1200 SENSe Ch SWEep STEP 1201 SENSe Ch SWEep TIME 1201 SENSe Ch SWEep TIME AUTO 1202 SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE 1203 SENSe Chn SWEep SRCPort 1204 SENSe SWEep COUNt ALL Sweep Defines the number of sweeps to be measured in single sweep mode INITiate Ch CONTinuous OFF The setting is applied to all channels Use SENSe Ch SWEep COUNt to define the sweep count for a s...

Page 1196: ... FREQ Port 1 Source Select the source signal at port 1 as the reference signal for fre quency definitions FREQ STAR 3 GHz STOP 4 GHz Shift all frequency ranges by 1 GHz SWE AXIS FREQ Port 2 Source Select the source signal at port 2 as the reference signal for fre quency definitions FREQ STAR STOP Query the frequency range at test port 2 The response is 2000000000 3000000000 Manual operation See St...

Page 1197: ...he power at test port 2 The response is 0 Manual operation See Stimulus Axis Frequency Power on page 518 SENSe Ch SWEep COUNt Sweep Defines the number of sweeps to be measured in single sweep mode INITiate Ch CONTinuous OFF and in channel no Ch Use SENSe SWEep COUNt ALL to define the sweep count for all channels Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters Sweep Number of consecutive sweeps to be measured ...

Page 1198: ...he minimum sweep time see SENSe Ch SWEep TIME AUTO Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters MeasDelay Measurement delay before each partial measurement Changing the delay leaves the number of points unchanged but has an impact on the duration of the sweep SENSe Ch SWEep TIME Range 0 s to 13680 s RST 0 s Default unit s Example RST Reset the instrument activating a frequency sweep with the S parameter S2...

Page 1199: ...ific sweep modes SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep GENeration Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters arg0 STEPped ANALog Stepped mode or swept mode ANALog RST STEPped Manual operation See Freq Sweep Mode on page 396 SENSe Ch SWEep GENeration ANALog CONDition Returns the state of the swept mode see SENSe Ch SWEep GENeration and SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep GENeration which can be one of the fol lowing 0 Swept ...

Page 1200: ... mode could not be activated for the reason described in the state_desc arg1 State description Usage Query only Manual operation See Freq Sweep Mode on page 396 SENSe Ch SWEep POINts SweepPoint Defines the total number of measurement points per sweep Number of Points Values between 1 and 100 001 can be set Suffix Ch Channel number 1 Parameters SweepPoint Number of points per sweep Range see above ...

Page 1201: ...p size is equal to the default sweep span of the ana lyzer divided by the default number of sweep points minus one Default unit Hz Example RST SWE STEP Query the default step size Currently for all analyzers the default sweep span is the full frequency range and the default number of points is 201 Hence the response is max frequency min frequency 200 SWE STEP UP Increase the step size FREQ STOP SW...

Page 1202: ...e total sweep time to 2 s SWE DWEL Query the meas delay for each partial measurement again The delay is increased by 1 s divided by the total number of partial measurements per sweep Manual operation See Sweep Time Auto on page 395 SENSe Ch SWEep TIME AUTO Boolean When enabled the minimum sweep time is calculated internally using the other chan nel settings and zero delay SENSe Ch SWEep DWELl Note...

Page 1203: ...cy SOURce Ch FREQuency PhyPt FIXed but with variable generator power that is swept in linear equidis tant steps over a continuous range SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STARt SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STOP In a Cartesian diagram the x axis is a dB linear power axis CW time sweep The measurement is performed at constant frequency SOURce Ch FREQuency PhyPt FIXed and source power SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMedia...

Page 1204: ... the wave quantity a1 The trace automatically becomes the active trace SENS4 SWE SRCP 2 Select drive port 2 for the active trace CALC4 PAR MEAS Ch4Tr1 Query the measurement result for Ch4Tr1 The response is A1D2SAM 8 3 14 19 SENSe UDSParams The SENSe UDSParams commands are related to Redefined S Parameters SENSe UDSParams ACTive arg0 With a set to OFF this command disables user defined physical po...

Page 1205: ...hysical port 2 measurement receiver physical port 3 SENSe UDSParams ACTive returns 1 ON see SENSe UDSParams ACTive Manual operation See a wave b wave Source on page 701 8 3 15 SOURce Commands The SOURce commands affect the source settings of the R S ZNB ZNBT 8 3 15 1 SOURce FREQuency The SOURce FREQuency commands configure the sources for frequency conver sion measurements and control the frequenc...

Page 1206: ... LO 1 LO 2 or the IF signal ports to fixed power or to the channel base power Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters arg0 RF LO LO1 LO2 IF RF mixer input signal LO LO1 local oscillator signal no 1 LO2 local oscillator signal no 2 for 2 stage mixer measure ments SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer STAGes IF mixer output signal arg1 FUNDamental FIXed FIXed use a fixed power to be specified via SOURce C...

Page 1207: ...Version ARBitrary IFRequency Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Test port number of the analyzer This suffix is ignored because the selected frequency applies to all source ports in the active channel Parameters FixedFreq Fixed stimulus and analyzer frequency RST 1 GHz Default unit Hz Example FUNC XTIMe POW A1 Activate a time sweep and select the wave quantity a1 as mea sured parameter for channel and...

Page 1208: ... corresponds to the sweep range or CW frequency of the ana lyzer i e Numerator Denominator 1 Off set 0 Hz Default unit 1 Denominator See above Numerator Range The converted frequency or frequency range must be within the external generator s frequency range In addition the Denominator values are rounded to positive integer numbers zero is not allowed RST 1 Default unit 1 Offset See above Numerator...

Page 1209: ...sweeps or a CW frequency for power time and CW Mode sweeps Note The frequency formula is applied even if the analyzer returns an error message because the frequency is outside the allowed range Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Test port number of the analyzer Parameters Numerator Parameters of the frequency formula The port frequency fp is calculated according to fp Numerator Denominator fb Offset w...

Page 1210: ...la with fb 0 is applied the com mand defines a fixed frequency RST SWEep Example RST FREQ STAR 1E 9 STOP 1 1E 9 Reset the analyzer activating a frequency sweep and set the sweep range between 1 GHz and 1 1 GHz SOUR FREQ2 CONV ARB IFR 2 1 1E 9 SWE Convert the source frequency at test port no 2 to the range between 3 GHz and 3 2 GHz SENSe FREQuency CONVersion GAIN LMCorrection ON Enable the load mat...

Page 1211: ...gnment before defining other port properties such as common or differential mode impedances whenever a logical port is created using SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt the parameters of all existing logical ports are reset For the R S ZNBT this is not the case For the R S ZNBT a balanced port can only be created from ports in the same port group Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Identifying number of the newly cr...

Page 1212: ...the physical port no 1 Example SOUR GRO PORT 1 3 Define logical ports no 1 and 3 as used group 1 logical ports 2 and 4 as unused SOUR GRO Query the port group no 1 The response is 1 3 SOUR GRO CLE SOUR GRO Dissolve port group 1 and repeat the query The response is again 1 n all logical ports used Manual operation See Select Predefined Port on page 257 SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt CLEar Scope Dissolves ba...

Page 1213: ...SOURce Ch GROup Grp SIMultaneous FOFFset MOFFset BWFactor 1222 SOURce Ch GROup Grp SIMultaneous FOFFset CONDition 1223 SOURce Ch GROup COUNt Queries the number of port groups in channel no Ch Suffix Ch Channel number Example See SOURce Ch GROup Grp on page 1213 Usage Query only Manual operation See Controls and Functions on page 531 SOURce Ch GROup Grp arg0 arg1 In set direction this command defin...

Page 1214: ...ed and a default port group 1 consisting of all available ports is restored the Grp suffix is ignored If ALL is omitted only the specified port group is dissolved except the deleted port group was the only one in which case again default port group 1 is restored In case an undefined port group number is used the analyzer generates an error mes sage Example See SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt on page 1211 Us...

Page 1215: ... Functions on page 531 SOURce Ch GROup Grp PORDer PortOrder R S ZNBT only Sets or queries the drive port order of the related DUT port group created using SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORts Suffix Ch Channel number Grp DUT port group number Parameters PortOrder By default empty string the ordering of the related physical VNA ports is used An alternative drive port ordering can be specified as a complete c...

Page 1216: ...Grp PPORts pport1 pport2 Defines queries port groups In set direction this command creates port group Grp from physical VNA ports pport1 pport2 In get direction it returns the physical VNA ports making up group Grp Note Port groups must be created in ascending order i e first create port group 1 then port group 2 etc By default there is a single port group which contains all physical VNA ports def...

Page 1217: ...al VNA port PhyPort to DUT Grp port DestinationPort The query returns the connected DUT port if any Note The related port group must have been created before using SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORts Neither physical VNA ports nor DUT ports may be connected more than once Suffix Ch Channel number Grp Port group number PhyPort Number of a physical VNA port in port group Grp Parameters DestinationPort Number...

Page 1218: ...ure ments on an R S ZNB ZNBT with Internal Second Source Note For a R S ZNB with a single internal source or a R S ZNBT frequency shifted par allel measurements are not available The port groups have to be set up exactly as in the VNA GUI when Enabled is selected in the Define Parallel Measurement dialog The measurement is then performed on port group 1 ports 1 and 2 and port group 2 ports 3 and 4...

Page 1219: ...Command Reference R S ZNB ZNBT 1219 User Manual 1173 9163 02 53 Grp Parameters arg0 ON OFF activates or deactivates frequency shifted parallel measurements SCPI Command Reference ...

Page 1220: ...PORT3 DPORt 2 SOUR GRO2 PPORT4 DPORt 1 INIT IMM WAI Assign DUT Ports to VNA Ports CALCulate1 PARameter SDEFine Trc2 S34 DISPlay WINDow1 TRACe2 FEED Trc2 WAI Add and display a second trace for the second DUT note that S34 with VNA poert numbers corresponds to S21 at the second DUT SOURce GROup SIMultaneous FOFFset MOFFSet DVALue 6 MHz SOURce GROup SIMultaneous FOFFset MOFFset MODE DIRect Set minimu...

Page 1221: ...ich is actually used may be larger than the minimum offset as the firm ware chooses the smallest multiple of the frequency step size between the points in a segment or in a linear frequency sweep respectively which is larger than the minimum offset Suffix Ch Channel number If unspecified this parameter is set to 1 Grp Parameters arg0 DIRect BANDwidth DIRect The minimum frequency offset to be used ...

Page 1222: ...nimum frequency offset To get the resulting frequency offset the minimum frequency off set is rounded to a multiple of the current frequency step size Range 0 Hz to 17 MHz RST 1 MHz Default unit Hz Example See SOURce Ch GROup Grp SIMultaneous FOFFset STATe Manual operation See Minimum Offset on page 533 SOURce Ch GROup Grp SIMultaneous FOFFset MOFFset BWFactor arg0 This command is related to Paral...

Page 1223: ...erformed so that no information about Simultaneous Measurement with Frequency Offset is available This query waits until all previous commands are fully executed because these com mands may affect the operation mode of Simultaneous Measurement with Frequency Offset Suffix Ch Channel number If unspecified this is set to 1 Grp Return values errorCode 0 switched off Simultaneous Measurement with Freq...

Page 1224: ...an actual frequency offset of several MHz can be used Please note however that a small minimum fre quency offset combined with a large frequency step size may lead to a large actual frequency offset 9 extended stimulus buffer too large Internally the firmware uses additional measurement points which are completely transparent to the user However the num ber of sweep points entered by the user plus...

Page 1225: ...e Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect METHod 1233 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect PMReadings 1234 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect RRECeiver 1234 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection DATA PARameter Wv COUNt 1235 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection GENerator Gen STATe 1235 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection IMODulation LTONe ACQuire 1235 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection IMODulation UTONe ACQu...

Page 1226: ...al values where Each value corresponds to the ratio of the actual power at the reference plane value provided by the used source to the uncalibrated power in dB The number n is equal to the number of sweep points Increasing decreasing the values in the correction data sets increases decreases the power at the reference plane Writing correction data the setting command fails if the number of transf...

Page 1227: ...Index Gets settings of the available power calibrations Suffix Ch Number of the calibrated channel Wv Number of the power calibration Use SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection DATA PARameter Wv COUNt on page 1235 to query the number of available power calibrations Query parameters SettingType WAVE STARt STOP POINts STYPe ATTenuation CPOWer CFRequency TSTamp LTSTamp TVNA MVNA MTESt FSMode WAVE Calibrate...

Page 1228: ...t was used during cali bration STEP Stepped mode for all segments ANAL Swept mode for at least one segment Because swept mode is limited to frequency sweeps this always returns STEP Index If one or more external switch matrices were used during cali bration this refers to the index of a particular switch matrix see SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr DEFine on page 1275 Usage Query only Manual...

Page 1229: ...the External Power Meters dialog Suffix Ch Calibrated channel number PhyPt Calibrated port number This suffix is ignored because the port number is specified in the parameter list Setting parameters SourceType PORT GENerator A1 A2 A3 A4 ESRC1 ESRC2 PORT analyzer port is the source of the calibrated wave GENerator external generator is the source The port and generator numbers are specified by mean...

Page 1230: ...rm a source power calibration using the external generator no 1 as a source SOUR POW CORR GEN Check whether the calibration is applied the response is 1 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Port Overview on page 447 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection ACQuire VERification RESult Returns and deletes the result of the last verification sweep The response contains three values Channel calibrated chan...

Page 1231: ... The command is valid for all channels ports and external generators Equivalent command SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection NREadings Suffix Ch Calibrated channel number This parameter is ignored the limit applies to all channels PhyPt Calibrated port number This parameter is ignored the limit applies to all sources Parameters NoReadings Number of readings Range 1 to 100 RST 2 Example See SOURce Ch P...

Page 1232: ...s ignored the conver gence factor is valid for all sources Parameters Convergence Convergence factor Range 0 to 2 Increment 0 1 RST 0 8 Example See SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection ACQuire Manual operation See Flatness Cal Convergence on page 492 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect FLATness arg0 Enables or disables the source power calibration The command is valid for all chan nels ports and ...

Page 1233: ...ter is ignored the method is valid for all channels PhyPt Calibrated port number This parameter is ignored the selected calibration method is used for all sources Parameters PowerCalMethod PMONly RRAFter RRONly PMONly Power meter only i e only the power meter is used during cali bration To enable a reference reveiver and or source flatness calibra tion set SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect ...

Page 1234: ...eps SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect AVERage COUNt the latter is adjusted Range 1 to 100 RST 1 Example See SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection ACQuire SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect RRECeiver arg0 Enables or disables calibration of the reference receiver together with the source power calibration Note It is not possible to disable flatness calibration SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRectio...

Page 1235: ...ernal generator has been performed SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection ACQuire To enable or disable a source power calibration for an analyzer port use SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection STATe Suffix Ch Calibrated channel number PhyPt Calibrated port number This suffix is ignored the generator is selected via Gen Gen Generator number Parameters Boolean Enables ON or disables OFF the source power calibr...

Page 1236: ...e power calibration for the lower tone at the previ ously selected source port 1 SOUR POW CORR IMOD UTON Start source power calibration for the upper tone at the previ ously selected source port 3 CORR POW IMOD ACQ Start receiver power calibration at the previously selected receive port 2 CALC PAR SDEF IM_Meas IP3UI Create a new channel no 2 and a trace named IM_Meas Select the upper 3rd order int...

Page 1237: ...ibrated port number This parameter is ignored the limit applies to all sources Parameters NoCalSweeps Number of readings Range 1 to 100 RST 2 Example See SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection ACQuire Manual operation See Flatness Cal Max Iterations on page 492 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection OSOurces STATe Boolean Switches off all other sources during the calibration sweep for channel Ch Suffix Ch Cal...

Page 1238: ...zer and the power range of the external power meter RST 0 dBm Default unit dBm Example See SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection ACQuire Manual operation See Reference Receiver Cal Power on page 495 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection PSELect CalPower Qualifies how to define the source power which the R S ZNB ZNBT uses to perform the first calibration sweep of the source power calibration Reference Receiv...

Page 1239: ...ction ACQuire Manual operation See Port Overview on page 500 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection TCOefficient STATe Boolean Enables or disables the use of two port transmission coefficients Suffix Ch Calibrated channel number This parameter is ignored the trans mission coefficient settings are valid for all channels PhyPt Calibrated port number This parameter is ignored the transmis sion coefficient ...

Page 1240: ... two port transmission coefficients SOUR POW CORR TCO FEED Trc1 Replace the previous 3 points by the trace points of the default trace Trc1 Example MMEM STOR CORR TCO C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna PowerMeterCorr Test pmcl Store the power loss list to the power meter correction list file Test pmcl in the directory C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna PowerMeterCorr MMEM LOAD CORR...

Page 1241: ...ent to the end of the power loss list The query returns the frequency and transmission coefficient no ListNo Suffix Ch Calibrated channel number This parameter is ignored the trans mission coefficient settings are valid for all channels PhyPt Calibrated port number This parameter is ignored the transmis sion coefficient settings are valid for all sources ListNo Number of point in the list This suf...

Page 1242: ...DELete ListNo DUMMy Deletes a single point no ListNo in the power loss list Suffix Ch Calibrated channel number This parameter is ignored the trans mission coefficient settings are valid for all channels PhyPt Calibrated port number This parameter is ignored the transmis sion coefficient settings are valid for all sources ListNo Number of point in the list Example See SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRect...

Page 1243: ...t Calibrated port number This parameter is ignored the transmis sion coefficient settings are valid for all sources ListNo Number of point to insert in the list Parameters Frequency Stimulus frequency value If several points with identical fre quencies are added the analyzer automatically ensures a fre quency spacing of 1 Hz Range Stimulus values outside the frequency range of the analyzer are all...

Page 1244: ...n the measurement this defines the minimum settling delay before the external generators are considered to be ready i e the time between setting the generator to the requested frequency and power and continuing with the measurement This is a global setting Parameters SettlingDelay Settling delay per sweep point Factory default is 10 µs 10 5s Default unit s Manual operation See External Generators ...

Page 1245: ...delay at subsequent sweep starts i e the time between power reset and sweep start when a new sweep is requested This is a global setting Parameters SettlingDelay Settling delay Default unit s Manual operation See Settling Delay Reset Delay on page 683 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude IntSourcePow Defines the power of the internal signal source channel base power The setting is valid...

Page 1246: ...URce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection LEVel OFFSet Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Test port number of the analyzer Parameters Offset Port specific power offset Range 300 dB to 300 dB adjust to the analyzer s actual source power range and the test setup Increment 0 01 dB other values are rounded RST 0 dB Default unit dB OffsetType ONLY CPADd ONLY only the port specific power is used the channel power is i...

Page 1247: ... 0 dB GHz Default unit DB GHZ Example See SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude Manual operation See Slope on page 524 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection GENerator Gen LEVel OFFSet Offset Specifies a gain positive values or an attenuation negative values in the signal path between the external generator and the calibrated reference plane The value has no impact on the generator power Suffi...

Page 1248: ...tive values or an attenuation negative values in the signal path between the source port and the calibrated reference plane The value has no impact on the source power Suffix Ch Calibrated channel number PhyPt Calibrated port number Parameters Offset Gain or attenuation value Range 300 dB to 300 dB adjust to the test setup Increment 0 01 dB other values are rounded RST 0 dB Default unit dB Example...

Page 1249: ...unit dB Mode ONLY CPADd ONLY only the port specific power is used the channel power is ignored CPADd the port specific power is added as an offset to the channel power RST CPADd Example RST SOUR POW 6 Reset the instrument activating a frequency sweep and set the internal source power channel power for the default channel 1 to 6 dBm SYST COMM RDEV GEN1 DEF Ext Gen 1 SME02 gpib0 21 SYST COMM RDEV GE...

Page 1250: ...S SME02 generator as external generator no 1 assigning the name Ext Gen 1 and a GPIB address 21 SOUR POW GEN PERM ON Activate the generator as an external signal source Manual operation See Gen on page 520 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt GENerator Gen STATe Boolean Turns an external generator numbered Gen on or off Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Test port number of the analyzer This suffix is ignored the ge...

Page 1251: ...re than one internal source is not supported In this case only external generators can be used as permanent signal sources Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Test port number of the analyzer Parameters Boolean ON power at port PhyPt is permanently on OFF power is only on for the partial measurements that require the port as a drive port RST OFF Example SOUR POW2 STAT ON Switch the RF power at port no ...

Page 1252: ...olean ON OFF turns the internal source power at the specified test port no PhyPt on or off RST ON Example RST SOUR POW 6 Set the internal source power for channel 1 and all test ports to 6 dBm SOUR POW2 STAT Query whether the source power at test port 2 is on The ana lyzer returns a 1 Manual operation See RF Off on page 520 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STARt StartPower SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STOP StopPowe...

Page 1253: ...Tus commands control the status reporting system Status registers are not reset by RST use CLS for this purpose STATus PRESet 1254 STATus QUEStionable EVENt 1254 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity EVENt 1254 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware EVENt 1254 STATus QUEStionable LIMit Lev EVENt 1254 STATus QUEStionable CONDition 1254 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity CONDition 1254 STATus QUEStionable INTegr...

Page 1254: ...EVENt STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware EVENt STATus QUEStionable LIMit Lev EVENt These commands return the contents of the EVENt parts of the QUEStionable QUEStionable INTegrity QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware and QUEStionable LIMit Lev status registers Reading an EVENt register clears it Suffix Lev Selects one of the two QUEStionable LIMit registers see STATus QUEStionable LIMit 1 2 on page...

Page 1255: ...t Values of the Status Reporting System on page 747 Suffix Lev Selects one of the two QUEStionable LIMit registers see STATus QUEStionable LIMit 1 2 on page 741 Parameters BitPattern Range 0 to 65535 decimal representation RST n a Example STAT QUES LIM2 ENAB 6 Set bits no 1 and 2 of the QUEStionable LIMit2 ENABle register STATus QUEStionable NTRansition BitPattern STATus QUEStionable INTegrity NTR...

Page 1256: ...mple STAT QUES LIM2 PTR 6 Set bits no 1 and 2 of the QUEStionable LIMit2 PTRansition register STATus QUEue NEXT Queries and at the same time deletes the oldest entry in the error queue Operation is identical to that of SYSTem ERRor NEXT The entry consists of an error number and a short description of the error Positive error numbers are instrument dependent Negative error numbers are reserved by t...

Page 1257: ...1267 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator Gen SEPMode 1268 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator Gen SEPower 1268 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer CATalog 1268 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer CONFigure AUTO STATe 1269 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt 1269 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer DELete 1269 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer Pmtr AZERo 1270 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer Pmtr ...

Page 1258: ...he 1 based index of the cal kit to be used mandatory For other calibration units this parameter is optional but if it is provided it must be set to 1 Example SYST COMM AKAL CONN THR 1 2 Connect a through standard between ports 1 and 2 of the cal unit Usage Setting only Manual operation See Apply Cancel on page 427 SYSTem COMMunicate AKAL MMEMory STATe Boolean Shows or hides the memory of the activ...

Page 1259: ...of Device Clear GPIB interface messages DCL SDC Parameters Boolean Manual operation See GPIB Address on page 688 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF INIT WAIT Boolean Determines queries the execution behavior of INITiate IMMediate commands see Chapter 8 3 8 INITiate Commands on page 1015 If set to ON an automatic WAI is added see Chapter 8 2 Common Commands on page 750 i e the commands execute synchronou...

Page 1260: ...efault setting LFEoi the analyzer recognizes an LF character sequence with or without the EOI control bus message as a receive termina tor An accidental LF in a data block can be recognized as a terminator and cause an interruption of the data transfer The EOI setting is especially important if commands are transferred in block data for mat because it ensures that the parser for command decoding i...

Page 1261: ...DEV AKAL ADDR ZV Z52 1234 Select the cal unit named ZV Z52 1234 for calibration CORR COLL AUTO 1 2 4 Perform an automatic 3 port TOSM calibration at test ports 1 2 and 4 using the calibration unit s default calibration kit file and arbitrary test ports of the cal unit Manual operation See Cal Unit on page 420 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess ALL Queries the names USB addresses of all connec...

Page 1262: ...Nge Factory Query the frequency range of the factory calibration SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL PORTs Factory Query the port assignment of the factory calibration SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL CKIT STANdard CATalog Factory Query the standards of the factory calibration Possible response MOP P1 MSH P1 MMMT P1 MOP P2 MSH P2 MMMT P2 denotes an Open m Short m and Match m standard at each of the por...

Page 1263: ...stored on an SD card inserted at the calibration unit Example See SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL CKIT CATalog Usage Query only Manual operation See Characterization on page 421 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL FRANge CalKitName Queries the frequency range of the cal unit characterization calkit file CalKitName The response consists of the start and stop frequencies in Hz separated by a comma 0 0 i...

Page 1264: ...log Usage Query only Manual operation See Characterization on page 421 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL PREDuction STATe Boolean Enables or disables automatic power reduction at all test ports while an automatic cali bration is active Parameters Boolean Power reduction enabled or disabled RST ON Example SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL PREDuction OFF Disable automatic power reduction Manual operatio...

Page 1265: ...CKIT SDATa SecondPort Second port number for two port standards Port numbers can be omitted if the cal kit data is valid for all ports Example See SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL CKIT CATalog Usage Query only Manual operation See Characterization on page 421 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL WARMup STATe Queries the warmup state of the connected calibration unit R S ZV_Z5x If several cal units are U...

Page 1266: ... GENerator COUNt Queries the number of configured external generators The response is an integer number of generators Example See SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator Gen CATalog Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator Gen DEFine GenName Driver Interface Address FastSweep ExtReference Configures an external generator and adds it to the list of available generators Suffix Gen Number o...

Page 1267: ...696 FastSweep ON OFF Optional Boolean parameter enables or disables the fast sweep mode ExtReference ON OFF Optional Boolean parameter sets the analyzer to internal OFF or external ON reference frequency Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN1 DEF Ext Gen 1 SME02 gpib0 21 Configure an R S SME02 generator as external generator no 1 assigning the name Ext Gen 1 and a GPIB address 21 SYST COMM RDEV GEN1 DEF Quer...

Page 1268: ...vices on page 697 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator Gen SEPower Power Defines the external generator power value after the end of a sweep The setting is rel evant if the generator is switched to a user selected power see example Suffix Gen Generator number Parameters Power End power Range 145 dBm to 30 dBm RST 0 dBm Default unit dBm Example SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator SEPMode USER Swit...

Page 1269: ...R S NRPxxS SN power sensors If the func tion is enabled the analyzer automatically configures all power sensors detected at any of the USB ports as Pmtr 1 Pmtr 2 Parameters Boolean ON OFF enable or disable auto configuration Example See SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer Pmtr DEFine Manual operation See Auto Config on page 695 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt Queries the number of configured...

Page 1270: ...on is overwritten Power meters can be assigned several times so that the number of configured power meters is practically unlimited Parameters PmtrName Name of the external power meter string parameter An empty string means that no particular name is assigned to the power meter Driver Power meter type string parameter The power meter type is identical with the name of the power meter driver file p...

Page 1271: ...onfiguration The analyzer returns an error message because the power meter no 1 is no longer con figured Manual operation See Configured Devices on page 693 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer Pmtr SPCorrection STATe Boolean Gets sets the state of the built in S parameter correction that is available on certain R S NRP Z power sensors Note that this state is persistently stored on the power sensor a...

Page 1272: ...action wil be terminated Usage Event SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure END Ends a manual RF connection configuration if the configuration is valid it will be acti vated commit Otherwise an error is returned and the new configuration is discar ded i e the previous configuration remains active rollback In any case the transaction will be terminated Note a manual RF connection configuratio...

Page 1273: ...S ZNB ZNBT creates an in memory copy of the active con figuration and strips off all RF conncections from this copy Subsequent RF connection actions such as SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr CONFigure MVNA and SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr CONFigure MTESt operate on the copy However the copy contains the very same switch matrices as the original so the ade quate set of matrices has...

Page 1274: ...ce SMATrix1 CONFigure MTESt 1 1 2 2 9 3 10 4 Configure 4 matrix test ports only matrix test port 1 is test port 1 matrix test port 2 is test port 2 matrix test port 9 is test port 3 and matrix test port 10 is test port 4 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure END Apply the manual RF connection configuration Usage Event SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure TVNA TestPort1 VNAPort1 Sets...

Page 1275: ...matrices connected via USB or Direct Control Returns a comma separated list Driver_1 Interface_1 Address_1 Driver_N Interface_N Address_N one triple Driver_n Interface_n Address_n for each detected switch matrix Matr 1 N Use SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr DEFine to configure them Usage Query only Manual operation See Scan Instruments on page 703 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr DEF...

Page 1276: ...ng parameter USB USB interface LAN LAN interface DIRECTCTRL Direct control interface Address Interface specific address string parameter Example SYST COMM RDEV SMATrix1 DEF ZN Z84 42 USB 101142 Register switch matrix no 1 type R S ZN Z84 2x24 with serial number 101142 at USB interface SYST COMM RDEV SMATrix2 DEF ZV Z81 05 LAN 10 10 10 10 Register switch matrix no 2 type R S ZV Z81 model 05 at IP a...

Page 1277: ...r CONFigure MLTest Matrix Test Port Label TPNumber Sets gets the matrix test port connections Similar to SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr CONFigure MTESt but uses the front panel labels of the matrix test ports instead By default these labels are only available for some matrix types Note a manual RF connection configuration must be performed within a transaction enclosed by the commands SYS...

Page 1278: ...at 1 Example See SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure STARt Manual operation See Edit Test Port Connection on page 709 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr CONFigure MVNA MatrixVNAPort VNAPort Sets gets the RF connections between switch matrix and VNA as a comma separated list of port numbers Note a manual RF connection configuration must be performed within a transaction enclosed by th...

Page 1279: ...eturns an Invalid suffix error Usage Query only Manual operation See Configured Devices on page 703 8 3 17 2 SYSTem DATA MEMory These commands allow you to configure memory mapped trace data transfer See Chapter 5 4 3 Memory Mapped Trace Data Transfer on page 146 SYSTem DATA MEMory ADD TraceName DataFormat NumberOfPoints Adds trace TraceName to a previously initialized shared memory buffer Traces ...

Page 1280: ...ed using SYSTem DATA MEMory SIZE To delete the buffer and free its memory use SYSTem DATA MEMory DELete ShMemName or SYSTem DATA MEMory RESet For background information see Chapter 5 4 3 Memory Mapped Trace Data Trans fer on page 146 Setting parameters ShMemName Gives the shared memory buffer a name which is required by processes that want to access it The name must be unique within the running Wi...

Page 1281: ...ead the trace data from the buffer For background information see Chapter 5 4 3 Memory Mapped Trace Data Trans fer on page 146 Usage Query only SYSTem DATA MEMory RESet Deletes all shared memory buffers initialized using SYSTem DATA MEMory INITalize For background information see Chapter 5 4 3 Memory Mapped Trace Data Trans fer on page 146 Usage Event SYSTem DATA MEMory SIZE Queries the size of th...

Page 1282: ...YSTem FPReset 1287 SYSTem FREQuency 1288 SYSTem HELP HEADers 1288 SYSTem HELP SYNTax 1288 SYSTem HELP SYNTax ALL 1289 SYSTem IDENtify STRing 1289 SYSTem IDENtify FACTory 1289 SYSTem INFO CONTrast 1289 SYSTem KLOCk 1290 SYSTem LANGuage 1290 SYSTem LOGGing REMote STATe 1290 SYSTem OPTions FACTory 1291 SYSTem OPTions STRing 1291 SYSTem PASSword CENable 1291 SYSTem PRESet DUMMy 1291 SYSTem PRESet REMo...

Page 1283: ...ber Month Month two digit number 01 for January to 12 for December Day Day two digit number 01 to the number of days in the month Example SYST DATE Response 2012 05 01 it is the 1st of May 2012 SYSTem DFPRint Queries the device footprint The device footprint contains detailed information about the instrument and is mostly used for service purposes Usage Query only Manual operation See Save Print S...

Page 1284: ... light background BWLStyles black and white line styles BWSolid black and white solid Example SYST DISP COL LBAC Independent of the selected color scheme hardcopies are always generated with the light background scheme Manual operation See Color Scheme on page 662 SYSTem DISPlay CONDuctances Boolean Changes the presentation of capacitance C i in parallel with resistance R i circuit blocks in lumpe...

Page 1285: ...like in manual control ONCE switch the display on and show the current trace This parameter can be used for occasional checks of the measure ment results or settings The measurement is continued how ever the measurement results are not updated Compared to the ON setting ONCE does not slow down the measurement speed Example SYST DISP UPD ON Switch the display on to view the traces and diagrams SYST...

Page 1286: ...ISPlay STATe OFF ON For SCPI error 113 Undefined header no tooltip is displayed Parameters Boolean ON OFF enable disable display of information popups for remote control errors RST ON Example SYST ERR DISP STATe ON REM ON Switch the display of information popups for remote command errors on FREQ STAR 1 Generate a Remote Error 222 Data out of range tooltip Manual operation See Show Remote Error Inf...

Page 1287: ... See SYSTem ERRor DISPlay ERRor and SYSTem ERRor DISPlay REMote Manual operation See Show Instrument Messages on page 678 SYSTem FIRMware UPDate VNASetupFile Installs a firmware version stored in a VNA setup file exe on the analyzer The installation is automatic and does not require any further action Setting parameters VNASetupFile String variable for the name and directory of a VNA setup file Ex...

Page 1288: ...used in all sweep modes Query parameters MinMax MINimum MAXimum Return values Frequency MINimum MAXimum Return minimum or maximum frequency Example See SENSe Ch FREQuency CENTer Usage Query only Manual operation See Start Frequency Stop Frequency Center Frequency Span Frequency on page 385 SYSTem HELP HEADers ParserName Returns a list of all SCPI commands supported by the related parser or the def...

Page 1289: ...See Define IDN OPT on page 689 SYSTem IDENtify FACTory Resets the response to the IDN query to the factory default value This command overwrites a user defined identification string see example Example SYSTem IDENtify STRing MyDevice IDN Define an identity string The response is MyDevice SYSTem IDENtify FACTory IDN Re activate the factory setting The response is Rohde Schwarz instrument type ports...

Page 1290: ... analyzers of the R S ZVR and R S ZVA B T families PNA HP8510 HP8720 HP8753 HP8714 HP8530 ENA compatibility with network analyzers from other manu facturers RST n a a reset does not affect the language setting The factory setting is SCPI Example SYST LANG PNA Select a PNA compatible command set Manual operation See Remote Language on page 688 SYSTem LOGGing REMote STATe Boolean Enables logging of ...

Page 1291: ...eration See Define IDN OPT on page 689 SYSTem PASSword CENable Password Sends a password to the analyzer enabling a class of service functions to function Command ENable Service functions are activated with the commands of the DIAGnostic system and should be used by a R S service representative only Setting parameters Password Case sensitive string variable Sending an invalid password gen erates e...

Page 1292: ...e GUI and the SYSTem PRESet DUMMy command The RST com mand always resets all open recall sets Parameters Scope ALL SINGle ALL All open recall sets are deleted and a new recall set Set1 is cre ated according to the current preset mode See SYSTem PRESet USER STATe on page 1293 SINGle The active setup is reset according to the current preset mode the name of the active setup and the parameters of all...

Page 1293: ...set is performed Example SYST PRES USER NAME C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna RecallSets Setup_2 znx Select a setup file for the user defined preset SYST PRES USER ON Enable the user defined preset SYSTem PRESet REMote ON Align RST and SYSTem PRESet to the user defined preset RST Perform the user defined preset Manual operation See Preset Configuration on page 673 SYSTem PRESet USER CAL ...

Page 1294: ... See Preset Configuration on page 673 SYSTem SETTings UPDate Activate Initiates an immediate update of the channel or trace settings The command has an effect if the analyzer operates in single sweep mode INITiate Ch CONTinuous OFF and if the display update is switched off SYSTem DISPlay UPDate OFF In this scenario a change of the channel or trace settings is usually not taken into account immedia...

Page 1295: ...imizes measurement precision by always using best possible routes according to matrix specific route prioriza tion SYSTem SHUTdown Unit Performs a shutdown or restart of the FW or OS If the optional parameter Unit is omitted Windows is shutdown afer a time out period of 10 seconds Setting parameters Unit HALT REBoot ABORt CLOSe RESTart HALT Windows is shutdown afer a time out period of 20 seconds ...

Page 1296: ...pter 11 1 1 Windows Operating System on page 1379 Parameters Hours Range 0 23 Minutes Range 0 59 Seconds Range 0 59 Example SYST TIME Response 12 0 0 it is precisely 12 pm SYSTem TRESet STATe Boolean Defines the behavior of the INITiate Ch IMMediate DUMMy and INITiate IMMediate ALL Parameters Boolean OFF 0 Previous trace data are preserved ON 1 Previous trace data are deleted This is a global sett...

Page 1297: ... 670 SYSTem USER DISPlay TITLe String Defines a title for the remote display i e for the screen that is shown at the instrument if a remote session is established and the standard display is switched off Parameters String Title string A n in the string starts a new line see example RST empty string Example SYST USER DISP TITL DON T TOUCH nRemote test running Define a title for the remote display S...

Page 1298: ...efault keys SYSTem VERSion Returns the SCPI version number to which the analyzer complies The analyzer com plies to the final SCPI version 1999 0 Example SYST VERS Query the SCPI version The response is 1999 0 Usage Query only 8 3 18 TRACe Commands The TRACe commands handle active trace data and trace data stored in the ana lyzer s internal memory Trace data formats Trace data is transferred in ei...

Page 1299: ...Ce COPY TRACe DATA STIMulus ALL TRACe DATA RESPonse ALL CALCulate Chn MATH EXPRession DEFine TRACe COPY MemTraceName DataTraceName Copies a data trace to a memory trace The trace to be copied can be specified by two alternative methods As the active data trace of channels 1 to 4 CH1DATA CH2DATA CH3DATA CH4DATA If a mathematical trace is active the associated data trace is copied As a trace with a ...

Page 1300: ...OPY Mem_Pt20 CH1DATA Copy the current state of the created trace to a memory trace named Mem_Pt20 The memory trace is not displayed DISP WIND TRAC2 FEED MEM_PT20 Display the created memory trace in the active diagram area diagram area no 1 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Data to Destination on page 302 TRACe COPY MATH MemTraceName DataTraceName Copies a mathematical trace to a memory trace...

Page 1301: ...e of channel 1 omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1 CALC MATH SDEF Trc1 2 CALC MATH STAT ON Define a mathematical trace dividing the data trace by 2 Acti vate the mathematical mode and display the mathematical trace instead of the data trace TRAC COPY MATH Mem_Pt20 CH1DATA CALC MATH STAT OFF Copy the current state of the mathematical trace to a memory trace named Mem_Pt20 The memory trace is not displ...

Page 1302: ...time of 10 ms Manual operation See Delay on page 410 TRIGger Ch SEQuence LINK MeasSequence Selects the triggered measurement sequence The identifier for the sequence is a string variable Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters MeasSequence Triggered measurement sequence string variable SWEep trigger event starts an entire sweep SEGMent trigger event starts a sweep segment if segmented frequency sweep ...

Page 1303: ...easurement see TRIGger Ch SEQuence LINK DelayTime Delay time Range 0 s to 13680 s Increment 10 ms RST 0 s Default unit s Example See TRIGger Ch SEQuence MULTiple SOURce Manual operation See Source on page 411 TRIGger Ch SEQuence MULTiple SLOPe Num MeasSequence Slope Qualifies whether the multiple trigger events occur on the rising or on the falling edge or on the beginning of the high low level pe...

Page 1304: ...triggered EXT1 Trigger event at EXT TRIG IN or Pin 2 of USER PORT EXT2 Trigger event at pin 25 of USER PORT E1A2 Trigger events at EXT1 AND EXT2 E1O2 Trigger event at EXT1 OR EXT2 MANual Trigger event generated by pressing the Manual Trigger soft key Example TRIG MULT SOUR SWE EXT1 SOUR POIN EXT2 Select external trigger 1 as a trigger source for the entire sweep external trigger 2 as a trigger sou...

Page 1305: ... Parameters TrigSource IMMediate EXTernal MANual MULTiple IMMediate Free run measurement untriggered EXTernal Trigger by external signal applied to the EXT TRIG IN connector or pin 2 of the USER PORT on the rear panel MANual Trigger event generated by pressing the Manual Trigger soft key MULTiple Multiple trigger mode configured by TRIGger Ch SEQuence MULTiple commands Example TRIG SOUR MAN Activa...

Page 1306: ...Channel number n Auxiliary channel number This suffix is ignored it can be set to 1 or omitted Parameters EnableTriggOut Turn trigger output on ON or off OFF no signal RST OFF Example TRIGger CHANnel AUXiliary ENABle ON Turn on the trigger output for channel no 1 channel suffix omit ted TRIGger CHANnel AUXiliary DURation 10 us Change the width of the output trigger pulses TRIGger CHANnel AUXiliary...

Page 1307: ... 1 s RST 1 us Default unit s Example See TRIGger CHANnel Ch AUXiliary n ENABle on page 1306 TRIGger CHANnel Ch AUXiliary n INTerval Type Specifies whether the trigger output pulses are sent once every measurement point or once every sweep Suffix Ch Channel number n Auxiliary channel number This suffix is ignored it can be set to 1 or omitted Parameters Type POINt SWEep ACQuisition A trigger out si...

Page 1308: ...typical example an external generator which must be reconfigured to get ready for the next measurement RST AFTer Example See TRIGger CHANnel Ch AUXiliary n ENABle on page 1306 8 4 R S ZVR ZVABT Compatible Commands The commands in this chapter are supported for compatibility with analyzers of the R S ZVR and R S ZVAB family they do not introduce any new functionality For new programs it is recommen...

Page 1309: ...ct SAVE DEFault 1323 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE DUMMy 1324 SENSe Ch CORRection DATA 1325 SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet PhyPt MAGNitude 1327 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer IFFixed 1327 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer LOFixed 1328 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer RFFixed 1328 SENSe Ch FREQuency MODE 1329 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg CLEar 1329 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg OVERlap 1329 SENSe Ch SWEep ...

Page 1310: ...ect level units for the limit line of the active trace CALC LIM CONT 20 10 Define a limit line segment in the stimulus range between 20 dBm and 10 dBm Usage Setting only CALCulate Chn LIMit RDOMain COMPlex UnitRef Deletes the existing limit line and re defines the physical units of the response values of the limit line The units of the stimulus values are defined via CALCulate Chn LIMit CONTrol DO...

Page 1311: ...ing only CALCulate Chn LIMit RDOMain SPACing Format Deletes the existing limit line and re defines the physical units of the response values of the limit line The units of the stimulus values are defined via CALCulate Chn LIMit CONTrol DOMain Tip This command is complemented by CALCulate Chn LIMit RDOMain COMPlex and CALCulate Chn LIMit RDOMain FORMat Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the...

Page 1312: ...ame Result TestPortNum Creates a trace and assigns a channel number a name and a measurement parame ter to it The trace is not displayed To display a trace defined via CALCulate Ch PARameter DEFine a window must be created DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe ON and the trace must be assigned to this window DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED see example below Traces must be selected to become active traces s...

Page 1313: ... of test ports of the analyzer e g S44 is not available on 2 port analyzers S11 S12 S13 S14 S21 S22 S23 S24 S31 S32 S33 S34 S41 S42 S43 S44 S parameters A B C D Wave quantities b1 b2 b3 b4 received waves R1 R2 R3 R4 Wave quantities a1 a2 a3 a4 reference waves AB AC AD BA BC BD CA CB CD DA dB DC Ratio of wave quantities b1 b2 b1 b3 b4 b3 received waves only AR1 AR2 AR3 AR4 BR1 BR2 BR3 BR4 CR1 CR2 C...

Page 1314: ...r used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number Parameters Boolean ON OFF enable or disable the delta mode RST OFF CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion TARGet SearchValue Defines the target value for the target search of marker no Mk which can be activa ted using CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute TARGet Note This command is the ZVR compatible equivalent of CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk TARGet Su...

Page 1315: ...search mode Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number For a bandfilter search BFILter this numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the band filter search functions always use markers M1 to M4 Parameters Mode MAXimum MINimum RPEak LPEak NPEak TARGet LTARget RTARget BFILter MMAXimum MMINimum SPRogress See CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECu...

Page 1316: ...RKer Mk FUNCtion SELect The marker must be created before using CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk STATe ON Note Together with CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion SELect this command is the ZVR compatible equivalent of CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number For a bandfilter search BFILter this numeric suffix is ignored and may be set...

Page 1317: ...2 Activates a service function mainly for internal use Service functions are identified by groups of numbers separated by dots Parameters SFId1 SFId2 Service function identifier entered as a pseudo numeric value the dots being replaced by commas Five groups of numbers are allowed at maximum See also DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction FORMat DEXPort SOURce Format Defines the format for traces retrieved w...

Page 1318: ...edefined port receiving b1 Note INPut PhyPt ATTenuation is not channel specific the value is valid for all channels Use SENSe Ch POWer ATTenuation to set or query a channel specific attenuation value In presence of External Switch Matrices all VNA ports have to be equipped with receiver step attenuator option Suffix PhyPt Physical port number if unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 Parameter...

Page 1319: ...ive port is independent from the measured quantity Note Use the equivalent command SENSe Chn SWEep SRCPort to address port numbers 4 Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Port PORT no Physical port number In set direction only constants PORT1 to PORT4 can be used RST PORT1 Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Tr1 A1 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the wav...

Page 1320: ... For transmission standards the first two characters denotes the genders on both ends e g FFSNetwork MFSNetwork MMSNetwork Symm network ff symm network mf or symm network mm standard For a complete list of standard types refer to Standard types and their parameters Parameter list String parameters to specify the configured standard CalkitName StandardLabel and numeric parameters defining its prope...

Page 1321: ...AN ck from the default cal kit directory MMEM STOR CKIT ZCAN C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Kits ZCAN calkit Store the imported cal kit data to a VNA cal kit file ZCAN calkit assuming that the cal kit name stored in ZCAN ck reads ZCAN Usage Setting only SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire Standard Dispersion Delay Starts a calibration measurement in order to acquire measure...

Page 1322: ...2 the second number denotes the number of the standard 1 to 3 RST ON Dispersion Optional status parameter for UTHRough standard OFF unknown through standard is non dispersive ON unknown through standard is dispersive RST OFF Delay Optional entry of delay time or phase for UTHRough standard numeric entry of the delay time in ps for non dispersive standards or of an estimate of the phase at the star...

Page 1323: ...h does not introduce any systematic errors none of the measurement results acquired previously SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire is taken into account Tip The main purpose of the default correction data set is to provide a dummy system error correction which you can replace with your own external correction data You may have acquired the external data in a previous session or even on an other in...

Page 1324: ... in continuous mode Usage Event SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE DUMMy Calculates the system error correction data from the acquired one or two port mea surement results SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire stores them and applies them to the calibrated channel Ch To avoid incompatibilities older sys tem error correction data is deleted unless it has been transferred into a cal pool MMEMory STORe C...

Page 1325: ...ENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE DEFault G and H matrices The 7 term calibration types named Txx e g TOM TSM TRM TRL TNA are based on a network analyzer with two ports i and j each equipped with a test receiver and a reference receiver The system errors are described in terms of two error two ports PG and PH The error two port PG is assigned to port i of the analyzer Its transmission matrix G descr...

Page 1326: ...nsions SCORR11 load match at port 1 SCORR12 reverse transmission tracking between port 2 and port 1 G11 G22 G matrix elements see above H22 H matrix elements see above The error terms are dimensionless complex numbers RST n a Parameter Example See SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE DEFault The different calibration types of the analyzer provide the following error terms Calibration type Parameter in...

Page 1327: ...e SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt commands to define the complete set of loss offset parameters SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet PhyPt MAGNitude is equivalent to SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt OFFSet Suffix Ch Channel number of the offset corrected channel PhyPt Port number of the analyzer Parameters OffsetLoss Frequency independent part of the offset loss Range 200 dB to 200 dB Increment 0 0001 dB RST 0...

Page 1328: ...Q CONV MIX LOF 1 GHz Reset the analyzer and specify a fixed frequency of 1 GHz to be assigned to the LO signal FREQ CONV MIX FFIX FIX Query the fixed frequency and the signal assignment using the alternative commands The response is 1000000000 LO SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer RFFixed FixedFrequency Defines a fixed frequency and assigns it to the RF signal for alternative commands see example...

Page 1329: ...eep FREQ CW 100MHz Set the CW frequency to 100 MHz SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg CLEar Deletes all sweep segments in the channel The command is equivalent to SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg DELete ALL Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number This suffix is ignored the command deletes all segments Usage Event SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg OVERlap Boolean Queries whether the analyzer supports overlapping sweep segments...

Page 1330: ...asured parameter for channel and trace no 1 SWE SPAC LOG Change to sweep type Log Frequency SENSe Chn FUNCtion ON SweepType arg1 arg2 Defines the sweep type and the measurement parameter in a single string Note To select a measurement parameter without changing the sweep type use CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure Use the other commands in the CALCulate Ch PARameter subsystem to create or delete trace...

Page 1331: ...ommand refer ence function name POWer S Ptout Ptin S parameter with output and input port number of the DUT e g S11 S21 POWer RATio A Ptout B Ptin A Ptout B Ptin Output A Ptout B Ptin Ratio e g B2 A1 for b2 a1 drive Port 1 POWer A Ptout Wave quantity with stimulus port number of the ana lyzer e g a1 POWer B Ptin Wave quantity with receive port number of the ana lyzer e g b2 POWer Z Ptout Ptin Matc...

Page 1332: ...power calibration for port 3 using power meter no 2 SOUR POW CORR PMET ID 2 Select power meter no 2 SOUR POW CORR ACQ PORT 3 Perform a source power calibration for port 3 using the previ ously selected power meter no 2 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Start Cal Sweep on page 448 TRACe CLEar MemTrace Deletes one of the memory traces Mem n Trc m where n 1 8 Setting parameters MemTrace MDATa1 ...

Page 1333: ...CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine Example SWE POIN 20 Create a trace with 20 sweep points making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1 CALC FORM MLIN FORM ASCII FORM DEXP SOUR FDAT Select the trace data format linear magnitude values ASCII for mat and formatted trace data 1 value per sweep point TRAC CH1DATA Query the 20 response values of the created trace ...

Page 1334: ...points making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1 TRAC STIM CH1DATA Query the 20 stimulus values of the created trace In the default format setting the data is returned as a comma separated list of 10 digit ASCII values Usage Query only R S ZVR ZVABT Compatible Commands ...

Page 1335: ...xamples for programming tasks that almost every user will encounter when working with the R S ZNB ZNBT 9 1 1 Typical Stages of a Remote Control Program A typical remote control program comprises the following stages 1 Performing the basic instrument settings 2 Adjusting the test setup 3 Initiating the measurement command synchronization 4 Retrieving measurement results Very often steps 3 and 4 or ...

Page 1336: ...t switch off the measurement after one sweep reduce the number of sweep points RST INITiate1 CONTinuous OFF SENSe1 SWEep POINts 2 Avoid a delay time between different partial measurements and before the start of the sweeps is default setting SENSe1 SWEep TIME AUTO ON TRIGger1 SEQuence SOURce IMMediate Select the widest bandwidth compatible with your measurement SENSe1 BANDwidth RESolution 10 Adjus...

Page 1337: ...nd of the sweep INITiate1 IMMediate WAI Continue program sequence 2 Start single sweep use OPC If OPC follows INITiate Ch IMMediate it places a 1 into the output queue when the sweep is terminated An appropriate condition in the remote control program must cause the controller to wait until OPC returns one The controller is stopped from the moment when the condition is set Start single sweep in ch...

Page 1338: ...ee Markers and Limit Lines 2 Read complete trace Select a trace format and read formatted trace data CALCulate1 FORMat MLINear Calculate the linear magnitude of z CALCulate1 DATA FDATa Read the formatted trace data Use CALCulate Chn DATA NSWeep FIRSt to retrieve a particular trace within a group of sweeps 9 1 2 Channel Trace and Diagram Handling The following examples show you how to perform basic...

Page 1339: ... 1 One channel two traces one diagram Reset the instrument creating the default trace Trc1 in channel 1 The default measured quantity is the forward transmission S parameter S21 The default format is dB Mag RST Create a second trace in channel 1 assign the format Phase and display the new trace in the same diagram the trace becomes the active trace but is not displayed CALCulate1 PARameter SDEFine...

Page 1340: ... FEED Trc2 DISPlay WINDow3 TRACe3 FEED Trc3 DISPlay WINDow4 TRACe4 FEED Trc4 Check the result on the local screen Go to local SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE 9 1 2 2 Several Traces with Different Channel Settings Programming task Create three channels with 3 1 and 2 traces respectively and display the traces in two diagrams Important remote control features for this program example The following comman...

Page 1341: ...io_trace B1 B2 CALCulate3 PARameter SDEFine Z_trace Z21 CALCulate3 PARameter SDEFine Y_trace Y21 CALCulate3 PARameter SELect Z_trace the trace created previously becomes the active trace for channel 3 So far only the default trace is displayed Check the result on the local screen Go to local SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE 2 Create second diagram and display traces DISPlay WINDow2 STATe ON DISPlay WIND...

Page 1342: ...he com mands for marker settings and for the limit check 2 Diagrams are referenced by a window suffix Wnd An additional suffix WndTr in the DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr commands numbers the dif ferent traces in a diagram 3 The analyzer provides several commands allowing a smooth transition between remote and manual control 1 Create one channel two traces one diagram Reset the instrument creating...

Page 1343: ...CALCulate1 MARKer1 REFerence X 4 5 GHz Use the delta marker to search for the minimum of the trace and query the result the query returns the stimulus and the response value at the marker position CALCulate1 MARKer1 FUNCtion EXECute MIN RES Check the result on the local screen Go to local SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE Use the CALCulate Chn DATA commands to retrieve the complete trace see Retrieving M...

Page 1344: ...ple you are looking for is not in this section we suggest you to refer to the short command sequences in the reference chapter Proceed as follows 1 Find your subject in the help system preferably using context sensitivity of the help system on your network analyzer or the index 2 Activate the link to the command description 3 A short example appears at the end of each command description The comma...

Page 1345: ...DEFault MMEMory STORe TRACe Trc1 Traces S21 s1p You may also read the default path MMEMory CDIRectory and use the external RC program to build the complete paths 9 2 2 Trace and Diagram Handling The following sections provide examples for efficient channel and trace definition and convenient diagram handling 9 2 2 1 Assigning Channels Traces and Diagrams The following example is a short version of...

Page 1346: ...RMAT Create trace CALCULATE1 PARAMETER SDEFINE Trc2 S21 CALCULATE1 PARAMETER SDEFINE Trc3 S31 CALCULATE1 PARAMETER CATALOG Delete trace CALCULATE1 PARAMETER DELETE Trc2 CALCULATE1 PARAMETER CATALOG Assign a trace to a window diagram diagram 1 always exists DISPLAY WINDOW1 TRACE2 FEED TrcDisp Create diagram 2 DISPLAY WINDOW2 STATE DISPLAY WINDOW2 STATE ON DISPLAY WINDOW2 STATE DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE...

Page 1347: ...ixed parameters String Char DISPLAY WINDOW1 TRACE3 FEED Mem3x Trc1 TRACE COPY MDATA4 CH1DATA DISPLAY WINDOW1 TRACE4 FEED Mem4 Trc1 Create new normal trace on channel 1 assign it to a window CALCULATE1 PARAMETER SDEFINE Trc2 S22 DISPLAY WINDOW1 TRACE5 FEED Trc2 CALCULATE1 PARAMETER SELECT Trc2 now active for channel 1 CALCULATE1 PARAMETER SELECT CALCULATE1 PARAMETER CATALOG Create memory trace for ...

Page 1348: ...CULATE3 PARAMETER SELECT Trace_Name CALCULATE3 PARAMETER SELECT TRACE COPY XYZ Ch2Trc1 DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE3 FEED XYZ CALCULATE2 PARAMETER SELECT XYZ CALCULATE2 PARAMETER SELECT TRACE COPY MDATA4 Ch3Trc1 mixed parameters Char String DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE4 FEED Mem4 Ch3Trc1 Copy to existing memory traces update trace data TRACE COPY MDATA6 CH1DATA TRACE COPY XYZ Ch2Trc1 CALCULATE1 PARAMETER CATALO...

Page 1349: ...it to a diagram same for TRC3 TRACE COPY MDATA7 CH1DATA DISPLAY WINDOW1 TRACE3 FEED Mem7 Trc1 TRACE COPY MDATA8 CH2DATA DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE2 FEED Mem8 Trc3 Examples for Trace Mathematics Special operands Data and Mem CALCULATE1 MATH SDEFINE Data Mem CALCULATE1 MATH STATE ON Constants CALCULATE1 MATH SDEFINE Pi e j Functions CALCULATE1 MATH SDEFINE linMag 1 dBMag 2 Arg 3 Re 4 Im 5j CALCULATE1 MAT...

Page 1350: ...evaluation range and retrieve statistical results Reset the analyzer RST SYSTEM DISPLAY UPDATE ON Create new channel and trace CALCULATE2 PARAMETER SDEFINE Trc2 S11 CALCULATE2 PARAMETER SELECT Trc2 DISPLAY WINDOW2 STATE ON DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE1 FEED Trc2 SENSE1 SWEEP TIME AUTO ON SENSE2 SWEEP TIME AUTO ON Search full span evaluation range display statistical results CALCulate1 STATistics DOMain U...

Page 1351: ...f to max CALCulate1 MARKer FUNCtion BWIDth MODE BPASs CALCulate1 MARKer FUNCtion BWIDth MODE BPAS Measure single sweep wait until complete sweep is finished INITiate CONTinuous OFF INITiate WAI CALCulate1 MARKer FUNCtion EXECute BFILter All markers OFF CALCulate1 MARKer AOFF Bandpass search ref to marker CALCulate1 MARKer1 STATe ON CALCulate1 MARKer1 X 3 0 GHz CALCulate1 MARKer FUNCtion BWIDth MOD...

Page 1352: ...trol commands are used to position several dia grams on the screen The remote control commands presented here extend the func tionality of the Display Diagram and Display Split softtool tabs Reset the analyzer RST SYSTEM DISPLAY UPDATE ON Define and display a simple horizontal layout two diagrams side by side DISPlay LAYout DEFine 1 Horizontal 1 00 0 30 0 70 DISPlay LAYout APPLy 1 Define and displ...

Page 1353: ...Join the 2 layouts display the nested layout DISPlay LAYout JOIN 1 2 2 DISPlay LAYout APPLy 1 Check the last applied i e the joined layout for the correct format DISPlay LAYout EXECute 1 1 0 00 0 00 1 2 1 00 1 00 0 30 1 00 1 1 0 70 1 00 2 1 1 00 1 00 1 00 0 50 1 00 0 50 Set the layout format directly horizontal joined layout DISPlay LAYout EXECute 1 1 0 00 0 00 1 2 1 00 1 00 0 30 1 00 1 1 0 70 1 0...

Page 1354: ...ommands have the channel no as a numeric suffix The parameter belongs to a trace the assignment channel trace is done via a active trace for each channel CALCULATE1 PARAMETER SELECT Trc1 Marker ON OFF CALCULATE1 MARKER1 ON CALCULATE1 MARKER1 STATE Coupled Markers All markers belonging to channels with the same sweep type FREQUENCY TIME POWER CW FREQUENCY are coupled decoupled CALCULATE1 MARKER COU...

Page 1355: ...nge CALCULATE1 MARKER1 ON SENSE1 FREQUENCY START 1GHZ SENSE1 FREQUENCY STOP 2GHZ Do the marker search in the format DB Magnitude CALCULATE1 FORMAT MLOGARITHMIC Define marker search ranges stimulus range of the marker search Range 0 is always the stimulus range of the trace can t be changed CALCULATE1 MARKER1 FUNCTION DOMAIN USER 0 CALCulate1 MARKer1 FUNCtion DOMain USER START CALCulate1 MARKer1 FU...

Page 1356: ... CALCULATE1 MARKER1 X 1 5GHZ CALCULATE1 MARKER SEARCH NEXT CALCULATE1 MARKER1 X PEAK RIGHT CALCULATE1 MARKER1 X 1 5GHZ CALCULATE1 MARKER SEARCH RIGHT CALCULATE1 MARKER1 X PEAK LEFT CALCULATE1 MARKER1 X 1 5GHZ CALCULATE1 MARKER SEARCH LEFT CALCULATE1 MARKER1 X Maximum peak search functions CALCULATE1 MARKER1 FUNCTION SELECT MAXIMUM Proceed as for minimum search 9 2 4 Data Handling The following sec...

Page 1357: ...ISPLAY WINDOW3 TRACE1 FEED Trc3 Select sweep time for the channels SENSE1 SWEEP TIME 1 S SENSE2 SWEEP TIME 1 S SENSE3 SWEEP TIME 1 S Enable single sweep mode for all channels so that channel specific sweep count settings are used INITIATE CONTINUOUS ALL OFF Select single swep mode with channel specific sweep count settings Set sweep counts and start measurement in all channels SENSE1 SWEEP COUNT 1...

Page 1358: ...ep INITIATE IMMEDIATE WAI TRACe COPY MATH LastExtr Trc1 Loop over these 2 commands INITIATE IMMEDIATE WAI TRACe COPY MATH LastExtr Trc1 INITIATE IMMEDIATE WAI TRACe COPY MATH LastExtr Trc1 Continuous sweep mode INITIATE CONTINUOUS ON 9 2 4 3 Retrieving the Results of Previous Sweeps The commands CALCulate Ch DATA NSWeep SDATa Trace_Hist_Count retrieve the results of any sweep within a previously d...

Page 1359: ... a single sweep group for channels no 1 and 2 INITIATE CONTinuous ALL OFF INITIATE IMMEDIATE ALL WAI Read trace data without history i e the last trace acquired in each channel CALCULATE1 DATA SDATA CALCULATE2 DATA SDATA Read last and previous trace data in channels 1 and 2 CALCULATE1 DATA NSWEEP SDATA 1 last trace data CALCULATE1 DATA NSWEEP SDATA 3 previous trace data CALCULATE2 DATA NSWEEP SDAT...

Page 1360: ...s s2p COMPlex 3 2 MMEMory STORe TRACe PORTs 1 ParserTouchstonePorts s4p COMPlex 1 4 3 2 9 2 5 Calibration The following programming examples are related to system error correction and power calibration 9 2 5 1 One and Two Port Calibration The following example calibrates one or two analyzer ports Reset the analyzer RST SYSTEM DISPLAY UPDATE ON Set cal kit as active kit for N50 SENSE CORRECTION CKI...

Page 1361: ...COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected SHORT 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected MATCH 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected SHORT 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected MATCH 2 Apply calibration SENSe1 CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected Save load cal files Save calibration in calibration file...

Page 1362: ...ION COLLECT AUTO ASSignment1 DEFine create the second calibration full one port and factory calkit SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AUTO CONFigure FOPort the second cal addresses test port 1 and explicitly assigns it to cal unit port 1 SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT AUTO ASSignment2 DEFine 1 1 get the number of port assignments of the current calibration expected result 1 SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT AUTO ASSign...

Page 1363: ...ect ACQuire SELected THROUGH 1 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected SHORT 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected MATCH 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected SHORT 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected MATCH 2 Apply calibration SENSe1 CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected Save ...

Page 1364: ...SM at ports 1 and 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine XYZ TOSM 1 2 Generate a set of default correction data switch on user calibration SENSe1 CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected DEFault SENSE1 CORRECTION STATE ON In the previous section the following error terms were saved SCORR1 Forward Directivity SCORR2 Forward Source Match SCORR3 Forward Reflection Tracking SCORR4 Forward Isolation SCORR5 ...

Page 1365: ...r2 dat CALCulate1 DATA SCORR3 scorr3 dat We are omitting the isolation term as it is not implemented on the ZVAB CALCulate1 DATA SCORR4 scorr4 dat CALCulate1 DATA SCORR5 scorr5 dat CALCulate1 DATA SCORR6 scorr6 dat CALCulate1 DATA SCORR7 scorr7 dat CALCulate1 DATA SCORR8 scorr8 dat CALCulate1 DATA SCORR9 scorr9 dat We are omitting the isolation term as it is not implemented on the ZVAB CALCulate1 ...

Page 1366: ...CTION COLLECT ACQuire SELected OPEN 2 OFF SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT ACQuire SELected SHORT 2 OFF SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT ACQuire SELected MATCh 2 OFF continue with Calkit 1 e g N 50 Ohm ideal Kit adapter side port 2 SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT ACQuire SELected OPEN 2 ON SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT ACQuire SELected SHORT 2 ON SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT ACQuire SELected MATCh 2 ON non adapter side port...

Page 1367: ...n MIXer FFIXed 200 MHz LO frequency SOURce1 FREQuency1 CONVersion MIXer PFIXed 7 LO power SENSe1 FREQuency1 CONVersion MIXer activate mixer Perform a SMARTerCal CalU on Ports 1 2 and 3 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect PMETer ID 1 1 Powermeter on port1 please connect VNA ports 1 2 3 to Calu ports 1 2 3 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs TYPE PFNPort 1 1 2 2 3 3 please connect Powermeter to port 1 SENSe1...

Page 1368: ...WINDow1 TRACe5 FEED LO_Leak CALCulate3 PARameter SDEFine LO_Thru S23 DISPlay WINDow1 TRACe6 FEED LO_Thru channel names CONFigure CHANnel1 NAME Ch_M CONFigure CHANnel2 NAME CH_RF CONFigure CHANnel3 NAME CH_LO Adjust channels for measurement channel 1 arbitrary remains unchanged channel 2 base frequency reset arbitrary mode SENSe2 FREQuency1 CONVersion FUNDamental trace RF_Isol in channel Ch_RF is m...

Page 1369: ...r 0xBC data 0x0123 CONTROL RFFE2 COMMAND DATA ABC0123 CONTROL RFFE2 COMMAND SEND Reading a Product ID This example assumes knowledge of the RFFE Specification of the MIPI Alliance in particular the RFFE Supported Command Sequences RST DUT Power on sequence CONTrol1 GPIO1 VOLTage 2 5V CONTROL1 GPIO VOLTage OUTPut CONTrol1 GPIO2 VOLTage 1 8V CONTROL1 GPIO VOLTage OUTPut Initialization of DUT with Sl...

Page 1370: ...it for 3 ms CONTrol SEQuence2 DELay 3ms Step 3 CONTrol SEQuence3 GPIO5 VOLTage 1V During sweep output voltage will be 1V Configuring RFFE Sweep Sequencer segmented sweep For segmented sweeps the RFFE device will be configured in preparation of every segment RST Define segmented sweep SENSE1 SEGMENT1 INSERT 1MHZ 1 5MHZ 111 21DBM 0 5S 0 10KHZ SENSE1 SEGMENT2 INSERT 2MHZ 2 5MHZ 222 22DBM 0 5S 0 MAX S...

Page 1371: ...ODel ISD1 COUPon TYPE SYMMetric2x CALCulate FMODel ISD1 COUPon STATe 1 CALCulate FMODel ISD2 COUPon STATe 1 CALCulate FMODel ISD3 COUPon STATe 0 CALCulate FMODel ISD4 COUPon STATe 0 CALCulate FMODel ISD COUPon MEASure Measure the DUT together with the test fixture Connect DUT test fixture to ports 1 and 2 CALCulate FMODel ISD1 DUT STATe 1 CALCulate FMODel ISD2 DUT STATe 1 CALCulate FMODel ISD3 DUT...

Page 1372: ...NBT 1372 User Manual 1173 9163 02 53 CALCulate FMODel ISD1 RUN STATe 1 CALCulate FMODel ISD2 RUN STATe 1 CALCulate FMODel ISD3 RUN STATe 0 CALCulate FMODel ISD4 RUN STATe 0 CALCulate FMODel ISD RUN RUN Condensed Programming Examples ...

Page 1373: ...witched off to avoid damage Hardware errors with possible causes and remedies are listed in the following sections Exceptions indicate anomalous or exceptional events that were not properly han dled by the R S ZNB ZNBT firmware Troubleshooting SCPI errors A misspelled command header causes SCPI error 113 Undefined header a misspelled parameter causes SCPI error 141 Invalid character data The GPIB ...

Page 1374: ... loop PLL fails For external reference check fre quency and level of the supplied ref erence signal 1 Converter clock fre quency lock failure The clock generator for the AD converter clock is phase locked to the reference oscillator The mes sage appears when this PLL fails Oven cold With OXCO option B4 the oven temperature is too low Wait until the oven has been heated up 8 Internal communica tion...

Page 1375: ...y connected and switched on Check the GPIB address exclude address conflicts when using several external power meters or other equip ment 11 Time grid too close The sweep points for a time sweep are too close the analyzer cannot process the measurement data until the next sweep point starts Increase stop time reduce no of points increase IF bandwidth If pos sible reduce number of partial mea surem...

Page 1376: ... manual FPGA update described below is successful or not write down the error code and contact our support 1 Reboot the analyzer 2 Exit the firmware 3 Run the flash utility located at C Program Files Rohde Schwarz Vector Network Analyzer ZNB Bin flash exe 4 Wait until the process has completed 5 Turn off the analyzer a reboot is not sufficient If successful this procedure brings the analyzer back ...

Page 1377: ...create event log files to summarize and save the existing event logs You can send these files to Rohde Schwarz if there is a problem with your device To create Windows event log files 1 Select the Windows Start Button in the bottom left corner 2 Type in Event Viewer and select Enter 3 Select and expand Windows Logs in the Console Tree 4 Right click on each subsection and select Save All Events As ...

Page 1378: ...Current eeprom data A screenshot of the VNA display The latest 5 exception dumps The resulting zip file is written to the report directory C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Report Its file name con tains the current date and time e g report_20180228_1658 zip 10 4 Contacting Customer Support Technical support where and when you need it For quick expert help with any Rohde Schwarz product c...

Page 1379: ...soft ware must be modified only with update software released by Rohde Schwarz Like wise only programs authorized by Rohde Schwarz for use on the instrument must be executed All necessary settings can be accessed from the Windows Start menu in particular from the Control Panel To open the Start menu press the Windows key in the tool bar or on an external keyboard User accounts and password protect...

Page 1380: ...ge 1379 for details To perform a firmware update 1 Copy the setup file to any storage medium accessible from the analyzer This can be either the internal mass storage drive an external storage medium USB mem ory stick external CD ROM drive or a network connection LAN The default name of the internal drive is C External storage devices are automati cally mapped to the next free drive i e D E etc 2 ...

Page 1381: ...the reimaging process to complete 3 Reboot the instrument After the restore upgrade to the desired firmware version see Chapter 11 1 2 Firm ware Installation on page 1380 11 3 Interfaces and Connectors This chapter provides a detailed description of the rear panel connectors of the R S ZNB ZNBT An overview of the available front and rear panel is given in the Get ting Started guide see Chapter 4 2...

Page 1382: ...Pass 14 UC_PASS2 O Pass fail result of limit check 2 TTL Out Pass 2 15 AGND Ground 16 UC_DRV_PORT1 O Used as drive ports OUTPut UPORt ECBits OFF or channel bits OUTPut UPORt ECBits ON default If used as drive ports DRIVE PORT i is active while test port i is the source port If used as channel bits the pin states can be defined using OUTPut Ch UPORt VALue 17 UC_DRV_PORT2 O 18 UC_DRV_PORT3 O 19 UC_D...

Page 1383: ...ing of an RJ 45 connector a network interface card and protocols The network interface card supports IEEE 802 3 for a 10 Mbps Ethernet and IEEE 802 3u for a 100 Mbps Ethernet Instrument access is possible via the VXI 11 protocol It is usually achieved from high level programming platforms by using the Virtual Instrument Software Architecture VISA library as an intermediate abstraction layer VISA e...

Page 1384: ...el of the instrument The GPIB bus interface is intended for remote control of the R S ZNB ZNBT from a controller Characteristics of the interface 8 bit parallel data transfer Bidirectional data transfer Three line handshake High data transfer rate of max 1 MByte s Up to 15 devices can be connected Wired OR if several instruments are connected in parallel Pin assignment Bus lines Data bus with 8 li...

Page 1385: ...e data bus The R S ZNB ZNBT provides several functions to communicate via GPIB bus They are described in the following sections 11 3 3 1 Interface Functions Instruments which can be controlled via GPIB bus can be equipped with different inter face functions The interface functions for the R S ZNB ZNBT are listed in the follow ing table Control character Interface function SH1 Handshake source func...

Page 1386: ... End of the parallel poll state Addressed commands Addressed commands are encoded in the range 00 through 0F hex They are only effective for instruments addressed as listeners Command QuickBASIC com mand Effect on the instrument GET Group Execute Trigger IBTRG device Triggers a previously active device function e g a sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the extern...

Page 1387: ...he possible start and the end of a measurement as well as a global limit check result Typically the handler will insert the device to be tested into a test fixture provide a trigger pulse to initiate the measurement remove and replace the device after the measurement is complete and sort it into pass fail bins A sample flow diagram for this process is shown below Figure 11 1 Possible stages of an ...

Page 1388: ... for Trigger signals using SCPI commands CONTrol HANDler INPut queries the high to low transitions of the Input 1 signal The CONTrol HANDler OUTPut Pt commands set the output signals to a definite state and specify whether this state will change to Low when the Input 1 signal goes to Low This mechanism provides either static output signals or out put signals which are controlled by Input 1 The Ind...

Page 1389: ...tions via data port signals are usually performed in a preliminary stage before the actual measurement sequence If the Index and Ready for Trigger signals are enabled at this stage see Chapter 11 3 4 1 Control Signals on page 1388 they replace the PORT B6 and PORT B7 signals Port B can still be used as a 6 bit parallel input output port Figure 11 3 Data ports and related signals Combined ports por...

Page 1390: ...B7 B0 A7 A0 port H SCPI commands See Chapter 8 3 3 CONTrol Commands on page 956 11 3 4 3 Universal Interface Connector The Handler I O Universal Interface option includes a Centronics 36 input output con nector The R S ZNB s internal Handler I O option R S ZN B14 is placed in the right hand part of the network analyzer s rear panel It must be installed by a Rohde Schwarz service representative The...

Page 1391: ...T 1 and OUTPUT 2 signals pins no 3 and 4 change to Low 3 OUTPUT 1 O Changes to Low when the INPUT 1 pin no 2 receives a negative pulse 4 OUTPUT 2 O Changes to Low when the INPUT 1 pin no 2 receives a negative pulse 5 PORT A0 I or O Port A bit no 0 8 bit parallel input or output port 6 PORT A1 I or O Port A bit no 1 7 PORT A2 I or O Port A bit no 2 8 PORT A3 I or O Port A bit no 3 9 PORT A4 I or O ...

Page 1392: ...23 PORT C1 I or O Port C bit no 1 24 PORT C2 I or O Port C bit no 2 25 PORT C3 I or O Port C bit no 3 26 PORT D0 I or O Port D bit no 0 4 bit parallel input or output port 27 PORT D1 I or O Port D bit no 1 28 PORT D2 I or O Port D bit no 2 29 PORT D3 I or O Port D bit no 3 30 PORT C STA TUS O Indicates the status of port C Low port C is an input port High port C is an output port 31 PORT D STA TUS...

Page 1393: ...ersal Interface 5 V 5 V Figure 11 6 Circuit diagram of the input path Digital output signals are low voltage TTL compatible with output voltages between 0 V and 5 V The circuit diagram of the output path is shown below To Universal Interface 100 5 V 22 pF 10 Figure 11 7 Circuit diagram of the output path The default configuration of the signals is listed below Notice that RST or Preset do not chan...

Page 1394: ...ent settings Figure 11 8 Timing of measurement control signals The figure above corresponds to the default configuration of the PASS FAIL signal For alternative configurations refer to the documentation of the CONTrol HANDler PASSfail commands in Chapter 8 3 3 CONTrol Com mands on page 956 The figure contains the following pulse durations and response times Time Description Value T1 Pulse duration...

Page 1395: ...ptional RFFE GPIO Interface board is available 11 3 5 1 Pin Assignment This extension board is equipped with a standard 25 pin female D sub connector pro viding 2 independent RF Front End RFFE interfaces according to the MIPI Alliance System Power Management Interface Specification and 10 General Purpose Input Output GPIO ports Figure 11 9 D sub 25 pin female connector front view Table 11 2 PIN ma...

Page 1396: ...sheet or the R S ZN Z15 data sheet for details Table 11 3 RFFE Bus Interface Parameter MIN V MAX V Step size V IO voltage 0 2 5 0 001 Low voltage 0 2 5 0 001 High voltage 0 2 5 0 001 MAX mA Current 20 MIN kHz MAX kHz Possible values kHz Clock frequency 31 25 26000 52000 n with n 1664 2 All remaining data e g rise time are according to the specification v 1 00 of the MIPI Alliance Group Table 11 4 ...

Page 1397: ...o 200 μA 100 nA 10 kΩ source resistance shunt 20 μA to 20 μA 10 nA 100 kΩ source resistance shunt 2 μA to 2 μA 1 nA GPIO 9 and 10 100 mA to 100 mA 10 μA the current values are valid if the GPIO voltages are within 5 V to 9 V 11 4 Maintenance The R S ZNB ZNBT vector network analyzer does not require any special mainte nance For our support center address and a list of useful R S contact addresses r...

Page 1398: ...a soft dry lint free dust cloth 2 Check and clean the fans regularly to ensure that they always operate properly 11 4 2 Storing and Packing the Instrument The vector network analyzer can be stored at the temperature range quoted in the data sheet When it is stored for a longer period of time the unit must be protected against dust 11 4 3 Replacing Fuses The R S ZNBT is protected by a time lag fuse...

Page 1399: ...If necessary move the recall set file znx znxml to the appro priate location 3 Under the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Rohde Schwarz Vna create a new subkey ShowroomMode 4 Within the ShowroomMode subkey create the string value ShowroomSetup 5 Modify the value ShowroomSetup set its value data to the full path of the recall set Use forward slashes as path separators e g C Documents and Se...

Page 1400: ...ALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters R Cmp CALCulate 1 4 FSIMulator SENDed ZCONver sion STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe Ch LPORt LogPt ZDEFault STATe CALCulate 1 4 FSIMulator SENDed ZCONver sion PORT i Z0 R numeric SENSe Ch PORT PhyPt ZREFerence CALCulate Ch FSIMulator STATe ON OFF 1 0 n a enabled channel by channel port by port CALCulate 1 4 SELected DATA FDATa CALCulate 1 4 S...

Page 1401: ...Culate 1 4 SELected MARKer 1 10 Y CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk Y CALCulate 1 4 SELected MATH FUNCtion NORMal ADD SUBTract MULTiply DIVide CALCulate Chn MATH FUNCtion CALCulate 1 4 SELected MATH MEMorize CALCulate Chn MATH MEMorize CALCulate 1 4 PARameter COUNt numeric CALCulate 1 4 PARameter 1 7 DEFine S11 S21 S31 S41 S12 S22 S32 S42 S13 S23 S33 S43 S14 S24 S34 S44 CALCulate Ch PARameter DEFine CALCula...

Page 1402: ...Lect DISPlay WINDow 1 4 MAXimize ON OFF 1 0 DISPlay WINDow Wnd MAXimize DISPlay WINDow SPLit DISPlay WINDow 1 4 TITLe DATA string DISPlay WINDow Wnd TITLe DATA DISPlay WINDow 1 4 TITLe STATe ON OFF 1 0 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TITLe STATe DISPlay WINDow Ch TRACe Tr MEM ory STATe ON OFF 1 0 TRACe COPY DISPlay WIN Dow 1 4 TRACe 1 7 Y SCALe AUTO DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe AUTO DISPlay WINDow 1 ...

Page 1403: ...ic3 numeric4 MMEMory STORe TRACe PORTs MMEMory STORe STYPe STATe CSTate DSTate CDSTate MMEMory STORe STATe Always saves measurement conditions and calibra tion state CSTate regardless of what you set it to SENSe 1 4 AVERage CLEar SENSe Ch AVERage CLEar SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt numeric SENSe Ch AVERage COUNt SENSe 1 4 AVERage STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe Ch AVERage STATe SENSe 1 4 BWIDth RESolution bandwi...

Page 1404: ...ETHod SOLT1 numeric SENSe 1 4 CORRection COL Lect METHod SOLT2 numeric1 numeric2 SENSe 1 4 CORRection COL Lect METHod SOLT3 numeric1 numeric2 numeric3 SENSe 1 4 CORRection COL Lect METHod SOLT4 1 2 3 4 SENSe 1 4 CORRection COL Lect METHod RESPonse THRU numeric1 numeric2 SENSe 1 4 CORRection COL Lect METHod TYPE SENSe 1 4 CORRection TYPE 1 4 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine SENSe 1 4 CORRe...

Page 1405: ...ce 1 4 POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLi tude numeric SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude SOURce ch POWer pt CORRection STATe ON OFF 1 0 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection STATe SOURce ch POWer pt CORRection COL Lect AVERage COUNt numeric SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect AVERage COUNt SOURce POWer pt CORRection COLLect AVER age NTOLerance numeric SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLec...

Page 1406: ...us QUEStionable LIMit NTRansition numeric STATus QUEStionable LIMit Lev NTRansition STATus QUEStionable LIMit PTRansition numeric STATus QUEStionable LIMit Lev PTRansition SYSTem BEEPer WARNing STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate Chn LIMit SOUNd STATe SYSTem KLOCk KBD ON OFF 1 0 SYSTem KLOCk TRIGger SEQuence SOURce INTernal EXTernal MANual BUS TRIGger Ch SEQuence SOURce ENA Emulation Commands ...

Page 1407: ...each channel that has been selected as the active trace CALCulate Ch PARameter SELect trace name Many commands e g TRACE act on the active trace It can be different from the active trace in manual control C Cal pool The cal pool is a collection of correction data sets cal groups that the ana lyzer stores in a common directory Cal groups in the pool can be applied to different channels and recall s...

Page 1408: ... the screen used to display traces Diagram areas are arranged in windows they are independent of trace and channel settings Directivity error Measurement error caused by a coupler or bridge in the analyzer s source port causing part of the generated signal to leak through the forward path into the receive path instead of being transmitted towards the DUT The directivity error can be corrected by m...

Page 1409: ... reaches 0 dB Intermodulation measurement Measurement where the DUT is supplied with two RF signals of equal power but different frequencies termed the upper and lower tone The analyzer measures the frequency converting behavior of the DUT intermodu lation product Intermodulation product Special type of emissions of a nonlinear DUT that is sup plied with a two tone RF signal intermodulation measur...

Page 1410: ... tion between constants and the data or memory traces of the active recall set Measurement point Result of the measurement at a specified stimulus value fre quency power time Measurement result Set of all measurement points acquired in a measurement e g a sweep The measurement result is displayed in a diagram area and forms a trace Memory trace Trace that is associated to a data trace and stored i...

Page 1411: ...zation Stimulus value Value of the sweep variable frequency power time point number where a measurement is taken Also termed sweep point Sweep Series of consecutive measurements taken at a specified sequence of stimu lus values series of consecutive measurement points Sweep point Value of the sweep variable stimulus value frequency power time where a measurement is taken Sweep range Continuous ran...

Page 1412: ... assumed to be ideally matched Beyond that the through must be lossless and its length must be exactly known Especially useful for DUTs in planar line technology TRM A calibration type which requires a low reflection low loss Through standard with an electrical length that may be different from zero a Reflect and a Match Espe cially useful for DUTs in test fixtures TSM A calibration type using thr...

Page 1413: ... 1091 SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT PASSword 1092 SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT PORTs 1093 SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT PORTs ADD 1094 SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO MCONnect 1094 SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs CONNection 1095 SENSe CORRection COLLect AVERage 1095 SENSe CORRection COLLect CHANnels ALL 1095 SENSe CORRection COLLect CHANnels MCTYpes 1096 SENSe CORRection COLLect ...

Page 1414: ...OLLect CONNection PORTs 1111 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection PhyPt 1110 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect DELete 1112 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect DISCard 1112 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure EXPort 1114 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure IMPort 1114 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure SAVE 1115 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure STARt 1116 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure ACQuire 1113 SE...

Page 1415: ...RRection STIMulus 1137 SENSe Ch CORRection STATe 1099 SENSe Ch COUPle 1143 SENSe Ch DC DCInp RANGe 1144 SENSe Ch FREQuency CENTer 1146 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion 1147 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion ARBitrary 1147 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion ARBitrary PMETer Pmtr 1147 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion GAIN LMCorrection 1149 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVersion MIXer FIXed Stg 1149 SENSe Ch FREQuency CONVe...

Page 1416: ...64 SENSe Ch PAE DCINput MAIN 1165 SENSe Ch PAE DCINput SECondary 1166 SENSe Ch PAE PARameters I 1166 SENSe Ch PAE PARameters R 1166 SENSe Ch PAE PARameters U 1167 SENSe Ch PAE TYPE 1167 SENSe Ch PORT PhyPt ZREFerence 1168 SENSe Ch POWer AGCMode ACQuire 1169 SENSe Ch POWer AGCMode SAVE 1170 SENSe Ch POWer AGCMode PhyPt MEASure 1170 SENSe Ch POWer ATTenuation 1171 SENSe Ch POWer GAINcontrol 1171 SEN...

Page 1417: ...Se Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep TIME SUM 1194 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg STATe 1176 SENSe Ch SWEep AXIS FREQuency 1195 SENSe Ch SWEep AXIS POWer 1196 SENSe Ch SWEep COUNt 1197 SENSe Ch SWEep DETector TIME 1197 SENSe Ch SWEep DWELl 1198 SENSe Ch SWEep DWELl IPOint 1199 SENSe Ch SWEep GENeration 1199 SENSe Ch SWEep GENeration ANALog CONDition 1199 SENSe Ch SWEep POINts 1200 SENSe Ch SWEep SPACing 1330 SENSe Ch SW...

Page 1418: ...2 CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt SCALe FTIMe 803 CALCulate FMODel ISD Ph_pt TRACe COUPling 803 CALCulate FMODel REName 803 CALCulate FMODel SFD Ph_pt AUTO 804 CALCulate FMODel SFD Ph_pt COUPon MEASure 804 CALCulate FMODel SFD Ph_pt COUPon MEASure FILename 804 CALCulate FMODel SFD Ph_pt COUPon TYPE 804 CALCulate FMODel SFD Ph_pt COUPon STATe 805 CALCulate FMODel SFD Ph_pt DIFFcfg 805 CALCulate FMODel S...

Page 1419: ...Tworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt PARameters R Cmp 915 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt TNDefinition 916 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt STATe 911 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt PARameters C Cmp 917 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt PARameters DATA 917 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFer...

Page 1420: ...DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters C Cmp 939 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters DATA 938 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters G Cmp 940 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters L Cmp 941 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters R Cmp 941 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbe...

Page 1421: ... CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer TYPE PERiodic 777 CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer TYPE RANDom 777 CALCulate Chn EYE JITTer TYPE USER 778 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK AUTO 778 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK CENTer HORizontal 778 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK CENTer VERTical 778 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK DATA 779 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK FAIL BEEP 781 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK FAIL CONDition 781 CALCulate Chn EYE MASK FAIL 780 CALCulate Chn...

Page 1422: ...CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle DATA 812 CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle DISPlay STATe 812 CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle FAIL 813 CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle SOUNd STATe 813 CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle STATe 811 CALCulate Chn LIMit CLEar 813 CALCulate Chn LIMit CONTrol DOMain 1309 CALCulate Chn LIMit CONTrol SHIFt 815 CALCulate Chn LIMit CONTrol DATA 814 CALCulate Chn LIMit DATA 815 CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle C...

Page 1423: ...er Mk BWIDth 833 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk DELTa STATe 834 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk EXCursion 834 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk EXCursion STATe 835 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FORMat 835 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion BWIDth 1313 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion BWIDth MODE 836 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion CENTer 836 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DELTa STATe 1314 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMai...

Page 1424: ...STATe 854 CALCulate Chn MATH WUNit STATe 855 CALCulate Chn MATH EXPRession SDEFine 852 CALCulate Chn MATH EXPRession DEFine 1316 CALCulate Chn PHOLd 865 CALCulate Chn RIPPle CLEar 866 CALCulate Chn RIPPle CONTrol DOMain 867 CALCulate Chn RIPPle DATA 867 CALCulate Chn RIPPle DELete ALL 868 CALCulate Chn RIPPle DISPlay STATe 869 CALCulate Chn RIPPle FAIL 869 CALCulate Chn RIPPle RDOMain FORMat 869 C...

Page 1425: ... TRANsform DTFault CENTer 895 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault DEFine 894 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault DELete 894 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK COUNt 896 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK DATA FaultNo 896 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK STATe 896 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK THReshold 897 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault POINts 897 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault SELect 895...

Page 1426: ...Trol AUXiliary C DATA 957 CONTrol GPIO SENSe SUMCurrent 959 CONTrol GPIO Port SENSe CURRent 959 CONTrol GPIO Port SENSe VOLTage 958 CONTrol HANDler A MODE 964 CONTrol HANDler A DATA 963 CONTrol HANDler B MODE 964 CONTrol HANDler B DATA 963 CONTrol HANDler C MODE 964 CONTrol HANDler C DATA 963 CONTrol HANDler D MODE 964 CONTrol HANDler D DATA 963 CONTrol HANDler E DATA 963 CONTrol HANDler F DATA 96...

Page 1427: ...ONTrol Ch RFFE Bus SETTings STATe 972 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk 973 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk RANGe 974 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST CLOCk SHUNt 974 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST DATA 973 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST DATA RANGe 974 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST DATA SHUNt 974 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST VIO 973 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST VIO RANGe 974 CONTrol Ch RFFE Bus TEST VIO SHUNt 974 CONTrol Ch SEGMent N...

Page 1428: ...Wnd OVERview STATe 986 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TITLe DATA 987 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TITLe STATe 987 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr CATalog 987 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr DELete 988 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr EFEed 988 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED 989 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr LABel SHOW 989 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr SHOW 990 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr X OFFSet 991 DISPlay WIND...

Page 1429: ...ate DUMMy 1016 INPut PhyPt ATTenuation 1318 INSTrument NSELect 1018 INSTrument PORT COUNt 1018 INSTrument SMATrix 1018 INSTrument TPORt COUNt 1018 INSTrument SELect 1318 MEMory CATalog COUNt 1019 MEMory CATalog 1019 MEMory DEFine 1019 MEMory DELete ALL 1020 MEMory DELete NAME 1020 MEMory SELect 1020 MMEMory AKAL FACTory CONVersion 1023 MMEMory AKAL USER CONVersion 1023 MMEMory CATalog ALL 1024 MME...

Page 1430: ...MBedding ListId 1047 MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt 1048 MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch SENDed EMBedding PhyPt 1049 MMEMory MDIRectory 1049 MMEMory MOVE 1050 MMEMory MSIS 1050 MMEMory NAME 1051 MMEMory RDIRectory 1051 MMEMory STORe CABLe 1051 MMEMory STORe CKIT 1052 MMEMory STORe CKIT WLABel 1052 MMEMory STORe CMAP 1053 MMEMory STORe CORRection 1053 MMEMory STORe CORRection TCOeffic...

Page 1431: ...t COUNt 1214 SOURce Ch GROup Grp NAME 1215 SOURce Ch GROup Grp PORDer 1215 SOURce Ch GROup Grp PORTs 1216 SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORt PhyPort DPORt 1217 SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORts 1216 SOURce Ch GROup Grp SIMultaneous FOFFset CONDition 1223 SOURce Ch GROup Grp SIMultaneous FOFFset MOFFset BWFactor 1222 SOURce Ch GROup Grp SIMultaneous FOFFset MOFFset DVALue 1222 SOURce Ch GROup Grp SIMultaneous FOFF...

Page 1432: ...er PhyPt CORRection ACQuire 1229 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection ACQuire VERification RESult 1230 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt GENerator Gen OFFSet 1249 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt GENerator Gen PERManent STATe 1250 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt GENerator Gen STATe 1250 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt PERManent STATe 1251 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt REDuce STATe 1251 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STARt 1252 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STATe 1252 ...

Page 1433: ...YSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator Gen CATalog 1265 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator Gen DEFine 1266 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator Gen SEPMode 1268 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator Gen SEPower 1268 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer CATalog 1268 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer CONFigure AUTO STATe 1269 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt 1269 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer ...

Page 1434: ...1284 SYSTem DISPlay CONDuctances 1284 SYSTem DISPlay DIALogs SETup MCAL STATe 1284 SYSTem DISPlay TRACes CCOunt 1285 SYSTem DISPlay UPDate 1285 SYSTem ERRor ALL 1285 SYSTem ERRor DISPlay ERRor 1286 SYSTem ERRor DISPlay INFO 1286 SYSTem ERRor DISPlay STATe 1287 SYSTem ERRor DISPlay WARNings 1286 SYSTem ERRor DISPlay REMote 1286 SYSTem ERRor NEXT 1285 SYSTem FIRMware UPDate 1287 SYSTem FPReset 1287 ...

Page 1435: ...298 TRACe CLEar 1332 TRACe COPY 1299 TRACe COPY MATH 1300 TRACe DATA STIMulus ALL 1333 TRACe DATA RESPonse ALL 1333 TRIGger CHANnel Ch AUXiliary n DURation 1306 TRIGger CHANnel Ch AUXiliary n INTerval 1307 TRIGger CHANnel Ch AUXiliary n OPOLarity 1307 TRIGger CHANnel Ch AUXiliary n POSition 1308 TRIGger CHANnel Ch AUXiliary n ENABle 1306 TRIGger Ch SEQuence HOLDoff 1302 TRIGger Ch SEQuence LINK 13...

Page 1436: ... 538 Set All Items to Low Distortion 538 Set All Items to Low Noise 538 AGC Mode Low Dist 536 Low Noise 536 All Data Func to Destination 304 All Data to Destination 304 All Partial Meas ments 396 All S Params 253 Annexes 1379 Aperture 133 Aperture Points 289 Applic softtool 612 External Tools application 612 Eye Diag tab 618 Eye Mask Test tab 632 Rise Time tab 637 Skew tab 638 TDR application 614 ...

Page 1437: ...erization 421 430 454 463 Calibrate all Channels 434 Devices 478 Intermodulation 549 Manual 432 Ports 420 429 433 443 Power calibration settings 490 Procedure 416 program example 1360 SMARTerCal Manual 465 Source port 434 444 Sweep diagrams 425 438 472 Type 421 430 434 444 Calibration manual Connector 436 470 Same Connector All Ports 436 471 Same Gender All Ports 436 471 Sweep 439 Calibration syst...

Page 1438: ...57 Clear Test 360 Define circle 360 Draw Circle 360 Limit Check 358 Limit Fail Beep 359 Show Limit Circle 357 Circular diagrams 69 Cleaning 1397 CMRR measurement 276 CMRR12 softkey 277 CMRR21 softkey 277 Color Scheme 662 Colorize Trace when Failed 665 Command common 720 device specific 720 processing 730 recognition 730 sequence 730 structure and syntax 720 synchronization 730 Command reference 75...

Page 1439: ...er Frmt 290 DHCP server LAN configuration 31 Diagram 58 81 298 656 Active Diagram 657 Add Tr Diag 657 Delete Diagram 658 Maximize Diagram 658 Name 658 Overlay All 658 programming examples 1338 Show Title 658 Title 658 Trace List 657 Dialog 103 Dialogs 57 Differential imbalance measurement 277 Differential mode 128 130 Differential Mode 260 Direct Control Interface 43 45 Display 34 Diagram 656 Disp...

Page 1440: ...s 620 Display measurements 618 DUT 630 Emphasis 625 Enable disable 618 Equalization 631 Export measurements 620 Generator bit pattern 625 Generator bit stream 621 Generator bit stream file 622 Generator bit stream length 621 Generator encoder 625 Generator levels 622 625 Generator low pass 623 Generator modulation 622 625 Generator rise time 623 625 Generator scrambler 625 Generator settings 624 G...

Page 1441: ...nse Value 362 Show Horiz Line 362 I Ideal cal kit 163 IEC IEEE Bus Interface 1384 IECWIN32 715 IEEE 488 CH 1 1384 IEEE 488 CH 2 1384 IFC 1384 1385 Imag 288 Image Suppr Auto 535 LO RF 535 LO RF 535 Imb12 softkey 277 Imb21 softkey 277 Imbal CMRR tab 276 Imbalance softkey 277 Imbalance Differential dialog 277 Imbalance measurement 276 Imbalance parameters 131 Impedance 120 Import Cal Kit 437 471 Swee...

Page 1442: ...play Circle tab 360 Horiz Line tab 361 Limit Test tab 344 Ripple Test tab 352 LLO 1385 Load Match Correction 498 LOC 1383 Log Errors 691 Log Freq 398 Log Mag 287 Logical Port Offset Embed Differential Match 601 Loss Active 564 Loss bandfilter 101 Loss at DC 578 Loss at Freq 578 Loss parameters definition 184 Low pass impulse 204 Low Pass Settings dialog 314 Low pass step 204 Lower edge bandfilter ...

Page 1443: ...display 40 Minimize application 27 MINimum 724 Mixed mode parameters 130 Mixer Mode 551 Mixer Mode tab Controls 552 Mode conversion factor 130 Mode tab AGC Manual Configuration dialog 537 AGC Mode 536 Driving Mode 534 Image Suppr 535 Segmented AGC 537 Modify Cal Power dialog 493 Modify Cal Power dialog 524 Modify Frequency Conversion dialog 522 Frequency conversion formula 523 Monitor 25 Monitor D...

Page 1444: ...ZNBT8 B112 203 227 R S ZNBT8 B116 203 R S ZNBT8 B120 203 R S ZNBT8 B124 203 R S ZNBT8 B504 232 R S ZNBT8 B508 203 232 R S ZNBT8 B512 203 232 R S ZNBT8 B516 203 232 R S ZNBT8 B520 203 232 R S ZNBT8 B524 232 R S ZNBT20 B112 227 R S ZNBTxx B21 231 R S ZNBTxx B22 231 R S ZNBTxx B23 231 R S ZNBTxx B24 231 R S ZNBTxx B25 231 R S ZNBTxx B26 231 R S ZNBxx B22 231 R S ZNBxx B24 231 Option R S ZNB B19 42 Op...

Page 1445: ...nt of IM Order 547 Preparing for use 33 Preset 747 Preset Configuration 673 Preset Scope 673 Presets system settings 672 Print 609 Printer 26 Printing data 77 Program example 1360 calibration 1360 Programming examples 1335 PTNA 181 PTOM 181 PTOSM 181 PTR 736 PTRansition 735 PTRL 181 PTRM 181 PTSM 181 Public folder 1021 PUOSM 181 Putting into operation 19 Q Quality factor bandfilter 101 Query 720 Q...

Page 1446: ...93 Ref Val Marker 382 Ref Value 292 Reference impedance 119 Reference position 68 Reference Receiver Cal Power 495 Reference value 68 Reflection measurement example 78 Release notes 14 17 REM 1383 Remote control 713 1344 activation 716 basic concepts 726 introduction 713 Remote Control Codec 672 combine with manual control 719 Remote desktop 32 Remote Language 688 Remote Preset Configuration 673 R...

Page 1447: ... Connector Types 675 Search Range dialog 370 Range Limit Lines On 371 Search Range 370 Select Marker 370 Security procedures 14 Seg X Axis 401 Segmented AGC 537 Segmented sweep 398 Define Segments dialog 402 Export segments 404 Import segments 404 Select Parameter dialog 341 Select Ports dialog 342 Selectivity 391 Selftest 686 Selftest info 686 Sequential command execution 730 Serial Poll 745 Serv...

Page 1448: ...9 Dual Split 660 Quad Split 660 Triple Split 660 Split Type 661 Src for Rcvr Cal 546 SRE 734 738 SRQ 734 744 1384 Stability softkey 279 Stability factors 133 Stability tab 279 Standby and ready state 24 Standby key 37 41 START 88 Start Marker 381 Start Frequency 385 Start Power 387 Startup and shutdown 23 Status bar 56 Status Bar Show hide 669 Status Registers 734 Status reporting system common co...

Page 1449: ...Domain Transform 203 Time domain transformation Impulse Response 313 Type 313 Time Domain X Axis tab 388 Time Gate 317 639 Bandpass 317 Notch 317 Shape 318 Show Range Lines 317 Side Lobe Level 318 Time Span 388 Time Start 388 Time Stop 388 Time sweep 400 Time vs Distance 389 Title diagram 93 Title bar 52 Show hide 669 Title Bar Task Bar 613 Tone Distance intermodulation 547 Tool 3 Tool 8 613 Tool ...

Page 1450: ...filter 101 Upper limit 134 Upper Tone intermodulation 546 Upper lower case remote control 749 USB front panel 38 Front panel 41 USB Device rear panel 42 44 USB Host rear panel 42 44 USB to GPIB Adapter 237 USB to IEC IEEE adapter 691 USB to IEC IEEE Adapter 237 Use Cal tab All Power Cals Off 499 All Power Cals On 499 Controls 498 Recall Last Cal Set 499 User Cal Active 498 Use Trc Color for Limit ...

Page 1451: ...r 123 Z parameters 274 Z S11 softkey 272 Z S12 softkey 272 Z S21 softkey 272 Z S22 softkey 272 Z Sij tab 271 Z11 softkey 275 Z12 softkey 275 Z21 softkey 275 Z22 softkey 275 Zero Delay at Marker 382 Zoom 66 Max 296 Min 296 Overview On 296 Start 296 Stop 296 Zoom Reset 296 Zoom Select 295 Zoom tab 294 Sie haben Fragen oder wünschen eine Beratung Angebotsanfrage unter 07121 51 50 50 oder über info da...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands